EFTA00281516.pdf

INTERnt, FZ !1 H I LOCI n LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction Fort! 2009 Edition EFTA00281516 LEED® 2009 for Commercial Interiors Total Possible Points** 110* Sustainable Sites 21 Water Efficiency 11 Energy & Atmosphere 37 0 Materials & Resources 14 Indoor Environmental Quality 17 'Out of a possible 100 points + 10 bonus points "Certified 40+ points, Silver 50+ points, Gold 6O+ pants, Platinum 804- points • Innovation in Oesign 6 O Regional Priority 4 800.795.1747 USGBC.org SBN 978 -932444- 8-6 90000 9 781932 4 4 4 1 8 6 EFTA00281517 flUME FEORA ME C The built environment has a profound impact on our natural environment, economy, health, and productivity. Breakthroughs in building science, technology, and operations are now available to designers, builders, operators, and owners who want to build green and maximize both economic and environmental performance. Through the LEEDtgreen building certification program, the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) is transforming the built environment The green building movement offers an unprecedented opportunity to respond to the most important challenges of our time, including global climate change, dependence on non sustainable and expensive sources of energy, and threats to human health. The work of innovative building professionals is a fundamental driving force in the green building moment. Such leadership is a critical component to achieving USGBC's mission of a sustainable built environment for all within a generation. USGBC MEMBERSHIP USGBC's greatest strength is the diversity of our membership. USGBC is a balanced, consensus- based nonprofit with more than 18,000 member companies and organizations representing the entire building industry. Since its inception in 1993, USGBC has played a vital role in providing a leadership forum and a unique, integrating force for the building industry. USGBC's programs have three distinguishing characteristics: Committee-based The heart of this effective coalition is our committee structure, in which volunteer members design strategies that are implemented by staff and expert consultants. Our committees provide a forum for members to resolve differences, build alliances, and forge cooperative solutions for influencing change in all sectors of the building industry. Member-driven Membership is open andbalancedand provides a comprehensive platform forcarryingout important programs and activities. We target the issues identified by our members as the highest priority. We conduct an annual review of achievements that allows us to set policy, revise strategies, and devise work plans based on members' needs. Consensus-focused We work together to promote green buildings, and in doing so, we help foster greater economic vitality and environmental health at lower costs. We work to bridge ideological gaps between industry segments and develop balanced policies that benefit the entire industry. Contact the U.S. Green Building Council moll-Street, NW Suite Soo Washington, DC 20036 www.usgbc.org 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EFTA00281518 COPYRIGHT Copyright sci 2009 by the U.S. Green Building Council. MI rights reserved. The U.S. Green Building Council, Inc. (USGBC) devoted significant time and resources to create this LEED ®Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction, 2009 Edition. USGBC authorizes individual use of the Reference Guide. In exchange for this authorization, the user agrees: (t) to retain all copyright and other proprietary notices contained in the Reference Guide, (2) not to sell or modify the Reference Guide, and C3) not to reproduce, display, or distribute the Reference Guide in any way for any public or commercial purpose, including display on a website or in a networked environment. Unauthorized use of the Reference Guide violates copyright, trademark, and other laws and is prohibited. The text of the federal and state codes, regulations, voluntary standards, etc., reproduced in the Reference Guide is used under license to USGBC or, in some instances, in the public domain. MI other text, graphics, layout, and other elements of content in the Reference Guide are owned by USGBC and are protected by copyright under both United States and foreign laws. NOTE: for downloads of the Reference Guide: Redistributing the Reference Guide on the intemet or otherwise is STRICTLY prohibited even if offered free of charge. DOWNLOADS OF THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT BE COPIED OR DISTRIBUTED. THE USER OF THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT ALTER, REDISTRIBUTE, UPLOAD OR PUBLISH THIS REFERENCE GUIDE IN WHOLE OR IN PART, AND HAS NO RIGHT TO LEND OR SELL THE DOWNLOAD OR COPIES OF THE DOWNLOAD TO OTHER PERSONS. DISCLAIMER None of the parties involved in the funding or creation of the Reference Guide, including the USGBC, its members, its contractors, or the United States government, assume any liability or responsibility to the user or any third parties for the accuracy, completeness, or use of or reliance on any information contained In the Reference Guide, or for any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief) arising from such use or reliance. Although the information contained in the Reference Guide is believed to be reliable and accurate, all materials set forth within are provided without warranties ofany kind,eitherexpress orimplied,includingbut not limited to warranties of the accuracy or completeness of information contained in the training or the suitability of the information for any particular purpose. As a condition of use, the user covenants not to sue and agrees to waive and release the U.S. Green Building Council, its members, its contractors, and the United States government from any and all claims, demands, and causes of action for any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief) that the user may now or hereafter have a right to assert against such parties as a result of the use of, or reliance on, the Reference Guide. U.S. Green Building Council 2101 L Street, NW Suite 500 Washington, DC 20036 II LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281519 TRADEMARK LEED° is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council. LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction For the Design, Construction and Renovation of Commercial and Institutional Interiors Projects 2009 Edition ISBN # 978-t-932444-15-5 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction, 2009 Edition, has been made possible only through the efforts of many dedicated volunteers, staff members, and others in the USGBC community. The Reference Guide drafting was managed and implemented by USGBC staff and consultants and included review and suggestions by many Technical Advisory Group (TAG) members.We especiallyextend our deepestgratitude to all ofour LEED committee members who participated in the development of this guide, for their tireless volunteer efforts and constant support of USGBC's mission: LEED Steering Committee Scot Horst, Chair, LSC Joel Ann Todd, Vice-Chair, LSC Muscoe Martin Stuart Carron Holley Henderson Christine Magar Kristin Shewfelt Jessica Millman Bryna Dunn Neal Billetdeaux Greg Kats Mark Webster Bob Thompson Malcolm Lewis John Boecker Sara O'Mara Alex Zimmerman Ian Theaker Sustainable Sites TAG Bryna Dunn, Chair Stewart Comstock, Vice-Chair Michele Adams Gina Baker Ted Bardacke Stephen Benz Mark Brumbaugh Laura Case Zach Christeson Jay Enck Ron Hand Horst, Inc Joel Ann Todd M2 Architecture JohnsonDiversey, Inc. H2 Ecodesign, LLC Greenform Architectural Energy Corporation Agora DC Moseley Architects JJR Managing Good Energies Simpson Gumpertz & Heger EPA Indoor Environment Management Branch Constructive Technologies Group, Inc. 7Group Choate Construction Company Rep Canada Green Building Council Rep Canada Green Building Council Moseley Architects Maryland Department of the Environment Cahill Associates Burt Hill Global Green USA Sasaki Brumbaugh SE Associates Emory University Campus Services the HOK Planning Group Commissioning Sc Green Building Services EfFECT. Sustainable Design Solutions 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION iii EFTA00281520 Richard Heinisch Michael Lane Marita Roos ZoIna Russell Alfred Vick Water Efficiency TAG Neal Billetdeaux, Chair John Koeller,Vice-Chair , David Carlson Bill Hoffman Geoff Nara Stephanie Tanner Daniel Yeh David Bracciano Robert Rubin Winston Huff Robert Benazzi Gunnar Baldwin Heather Kinkade Shabbir Rawalpindiwala Bill Wall Energy and Atmosphere TAG Greg Kats, Chair Marcus Sheffer, Vice-Chair Drury Crawley Jay Enck Ellen Franconi Mark Frankel Nathan Gauthier Rusty Hodapp John Hogan Bion Howard Dan Katzenberger Bob Maddox Brenda Morawa Erik Ring Michael Rosenberg Mick Schwedler Cord Shymko Gail Stranske Michael Zimmer Materials and Resources TAG Mark Webster, Chair Steven Baer, Vice-chair Paul Bertram Chris Dixon Ann Edminster Acuity Lighting Group Lighting Design Lab HNTB Hord Coplan Macht, Inc. Ecos Environmental Design, Inc. DR Alliance for Water Efficiency Columbia University H.W. Hoffman and Associates, LLC Civil & Environmental Consultants U.S. Environmental Protection Agency University of South Florida Tampa Bay Water NCSU-BAE and McKim & Creed SSR Engineers Jaros Baum & Bolles TOTO USA, INC Forgotten Rain, LLC Kohler Company Clivus New England, Inc. GoodEnergies 7group US Department of Energy Commissioning & Green Building Solutions, Inc. IPMVP and AEC New Buildings Institute Harvard Green Campus Initiative Dallas/Fort Worth, Energy & Transportation Management City of Seattle Department of Planning & Development Building Environmental Science and Technology Engineering, Energy, and the Environment Sterling Planet BVM Engineering, Inc. LPA, Inc. Oregon Department of Energy Trane I PMVP and G.P. Shymko & Associates CTG Energetics Thompson Hine LLP Simpson Gumpertz & Heger Inc. Five Winds International NAIMA NBBJ Design AVEnues Iv LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281521 Lee Gros Theresa Hogerheide-Reusch Nadav Malin Nancy Malone Kirsten Ritchie Wayne Trusty Denise Van Valkenburg Gabe Wing Indoor Environmental Quality TAG Bob Thompson, Chair Steve Taylor, Vice-Chair Nancy Clanton Alexis Kurtz George Loisos Prasad Vaidya Daniel Bruck David Lubman Charles Salter Ozgem Omelctekin Jude Anders Brian Cloward Larry Dylchuis Francis (Bud) Offerman Christopher Schaffner Dennis Stanke Lee Gros Architect and Artisan, Inc Reusch Design Services BuildingGreen, LLC. Siegel & Strain Architects Gensler Athena Sustainable Materials Institute MASCO Retail Cabinet Group Herman Miller, Inc. EPA Indoor Environment Management Branch Taylor Engineering Clanton and Associates OveArup 8cPartners Loisos+ Ubelohde The Weidt Group BRC Acoustics 8c Tech. David Lubman 8cAssociates Salter Associates DMJM Harris Shoreline Concepts, LLC MithunArchitects+Designers+Planners Herman Miller, Inc Indoor Environmental Engineering The Green Engineer Trane Company This edition of the reference guide builds on the work of those who helped create previous versions: LEED for Commercial Interiors Version 2.0 Core Committee Penny Bonda Keith Winn Gina Baker Kirsten Childs Holley Henderson, Chair Don Horn Scot Horst Liana Kallivoka Jill Kowalski Fran Mazarella Roger McFarland Denise Van Valkenburg, Vice Chair Ken Wilson Elaine Aye Carlie Bullock-Jones Rico Cedro Hellen Kessler Mehran Khazra Environmental Communications Catalyst Partners Burt Hill Kosar Rittelmann Associates Craton Collaborative Architects,.. H2 Ecodesign, LLC U.S. General Services Administration Horst, Inc Austin Energy Green Building Program EwingCole U.S. General Services Administration HOK Steelcase Inc. Envision Design Green Building Services Thompson, Ventulett, Stainback 8c Associates ICrueck & Sexton HJICessler Associates, Inc Guttmann & Blaevoet Consulting Engineer 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EFTA00281522 Laurie McMahon Cassidy & Pinkard Colliers Ralph Muehliesen Illinois Institute of Technology Georgina Sikorsld INVISTA A special thanks to USGBC staff for their invaluable efforts in developing this LEED Reference Guide especially Sonia Punjabi for her technical expertise and extraordinary commitment, Lauren Riggs for her dedication and hard work, and Brendan Owens and Peter Templeton for their vision and guidance. vl LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281523 Preface Introduction xi I. Why Make Your Building Green? xi II. LEED° Green Building Rating System' xi III. Overview and Process xiii IV. LEED Online Documentation Requirements xvi V. Certification Application xvi i VI. Certification Strategy xviii VII. Exemplary Performance Strategies xix VIII. Regional Priority xix IX. Tools for Registered Projects xx X. How to Use This Reference Guide xx Sustainable Sites (SS) 1 Credit 1 Site Selection 5 Credit 1 Option 1: Select A LEED-Certified Building 8 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 1: Brownfield Redevelopment 10 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 2: Stormwater Design—Quantity Control 13 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 3: Stormwater Design—Quality Control 18 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 4: Heat Island Effect—Nonroof 21 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 5: Heat Island Effect—Roof 27 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 6: Light Pollution Reduction 32 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 7: Water Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by 50% 35 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 8: Water Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation 35 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 9: Innovative Wastewater Technologies 44 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 10: Water Use Reduction-30% Reduction 54 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 11: On-site Renewable Energy 59 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 12: Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance 66 Credit 2 Development Density and Community Connectivity 69 Credit 3.1 Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access 79 Credit 3.2 Alternative Transportation—Bicycle Storage and Changing Rooms 85 Credit 3.3 Alternative Transportation—Parking Availability 91 Water Efficiency (WE) 97 Prerequisite 1 Water Use Reduction 99 Credit 1 Water Use Reduction 111 Energy and Atmosphere (EA) 115 Prerequisite 1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems 119 Prerequisite 2 Minimum Energy Performance 137 Prerequisite 3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management 147 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION vii EFTA00281524 Credit 1.1 Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power 153 Credit 1.2 Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls 161 Credit 1.3 Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC 165 Credit 1.4 Optimize Energy Performance Appliances 177 —Equipment and Credit 2 Enhanced Commissioning 183 Credit 3 Measurement and Verification 187 Credit 4 Green Power 197 Materials and Resources (MR) 207 Prerequisite 1 Storage and Collection of Recyclables 211 Credit 1.1 Tenant Space—Long-Term Commitment 217 Credit 1.2 Building Reuse—Maintain Interior Nonstructural Components 221 Credit 2 Construction Waste Management 227 Credit 3.1 Materials Reuse 233 Credit 3.2 Materials Reuse—Furniture and Furnishings 239 Credit 4 Recycled Content 243 Credit 5 Regional Materials 253 Credit 6 Rapidly Renewable Materials 259 Credit 7 Certified Wood 267 Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) 277 Prerequisite 1 Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance 281 Prerequisite 2 Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control 291 Credit 1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring 297 Credit 2 Increased Ventilation 305 Credit 3.1 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan—During Construction 315 Credit 3.2 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan—Before Occupancy 323 Credit 4.1 Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants 331 Credit 4.2 Low-Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings 337 Credit 4.3 Low-Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems 343 Credit 4.4 Low-Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products 349 Credit 4.5 Low-Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating 353 Credit 5 Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 359 Credit 6.1 Controllability of Systems—Lighting 367 Credit 6.2 Controllability of Systems—Thermal Comfort 373 Credit 7.1 Thermal Comfort—Design 379 Credit 7.2 Thermal Comfort—Verification 387 Credit 8.1 Daylight and Views— Daylight 393 Credit 8.2 Daylight and Views—Views for Seated Spaces 407 Innovation in Design (ID) 415 Credit 1 Innovation in Design 417 Credit 2 LEED,' Accredited Professional 421 vill LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 20u9 EFTA00281525 Regional Priority (RP) 425 Credit 1 Regional Priority 427 Glossary 429 LEED 2009 for Commercial Interiors 100 base points; 6 possible Innovation in Design and 4 Regional Priority points Certified 40-49 points Silver 50-59 points Gold 60-79 points Platinum 80 points and above 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Ix EFTA00281526 x LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281527 Hri I. WHY MAKE YOUR BUILDING GREEN? r't .,.._„., The environmental impact of the building design, construction, and operations industry is enormous. Buildings annually consume more than30% of the total energy and more than 60%of the electricity used in the United States. In z006, the commercial building sector produced more than 1 billion metric tons of carbon dioxide, an increase of more than 30% over 1990 levels.' Each day s billion gallons of potable water are used solely to flush toilets. Atypical North American commercial building generates about 1.6 pounds of solid waste per employee per day; in a building with 1,500 employees, that can amount to 300 tons of waste per year. Development alters land from natural, biologically diverse habitats to hardscape that is impervious and devoid of biodiversity. The far- reaching influence of the built environment necessitates action to reduce its impact. Green building practices can substantially reduce or eliminate negative environmental impacts through high-performance, market-leading design, construction, and operations practices. As an added benefit, green operations and management reduce operating costs, enhance building marketability, increase workers' productivity, and reduce potential liability resulting from indoor air quality problems. Examples abound. Energy efficiency measures have reduced operating expenses of the Denver Dry Goods building by approximately $75,000 per year. Students in day-lit schools in North Carolina consistently score higher on tests than students in schools using conventional lighting fixtures. Studies of workers in green buildings reported productivity gains of up to t6%, including less absenteeism and higher work quality, based on "people-friendly" green design. Karges Faulconbridge, Inc., renovated a former grocery store for its new headquarters and diverted 88% of the construction waste from landfills through reuse and recycling. The largest high-rise real estate project in Sacramento, the Joe Sema Jr. Environmental Protection Agency Headquarters Building (Cal/EPA), was able to save $610,000 a year by implementing energy efficiency measures, making it 34% more energy efficient than required by California's 1998 energy code. In short, green design, construction, and operations have environmental, economic, and social elements that benefit all building stakeholders, including owners, occupants, and the general public. II. LEED°GREEN BUILDING RATING SYSTEM Background on LEED"' Following the formation of the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) in 1993, the organization's members quickly realized that the sustainable building industry needed a system to define and measure "green buildings." USGBC began to research existing green building metrics and rating systems. Less than a year after formation, the members acted on the initial findings by establishing a committee to focus solely on this topic. The composition of the committee was diverse; it included architects, real estate agents, a building owner, a lawyer, an environmentalist, and industry representatives. This cross section of people and professions added a richness and depth both to the process and to the ultimate product. The first LEED Pilot Project Program, also referred to as LEED Version 1.0, was launched at the USGBC Membership Summit in August 1998. After extensive modifications, LEED Green Building 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xi EFTA00281528 Rating System Version z.o was released in March z000, with LEED Version 2.1 following in zooz and LEED Version 2.2 following in zoos. As LEED has evolved and matured, the program has undertaken new initiatives. In addition to a rating system specifically devoted to building operational and maintenance issues (LEED for Existing Buildings: Operations & Maintenance), LEED addresses the different project development and delivery processes that exist in the U.S. building design and construction market, through rating systems for specific building typologies, sectors, and project scopes: LEED for Core & Shell, LEED for New Construction, LEED for Schools, LEED for Neighborhood Development, LEED for Retail, LEED for Healthcare, LEED for Homes, and LEED for Commercial Interiors. Projectteams interact withthe Green BuildingCertification Institute (GBCI) forprojectregistration and certification. GBCI was established in 2008 as a separately incorporated entitywith the support of the U.S. Green Building Council. GBCI administers credentialing and certification programs related to green building practice. These programs support the application of proven strategies for increasing and measuring the performance of buildings and communities as defined by industry systems such as LEED. The green building field is growing and changing daily. New technologies and products are being introducedintothe marketplace, and innovative designs andpractices areprovingtheireffectiveness. The LEED rating systems and reference guides will evolve as well. Project teams must comply with the version of the rating system that is current at the time of their registration. USGBC will highlight new developments on its website on a continual basis at www.usgbc.org. Features of LEED The LEED Green Building Rating Systems are voluntary, consensus-based, and market-driven. Based on existing and proven technology, they evaluate environmental performance from a whole- building perspective over a building's life cycle, providing a definitive standard for what constitutes a green building in design, construction, and operation. The LEED rating systems are designed for rating new and existing commercial, institutional, and residential buildings. They are based on accepted energy and environmental principles and strike a balance between known, established practices and emerging concepts. Each rating system is organized into 5 environmental categories: Sustainable Sites, Water Efficiency, Energy and Atmosphere, Materials and Resources, and Indoor Environmental Quality. An additional category, Innovation in Design, addresses sustainable building expertise as well as design measures not covered under the 5 environmental categories. Regional bonus points are another feature of LEED and acknowledge the importance of local conditions in determining best environmental design and construction practices. The LEED Credit Weightings In LEED 2009, the allocation of points between credits is based on the potential environmental impacts and human benefits of each credit with respect to a set of impact categories. The impacts are defined as the environmental or human effect of the design, construction, operation, and maintenance ofthebuilding,such asgreenhousegas emissions,fossilfuel use,toxins and carcinogens, air and water pollutants, indoor environmental conditions. A combination of approaches, including energy modeling, life-cycle assessment, and transportation analysis, is used to quantify each type of impact. The resulting allocation of points among credits is called credit weighting. LEED 2009 uses the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's TRACI' environmental impact categories as the basis for weighting each credit TRACI was developed to assist with impact evaluation for life-cycle assessment, industrial ecology, process design, and pollution prevention. xi' LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281529 LEED 2009 also takes into consideration the weightings developed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST); these compare impact categories with one another and assign a relative weight to each. Together, the 2 approaches provide a solid foundation for determining the point value of each credit in LEED 2009. The LEED 2009 credit weightings process is based on the following parameters, which maintain consistency and usability across rating systems: ■ MI LEED credits are worth a minimum of r point. ■ MI LEED credits are positive, whole numbers; there are no fractions or negative values. ■ All LEED credits receive asingle,static weight in each rating system; there are no individualized scorecards based on project location. ■ MI LEED rating systems have 100 base points; Innovation in Design (or Operations) and Regional Priority credits provide opportunities for up tole) bonus points. Given the above criteria, the LEED 2009 credit weightings process involves 3 steps: 1. A reference building is used to estimate the environmental impacts in 13 categories associated with a typical building pursuing LEED certification. 2. The relative importance ofbuilding impacts in each category are set to reflect values based on the NISTweightings.4 3. Data that quantify building impacts on environmental and human health are used to assign points to individual credits. Each credit is allocated points based on the relative importance of the building-related impacts that it addresses. The result is a weighted average that combines building impacts and the relative value of the impact categories. Credits that most directly address the most important impacts are given the greatest weight, subject to the system design parameters described above. Credit weights also reflect a decision by LEED to recognize the market implications of point allocation. The result is a significant change in allocation of points compared with previous LEED rating systems. Overall, the changes increase the relative emphasis on the reduction of energy consumption and greenhouse gas emissions associated with building systems, transportation, the embodied energy of water, the embodied energy of materials, and where applicable, solid waste. The details of the weightings process vary slightly among individual rating systems. For example, LEED for Existing Buildings: includes credits related to solid waste management but LEED for New Construction does not. This results in a difference in the portion of the environmental footprint addressed by each rating system and the relative allocation of points. The weightings process for each rating system is fully documented in a weightings workbook. The credit weightings process will be reevaluated over time to incorporate changes in values ascribed to different building impacts and building types,based on both market reality and evolving scientific knowledge related to buildings. A complete explanation of the LEED credit weightings system is available on the USGBC website, at www.usgbc.org. III. OVERVIEW AND PROCESS The LEED Green Building Rating System for Commercial Interiors is a set of performance standards for certifying the design and construction of commercial or institutional buildings and high-rise residential buildings of all sizes, both public and private. The intent is to promote healthful, durable, affordable, and environmentally sound practices in tenant space design and construction. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xill EFTA00281530 Prerequisites and credits in the LEED Green Building Rating Systems address 7 topics: ■ Sustainable Sites (SS) ■ Water Efficiency (WE) ■ Energy and Atmosphere (EA) ■ Materials and Resources (MR) ■ Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) ■ Innovation in Design (ID) ■ Regional Priority (RP) LEED prerequisites and credits have identical structures; see Section X of this Introduction. When to Use LEED for Commercial Interiors LEED for Commercial Interiors addresses the specifics of tenant spaces primarily in office, retail, and institutional buildings. Tenants who lease their space or do not occupy the entire building are eligible. LEED for Commercial Interiors was designed to work hand-in-hand with the LEED for Core &Shell certification system. LEED for Core & Shell is used by developers to certify the core and shell of a project; it prepares the building for environmentally conscious tenants. Many projects clearly fit the defined scope of only' LEED rating system; others may be eligible fora or more. The project is a viable candidate for LEED certification if it can meet all prerequisites and achieve the minimum points required in a given rating system. If more than t rating system applies, the project team can decide which to pursue. For assistance in choosing the most appropriate LEED rating system, please e-mail leedinfo@usgbc.org. Minimum Program Requirements A project must adhere to LEED's Minimum Program Requirements (MPRs), or possess minimum characteristics in order to be eligible for certification under LEED 2009. These requirements define the categories of buildings that the LEED rating systems were designed to evaluate, and taken together serve three goals: (1) give clearguidance to customers, (a) protect the integrity ofthe LEED program, and (3) reduce challenges that occur during the LEED certification process. The MPRs will evolve over time in tandem with the LEED rating systems. In order to be eligible for certification under any LEED 2009 Rating System, projects must comply with each associated M PR. The MPRs can be found in the LEED 2009 Rating Systems. In addition,definitions and more extensive guidance on certain issues are provided in a separate document, titled Supplemental Guidance, available on the USGBC website. The Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) reserves the right to revoke LEED certification from any LEED 2009 project upon gaining knowledge of non-compliance with any applicable MPRs. If such a circumstance occurs, no registration or certification fees paid to GBCI will be refunded. NOTE: ExceptionstoalltheMPRswillbeconsideredon acase-by-casebasisforspecialcircumstances. Direction on the nature of allowable exceptions is given in the Supplemental Guidance document. Registration Project teams interested in earning LEED for Commercial Interiors certification for their buildings must first register the project with GBCI. Projects can be registered on the GBCI website (www.gbci. orgy. The website also has information on registration costs for USGBC national members as well zlv LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281531 as nonmembers. Registration is an important step that establishes contact with GBCI and provides access to software tools, errata, critical communications, and other essential information. LEED-Online LEED-Online is the primary resource for managing the LEED documentation process. From LEED- Online, project teams can manage project details, complete documentation requirements for LEED credits and prerequisites, upload supporting files, submit applications for review, receive reviewer feedback, and ultimately earn LEE!) certification. LEED-Online provides a common space where members of a project team can work togetherto document compliance with the LEED rating system. MI project teams pursuing LEED certification are required to use LEED-Online and its submittal documentation paths. LEED submittals are instrumental in demonstrating credit compliance becausetheycontain all the documentation requirements foreach LEED credit. Additionally, LEED- Online contains embedded calculators and tables to ensure that the submittal package delivered to GBCI is complete and accurate. LEED-Online also features several support capabilities. It enables team members to view and submit credit interpretation requests, contact customer service, generate project-specific reports, and consult supplementary LEED resources, such as FAQs, tutorials, offline calculators, and sample documentation. Applicants with multiple projects will have access to reporting tools that use data from projects across their entire LEED portfolio. LEED certificates for successful projects are also issued through using LEED-Online. Credit Interpretation Requests and Rulings In some cases, a LEED project team may encounter challenges when interpreting the requirements of a prerequisite or credit for their project, perhaps because the reference guide does not sufficiently address aspecific issue ora conflict requires resolution. Toaddress such issues,acredit interpretation ruling process has been established for each LEED rating system. See the GECI website for more information, at www.gbci.org. Credit interpretation requests must be submittedonline. Provide a brief but clear description of the challenge encountered, refer to the prerequisite or credit information found in the rating system and reference guide, and emphasize the intent of the prerequisite or credit If possible, the project team should offer potential solutions to the problem or a proposed interpretation. Follow the detailed instructions in LEED-Online. Communications related to credit interpretation requests will be in electronic format. Review and Certification To earn LEED for Commercial Interiors certification, the applicant project must satisfy all the prerequisites and credits worth the minimum number of points to warrant the desired project rating. Projects must comply with the version of the rating system that is current in LEED-Online at the time of project registration. Appeals Appeals may be filed after the design phase review, the construction phase review, or the full application review. Please see the GBCI website for more information on appeals. Fees Information on certification fees can be found on the GBCI website. GBCI will acknowledge receipt of the application and proceed with application review when all project documentation 2O09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xv EFTA00281532 and payments have been received and processed. Registration fees, appeal review fees, and any additional fees required to expedite LEED certification are not refundable. Updates and Addenda This is the first edition of the LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Interior Design and Construction, 2009. As LEED for Commercial Interiors continues to improve and evolve, updates and addenda will be made available. USGBC cannot be held liable for any criteria set forth herein that may not be applicable to later versions of LEED rating systems, and GBCI reserves the right to modify its policies from time to time.. Updates and addenda will be accumulated between revisions and will be formally incorporated in major revisions. In the interim, between major revisions, USGBC may issue updates or addenda to clarify criteria. The prerequisites, credits, amendments and addenda current at the time of project registration will continue to guide the project throughout its certification process Information Privacy and Policy Guidelines For more information on the privacy policy of the U.S. Green Building Counil, Inc. (USGBC), refer to the Policies and Guidelines section of the USGBC website, at www.usgbc.org. With the support of its members, volunteers, and other stakeholders, USGBC is the developer of the LEED rating systems. Green Building Certification Institute, Inc. (GBCI) implements the LEED rating systems and carries out credentialing programs relating to LEED. For more information on the privacy policy of GBCI including the privacy policy on documentation submitted through LEED-Online, refer to the Policies and Guidelines section of the GBCI website, at www.gbci.org. Projects whose information should be treated as confidential may select this option during registration; project confidentiality status may be changed at any time through LEED-Online. Please review the GBCI privacy policy for further details. IV. LEED-ONLINE DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS All LEED for Commercial Interiors certification applications must include the required LEED- Online documentation: general documentation requirements, documentation requirements for all prerequisites, and documentation requirements for all pursued credits. General Requirements LEED certification application requires the submission of an overall project narrative with the completed LEED-Online documentation requirements. The project narrative describes the applicant's organization, building, site, and team. This narrative helps the LEED review team understand the major elements of the project and building performance, and it also aids in highlighting projects in future communications efforts. General documentation also requires the basic details pertaining to project site conditions, construction scope and timeline, occupant and usage data, and project team identification. Project teams must address all the elements in the general documentation requirements, providing details and clarifications where appropriate, and they may include any optional elements that are helpful in describing the project. Credit Substitution The LEED 2009 rating systems do not allow credit substitution using another version. Currently registered LEED projects that want to use LEED 2009 credits need to switch to the new version in entirety. USGBC expects that most projects will find this switch feasible and advantageous. zvl LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281533 V. CERTIFICATION APPLICATION earn LEED certification, the applicant project must satisfy all the prerequisites and qualify for a minimum number of points to attain the established project ratings as listed below. Having satisfied the basic prerequisites ofthe program, applicant projects are then rated according to their degree of compliance within the rating system. After registration, the project design team should begin to collect information and perform calculations to satisfy the prerequisite and credit documentation requirements. Because documentation should be gathered throughout design and construction, it is helpful to designate a LEED team leader who will be responsible for managing its compilation. LEED for Commercial Interiors provides the option of splitting a certification application into two phases, design and construction, in lieu of a combined design and construction review. Documentation for design phase credits, identified in LEED-Online, can be submitted for review at the end of the design phase; the submittals for these credits can be fully evaluated based on documentation available during this phase of the project. For example, if a project site meets the requirements of LEED for Commercial Interiors SS Credit 3.1, Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access, the likelihood of credit achievement can be assessed prior to the completion of construction. The LEED credit itself, however, is not awarded at the design review stage. Design Phase Review Each project is allotted a design phase review that consists of a preliminary design phase review and a final design phase review. GBCI formally rules on the design phase application by designating each attempted credit as either anticipated or denied. Participating in a design phase review does not guarantee award of any credit and will not result in LEED certification. This process enables project teams to assess the likelihood of credit achievement and requires follow-through to ensure the design is executed in the construction phase according to design specifications. Construction Phase Review At the completion of construction, the project team submits all attempted credits for review, including any newly attempted design credits. If the project team has had a design phase review and any of the design phase anticipated credits have since changed, additional documentation must be submitted to substantiate continued compliance with credit requirements. Upon receipt of the full certification application and fee, a final review will be conducted. All applicant-verified design phase credits that were designated as anticipated and have not changed since the design phase review will be declared as awarded. All other credits will be designated as either awarded or denied. Project teams should refer to LEED-Online and the rating system scorecards to get information on credits that can be submitted for design phase review and credits that must be submitted for construction phase review. LEED for Commercial Interiors certifications are awarded according to the following scale: Certified 40-49 points Silver 50-59 points Gold 60-79 points Platinum 80 points and above GBCI recognizes buildings that achieve t of the rating levels with a formal letter of certification. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xvii EFTA00281534 VI. CERTIFICATION STRATEGY Timeline and Project Design Phases Project teams should study the principles and objectives of LEED as early in the site selection and design process as possible. The project design phases mentioned throughout this reference guide correspond to the architectural design and planning steps commonly used in the construction industry: r. Predesign entails gathering information, recognizing stakeholders' needs, and establishing project goals. 2. Schematic design explores several design options and alternatives, with the intent of establishing an agreed-upon project layout and scope ofwork. 3. Design development begins the process of spatial refinement and usually involves the first design of a project's energy systems. 4. Construction documents carry the design into the level of details for all spaces and systems and materials so that construction can take place. 5. Construction. 6. Substantial completion is a contractual benchmark that usually corresponds to the point at which a client could occupy a nearly completed space. 7. Final completion. 8. Certificate of occupancy is the official recognition by a local building department that a building conforms to applicable building and safety codes. Related Credits When pursuing LEED certification, it is important to consider how credits are interconnected and how their synergies and trade-offs will ultimately affect both the project and the other credits the team may consider pursuing. Consult the Related Credits section of each prerequisite and credit to help inform design and construction decisions leading to certification. Consistent Documentation across Credits Several kinds of project information are required for consistent LEED documentation across various credits. If the number of full-time employees (PTEs) is used in one credit, it should be used consistently throughout all credits. LEED-Online contains many features specifically designed to assist project teams with this process. Pay special attention to overlapping project data; doing so will help the application and review process go smoothly. Operations and Maintenance in LEED for Commercial Interiors The LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Interior Design and Construction contains information on operations and maintenance to help project teams streamline green= practices once the LEED design and construction project has been completed. Although not required as part of the LEED certification process, upfront planning for green operations and maintenance can help building owners, operators, and maintenance staff ensure that the commercial interiors space continues to operate in a sustainable manner. xvIll LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281535 VII. EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE STRATEGIES Exemplary performance strategies result in performance that greatly exceeds the performance level or expands the scope required by an existing LEED for Commercial Interiors credit. To earn exemplary performance credits, teams must meet the performance level defined by the next step in the threshold progression. For credits with more than 1 compliance path, an Innovation in Design point can be earned by satisfying more than 1 compliance path if their benefits are additive. See the Innovation in Design credit section for further details. The credits for which exemplary performance points are available through expanded performance are noted throughout this reference guide and in LEED-Online by the logo shown below. The list for exemplary performance points available is as follows: Sustainable Sites SS Credit 1 SS Credit 3 Site Selection Alternative Transportation Water Efficiency WE Credit 1 Water Use Reduction Energy and Atmosphere EA Credit 1 Optimize Energy Performance EA Credit 4 Green Power Materials and Resources MR Credit 1.2 MR Credit 2 MR Credit 3 MR Credit 4 MR Credit 5 MR Credit 6 MR Credit 7 Building Reuse—Maintain Interior Nonstructural Components Construction Waste Management Materials Reuse Recycled Content Regional Materials Rapidly Renewable Materials Certified Wood Indoor Environmental Quality IEQ Credit 8.2 Daylight and Views—Views for Seated Spaces VIII. REGIONAL PRIORITY To provide incentive to address geographically specific environmental issues, USGBC regional councils and chapters have identified 6 credits per rating system that are of particular importance to specific areas. Each Regional Priority credit is worth an additional t point, and a total of 4 additional points may be earned by achieving Regional Priority credits, with t point earned per credit. Upon project registration, LEED-Online automatically determines a project's Regional Priority credits based on its zip code. If the project achieves more than 4 Regional Priority credits, the team can choose the credits for which these points will apply. The USGBC website also contains a searchable database of Regional Priority credits. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xix EFTA00281536 IX. TOOLS FOR REGISTERED PROJECTS LEED offers additional resources for LEED project teams on the USGBC website, at www.usgks. orgfprojecttools. The Registered Projects Tools website provides resources for starting the project, including rating system errata, documentation requirements, and referenced industry standards. Also consult the website for the following: Declarant definitions and other definitions. This resource describes the team members who are required to sign off on certain documentation requirements and indicates the prerequisites and credits for which each team member is responsible. The required declarant is noted in the corresponding credit documentation section of LEED-Online. Licensed Professional Exemption Form. The Licensed Professional Exemption Form can be used by a project team's registered professional engineer, registered architect, or registered landscape architect as a streamlined path to certain credits, bypassing otherwise-required submittals. This form is used in conjunction with the declarations in LEED-Online to document any exemptions. The form is required for any eligible submittal requirements the project team wishes to waive; the exemption is invalid without a properly executed Licensed Professional Exemption Form. Licensed Professional Exemptions are noted in the corresponding credit documentation section of LEED- Online. X. HOW TO USE THIS REFERENCE GUIDE The LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Interior Design and Construction is a supporting document to the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System. The guide helps project teams understand the criteria,the reasons behind them,strategiesfor implementation,and documentation requirements. It includes examples of strategies that can be used in each category, case studies of buildings that have implemented these strategies successfully, and additional resources. It does not provide an exhaustive list of strategies for meeting the criteria or all the information that a project team needs to determine the applicability of a credit to the project. Rating System Pages The rating system, published in its entirety on the USGBC website, is imbedded in this reference guide. Each prerequisite and credit discussion begins with a gray page that mirrors the rating systems' Intent and Requirements. This Reference guide addresses the Intents and Requirements for the LEED zoo9 Commercial Interiors Rating System. The Potential Technologies and Strategies included in the rating systems are not explicitly called out in the reference guide, refer to the published rating systems as desired. Prerequisite and Credit Format Each prerequisite or credit is organized in a standardized format for simplicity and quick reference. The first section summarizes the main points regarding the green measure and includes the intent, requirements, required submittals for certification, and a summary of any referenced industry standard. Subsequent sections provide supporting information to help interpret the measure and offer links to resources and examples. The sections for each credit are described in the following Paragraphs. Intent identifies the main sustainability goal or benefit of the prerequisite or credit. Requirements specifies the criteria that satisfy the prerequisite or credit and the number of points available. The prerequisites must be achieved; the credits are optional, but each contributes to the overall project score. Some credits have 2 or more paths with cumulative points. Other credits have xx LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281537 several options from which the project team must choose. For example, Energy & Atmosphere Credit 1, Optimize Energy Efficiency Performance, has 3 options, but a project can apply for only t, depending on the type of building. Benefits and Issues to Consider addresses the environmental benefits of the activity encouraged by the prerequisite or credit, and economic considerations related to first costs, life-cycle costs, and estimated savings. Related Credits acknowledges the trade-offs and synergies within the LEED rating system credit categories. Achieving a particular credit may make it worthwhile and comparatively easy to pursue related credits; the converse is also possible. The Summary of Referenced Standards, where applicable, introduces the required standards used to measure achievement of the credit intent. Teams are strongly encouraged to review the full standard and not rely on the summary. Implementation discusses specific methods or assemblies that facilitate achievement of the requirements. Timeline and Team guides the project team by identifying who should lead an effort and when the tasks should begin. Calculations offers sample formulas or computations that determine achievement of a particular prerequisite or credit. Most calculations are facilitated in LEED-Online. The Documentation Guidance section provides the first steps in preparing to complete the LEED- Online documentation requirements. Examples illustrates strategies for credit achievement. Exemplary Performance, if applicable, details the level of performance needed for the award of points in addition to those for credit achievement. Regional Variations outlines concerns specific to the geographic location of the building. Resources offers suggestions for further research and provide examples or illustrations, detailed technical information, or other information relevant to the prerequisite or credit. The resources include websites, online materials, and printed books and articles that can be obtained directly from the organizations listed. Definitions clarifies the meaning of certain terms relevant to the prerequisite or credit. These may be general terms or terms specific to LEED for Commercial Interiors. A complete glossary is found at the end of this reference guide. Endnotes Energy Information Administration. "Emissions of Greenhouse Gas Report." Report #DOE/ EIA-0573(2006). Released 28 November 2007. http:fivivm.eia.doe.goWoiafft6osiggrvicarbon. html#commercial Office of the Federal Environmental Executive. http://ofee.gov/wpr/wastestream.asp Last modified 24 April 20°8. Tools for the Reduction and Assessment of Chemical and Other Environmental Impacts (TRACI). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Research and Development. http:// www.epa.govinrmrlistdisabitracif. Relative impact category weights based on an exercise undertaken by NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) for the BEES program. http://www.bfrl.nistgovioae/sofrwarefbeest 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xxi EFTA00281538 xxli LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281539 SESUDHIBLE SaTES Overview The selection of a building site and its development in accordance with sustainable building practices are of fundamental importance. Environmental damage to a site, either during or as a result of construction, can take years to remedy. This credit section addresses environmental concerns relating to building landscape, hardscape, and exterior building issues and promotes the following measures: Selecting a Building That Has Developed Its Site Wisely Buildings affect ecosystems in a variety of ways. Development of greenfields, or previously undeveloped sites, consumes land. Development projects can also encroach on agricultural lands and wetlands or water bodies and compromise wildlife habitats. Choosing a building on a previously developed site or even a damaged site that can be remediated reduces pressure on undeveloped land. Selecting a Building with Sustainable Landscapes Conventional planting and landscape maintenance often require irrigation and chemicals. Sustainable practices minimize the use of irrigation, fertilizers, and pesticides and can prevent soil erosion and sedimentation. Erosion from precipitation and wind causes degradation of property as well as sedimentation of local water bodies, and building sites can be major sources of sediment. Loss of nutrients, soil compaction, and decreased biodiversity of soil organisms can severely limit the vitality of landscaping. Sedimentation increases turbidity levels, which degrades aquatic habitats, and the buildup of sediments in stream channels can lessen flow capacity, increasing the possibility of flooding. Sustainable landscaping involves using or restoring native and adapted plants, which require less irrigation and maintenance and fewer or no applications of chemical fertilizers and pesticides compared with most introduced species. Selecting a Building That Protects Surrounding Habitats Commercial buildingsites can encroach onagricultural lands andforadversely affectwildlifehabitat. As animals are displaced by development, they become crowded into increasingly smaller spaces, and eventually the population exceeds the carrying capacity of the area Overall biodiversity, as well as individual plant and animal species, may be threatened. Restoring native and adapted vegetation and other ecological features to the site provides wildlife habitat. Selecting a Building That Manages Stormwater Runoff As areas developed and urbanized, surface permeability is reduced, which in turn increases the runoff transported via pipes and sewers to streams, rivers, lakes, bays, and oceans. Stormwater runoff harms water quality, aquatic life, and recreation opportunities in receiving waters. For instance, parking areas contribute to stormwater runoff that is contaminated with oil, fuel, lubricants, combustion by-products, material from tire wear, and deicing salts. Runoff also accelerates the flow rate of waterways, causing erosion downstream and altering aquatic habitat. Effective strategies exist to control, reduce, and treat stormwater runoff before it leaves the project site. Selecting a Building That Reduces Heat Island Effects The use of dark, nonreflective surfaces for parking areas, roofs, walkways, and other surfaces SS OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 1 EFTA00281540 SS OVERVIEW contributes to the heat island effect. These surfaces absorb incoming solar radiation and radiate that heat back to the surrounding areas, increasing the ambient temperature. In addition to being detrimental to site habitat, this increase raises a building's external and internal temperatures, requiring more energy for cooling. The Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory estimates that 1/6 of the electricity consumed in the United States is used to cool buildings. By installing reflective surfaces and vegetation, the nation's homes and businesses could save $4 billion a year in reduced cooling energy demand by 2015! Selecting a Building That Reduces Light Pollution Poorly designed exterior lighting may exacerbate nighttime light pollution,which can interfere with nocturnal ecology, reduce observation of night skies, cause roadway glare, and hurt relationships with neighbors by causing light trespass. Reducing light pollution encourages nocturnal wildlife to inhabit the building site and causes less disruption to birds' migratory patterns. Thoughtful exterior lighting may also reduce infrastructure costs and energy use over the life of the building. Selecting a Building with Water-Efficient Landscaping Landscape irrigation in the United States consumes large quantities of potable water. Outdoor uses, primarily landscaping, account for 30% of the 26 billion gallons of water consumed daily.2 Improved landscaping practices can dramatically reduce and even eliminate irrigation needs. Maintaining or reestablishing native plants on building sites fosters a self-sustaining landscape that requires minimal supplemental water and has other environmental benefits. Landscaping with native plants can reduce the amount of water needed for irrigation and attract native wildlife, creating a building site integrated with its natural surroundings. In addition, native plants tend to require less fertilizer and pesticides, which minimizes the degradation ofwater quality and other negative environmental impacts. Selecting a Building That Uses On-site Renewable Energy Energy generation from renewable sources, such as solar, wind, and biomass, avoids air and water pollution and other environmental impacts associated with producing and using coal, nuclear energy, oil, and natural gas. Although hydropower is considered renewable, it can have harmful environmental effects, such as degrading water quality, altering fish and bird habitat, and endangering species. Low-impact hydropower, if available, is recommended. Renewable energy minimizes add rain, smog, climate change, and human health problems from air contaminants. In addition, using renewable resources avoids the consumption of fossil fuels, the production of nuclear waste, and the operation of environmentally damaging hydropower dams. Selecting a Building That Reduces Potable Water Consumption Reducing indoor potable water consumption may require using alternative water sources for nonpotable applications and installing water-efficient fuctures, flow restrictors, electronic controls, composting toilet systems, and waterless urinals. Lowering potable water use in fixtures can reduce the total amount of water drawn from natural bodies of water. A commercial building in Boston replaced 12.6 3.5-gallons-per-flush (gpf) toilets with low-flow t.6-gpf toilets and reduced total water consumption by 15%. With an initial cost of $32,000 and estimated annual savings of $22,800, the payback period was 14 years. Another Boston building installed 30 faucet aerators and reduced annual indoor water consumption by 190,000gallons. The cost of the equipment and labor totaled $300 and is estimated to save $4250 per year, with a payback period oft months) 2 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281541 Selecting a Building That Helps Reduce Emissions Associated with Transportation Environmental concerns related to buildings include vehicle emissions and the need for vehicle infrastructure as building occupants travel to and from the site. Emissions contribute to climate change, smog, acid rain, and other air quality problems. Parking lots, roadways, and building surfaces increase stonnwater runoff and contribute to the urban heat island effect. In 2006, 76% of commuters in America ages 16 and older drove to work alone. Of the remaining 24% who used alternative means of transportation (including working from home), only 5% used public transportation and n%carpooled.4Locating the project near residential areas and providing bicycle racks, changing facilities, preferred parking, access to mass transit, and alternative-fuel refueling stations can all encourage the adoption of alternative forms of transportation. Use of mass transit reduces the energy demand for transportation as well as the space needed for parking lots, which encroach on green space and contribute to the heat island effect. Summary The LEED for Commercial Interiors SS credits promote responsible, innovative, and practical site designs that are sensitive to plants, wildlife, water, and air quality and that mitigate some of the negative effects buildings have on the local and regional environment. Project teams selecting sites and undertaking building projects should be cognizant of the impact of development on land consumption, ecosystems, natural resources, and energy use. Preference should be given to buildings with high-performance attributes in locations that enhance existing neighborhoods and make use of existing transportation networks and urban infrastructures. LEED encourages the selection of sites and land-use plans that preserve natural ecosystems and enhance the health of the surrounding community. CREDIT TITLE SS Credit 1 SS Credit 2 SS Credit 3.1 SS Credit 3.2 SS Credit 3.3 Site Selection Development Density and Community Connectivity Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access Alternative Transportation—Bicycle Storage and Changing Rooms Alternative Transportation—Parking Availability SS OVERVIEW 2OO9 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 3 EFTA00281542 4 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281543 SITE SELECTION Credit SS Credit 1 Points 1-5 points Intent To encourage tenants to select buildings that employ best practices systems and green strategies. Requirements OPTION 1 Select a LEED certified building (5 points). OR OPTION 2 Locatethe tenant space inabuildingthat has inplace tor more ofthefollowingcharacteristics at time of submittal (t -s points). Each of the followingoptions may also be met by satisfying the requirements of the corresponding LEED 2009 for New Construction credit. PATH 1. Brownfield Redevelopment (1 point) A building developed on a site documented as contaminated (by an ASTM £1903-97 Phase II Environmental Site Assessment or a local voluntary cleanup program) OR A building on a site classified as a brownfield by a local, state or federal government agency. Effective remediation of site contamination must have been completed. PATH 2. Stormwater Design-Quantity Control (1 point) A building that prior to its development had less than or equal to so% imperviousness and has implemented a stormwater management plan that is equal to or is less than the predevelopment 1 D year 24-hour rate and quantity discharge. OR A building that prior to its development had more than so% imperviousness and has implemented a stormwater management plan that reduced predevelopment 1/2. year 24-hour rate and quantity discharge by zs%of the annual on-site stormwater load. This mitigation can be achieved through a variety of measures such as perviousness of site, stormwater retention ponds, and harvesting of rainwater for reuse. Stormwater values are based on actual local rainfall unless the actual exceeds the to-year annual average local rainfall, in which case the to-year annual average should be used. PATH 3. Stormwater Design—Quality Control (1 point) A building that has in place site stormwater treatment systems designed to remove at least 80% of the average annual site area's total suspended solids (rss) and 40% of the average annual site area's total phosphorus (TP). SS CREDIT 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 5 EFTA00281544 SS CREDIT 1 Thesevalues are based on the average annualloadings from all stormsless thanorequal to the 2-year 24-hour storm. The building must implement and maintain best management practices (BMPs) outlined in Chapter 4, Part z Urban Runoff, of the EPA Guidance Specifying Management Measures for Sources of Nonpoint Pollution in Coastal Waters, January 1993 (EPA 840B92002) or the local government's BMP document, whichever is more stringent. PATH 4. Heat Island Effect—NonRoof (1 point) A building that provides shade (or will provide shade within 5 years of landscape installation); and/or uses light-colored or high-albedo materials with a solar reflectance index (SRI)' of at least 29; and/ or has open-grid pavement areas that individually or in total equals at least 30% of the site's nonroof impervious surfaces, such as parking areas, walkways, plazas, and fire lanes. OR Abuildingthat has placed a minimum of 50% of parking spaces underground or covered by structured parking. OR A building that has an open-grid pavement system (less than so% impervious) for so% of the parking lot area. PATH 5. Heat Island Effect—Roof (1 point) A building whose roofing has a solar reflectance index (SRI) of the following minimum values for at least 75% of the roof surface; Roof lype Slope SRI Lim-sloped roof s 2:12 78 Steep-sloped roof > 2:12 29 OR A building that has installed a vegetated roof for at least so% of the roof area. OR Abuildingthat has both high SRI roofs and vegetated roofs that satisfy the following area requirement: [ Total Roof ( s Area of SRI Roof X 1.33 ) + ( Area of Vegetated Roof X 2 ) Area t The solar reflectance index ;SRI) is a measure of the constructed surface's ability to reflect solar heat, as shown by a small temperature rise. It is defined so that a standard black surface (reflectance 0.05.emittance 0.90) is Ganda standard white surface (reflectance O.8O,emittanceo.no) is too. To calculate the SRI for a given material, obtain the reflectance value and emittance value for the material.SRI u calculated according to ASIA' E 19SO. Reflectance is measured according to ASTAt E 903. ASTAI E 1918 or ASTNIC tag. Emittance is measured according to ASTAt E 40S or &SIM C apt. 6 LLLU RLf L/2LNCL COWL fOR URLLN IN IL/2Ithi ULSIGN AND GONSIRUL I ILIN ZUU9 LUI I ION EFTA00281545 PATH 6. Light Pollution Reduction (1 point) A building whose nonemergency interior luminaires with a direct line of sight to any openings in the envelope (translucent or transparent) must have their input power reduced (by automatic device) by at least so% between it M. and 5 M. After-hours override maybe provided by a manual or occupant-sensing device provided the override lasts no more than r minutes. OR A building whose openings in the envelope (translucent or transparent) with a direct line of sight to any nonemergency luminaires must have shielding (with transmittance of less than 1O%) that is controlled or closed by automatic device between tt M. and s • PATH 7. Water Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by 50% (2 points) A building that employs high-efficiency irrigation technology OR uses harvested rainwater or recycled site water to reduce potable water consumption for irrigation by at least 5o% over conventional means. PATH 8. Water Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation (2 points in addition to Path 7) A building that uses only harvested rainwater or recycled site water to eliminate all potable water use for site irrigation (except for initial watering to establish plants), OR does not have permanent landscaping irrigation systems. PATH 9. Innovative Wastewater Technologies (2 points) Abuildingthat reduces the use of municipallyprovided potablewater forbuilding sewage conveyance by at least50%, OR treats t00% of wastewater on-site to tertiary standards. PATH 10. Water Use Reduction-30% Reduction (1 point) Abuildingthat meets the r% reduction in water use requirement for the entire building and has an ongoing plan to require future occupants to comply. PATH 11. On-site Renewable Energy (1-2 points) A building that supplies at least 2.59is (1 point) or 5% (a points) of the building's total energy use (expressed as a fraction of annual energycost) from on-site renewable energy systems. PATH 12. Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance (1 point) A building that has in place at the time of selection other quantifiable environmental benefits. SS CREDIT 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 7 EFTA00281546 CI Credit 1 OPTION 1 OPTION 1: SELECT LEED-CERTIFIED BUILDING 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The built environment has a tremendous impact on our natural resources and the health of our communities. In 2006, the U.S. Department of Energy reported that U.S. buildings accounted for 724% of electricity consumption} According to the Energy Information Administration, in 2008, buildings in the United States were responsible for 38% of all CO2 emissions.' In 2000, the U.S. Geological Survey reported that the nation's buildings used 13.6% of all potable water, or is trillion gallons per year? Certification of a building under LEED for New Construction, LEED for Schools, LEED for Core & Shell,or LEED for Existing Buildings Operations& Maintenance signifies that building ovmers have already taken significant steps to protect ecosystems and biodiversity, conserve valuable resources, and provide healthful indoor environments for building occupants. Economic Issues The commercial real estate industry has begun to document the increased market appeal of space in LEED-certified buildings, based on recognition that LEED-certified base buildings deliver many economic benefits to tenants, such as reduced operating costs and improved productivity of building occupants. Cost analyses can project and weigh the impact of these reductions on the possibly higher lease values of such buildings. 2. Related Credits Selecting a LEED-certified base building will link the LEED for Commercial Interiors project to the credits the base building earned under its original certification. Such projects are likely to be well situated to earn credits under the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Select tenant space in an existing LEED-certified building. If possible, obtain the base building LEED certification review documents early in the project development phase. The certification documents from the base building can serve as a resource for identifying credits and base building systems and will make it much easier to earn certain LEED for Commercial Interiors credits. Establishing project goals that maximize use of base building systems early on is crucial. Clearly communicate to real estate and leasing agents that space in a LEED-certified building is a priority. Consult the USGBC website for a list of completed LEED-certified projects. Local USGBC chapters can also serve as valuable resources for identifying leasable space in LEED-certified buildings and for finding buildings currently seeking LEED certification. 5. Timeline and Team During the building selection process, work with real estate brokers and leasing agents to identify LEED-certified buildings with tenant space. The building owner or manager should supply a copy of the final LEED scorecard. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 8 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281547 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Assemble information about the base building's LEED certification from the building owner or manager. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This option is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations There are no operations and maintenance considerations for this credit. 12. Resources Please see the USGBC website, at http://www.usgbc.org, for a database of LEED-registered and certified buildings and a list of regional USGBC chapters. 13. Definitions There are no definitions for this credit. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EFTA00281548 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 1 OPTION 2, PATH 1: BROWNFIELD REDEVELOPMENT 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The EPA estimates that there are more than 450,000 brownfields in the United States!' Buildings located on brownfield sites have undergone remediation efforts to remove or stabilize hazardous materials from the sites' soil and groundwater, reducing the exposure of humans and wildlife to health risks associated with environmental pollution. Brownfield redevelopment can contribute to social and economic revitalization of depressed or disadvantaged neighborhoods, and can renew and augment a sense of community pride in local residents. Economic Issues Investors who develop brownfield sites often take advantage of government grants, tax incentives, existing infrastructure, and ready availability of labor. These cost savings maybe reflected in lower lease rates for these properties. Additionally, because many brownfield sites are in or near urban areas, they are well served by existing transportation networks and other infrastructure. 2. Related Credits There are no related credits. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards U.S. EPA Definition of Brownfields The EPA Sustainable Redevelopment of Brownfields Program http://www.e gov/brovmfields With certain legal exclusions and additions, brownfield site means real property, the expansion, redevelopment, or reuse of which may be complicated by the presence or potential presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant (Public Law 107-118, H.R. 2869, Small Business Liability Relief and Brownfields Revitalization Act). See the EPA website for additional information and resources. ASTM E19o3-97, Phase II Environmental Site Assessment, effective zoos ASTM International http://wwt.v.astm.org A Phase II environmental site assessment is an investigation that collects original samples of soil, groundwater, or building materials to analyze for quantitative values of various contaminants. This investigation is normally undertaken when a Phase I assessment has determined a potential for site contamination. The substances most frequently tested are petroleum hydrocarbons, heavy metals, pesticides, solvents, asbestos, and mold. 4. Implementation Select a base building that was constructed on a site formerly classified as a brownfield. Former brownfield sites and remediation activities may be catalogued by the federal, state, or local authorities. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make the selection of a base building constructed on a remediated brownfield a requirement of its selection process. Work with real estate brokers and leasing agents to identify buildings that meet the requirements. 10 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281549 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Assemble information about the previous site contamination and remediation efforts undertaken. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit r Path 12 Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations Preliminary screening levels or remediation criteria may differ by state or region. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Some remediation efforts may require ongoing activities. The project team and owner should keep careful records of remediation activities and develop a plan for ongoingcompliance with monitoring and reporting requirements as defined by the relevant federal, state or local regulatory agency. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites U.S. EPA, Preliminary Remediation Goals for EPA Region 9 epa Preliminary remediation goals are tools for evaluating and cleaning up contaminated sites. They are intended to help risk assessors and others perform initial screening-level evaluations of environmental measurement results. The remediation goals for Region 9 are generic; they are calculated without site-specific information. However, they may be recalculated using site- specific data. U.S. EPA, Sustainable Redevelopment of Brownfields http://www.e govibrovmfields This is a comprehensive website on brownfields that includes projects, initiatives, tools, tax incentives and other resources to address brownfield remediation and redevelopment. For information by phone, contact the regional EPA office. 13. Definitions A brownfield is real propertywhose use maybe complicated bythe presence or possible presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant. Remediation is the process of cleaning up a contaminated site by physical, chemical, or biological means. Remediation processes are typically applied to contaminated soil and groundwater. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 11 EFTA00281550 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 1 A site assessment is an evaluation of a site's aboveground and subsurface characteristics, including its structures, geology, and hydrology. Site assessments are typically used to determine whether contamination has occurred, as well as the extent and concentration of any release of pollutants. Information generated during a site assessment is used to make remedial action decisions. 12 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281551 OPTION 2, PATH 2: STORMWATER DESIGN-QUANTITY CONTROL 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Stormwater is a major source of pollution for all types of water bodies in the United States.' Soil compaction caused by site development and the expanse of impervious surfaces, such as roads and parking lots, produce stormwater runoffthat contains sediment and other contaminants, including atmospheric deposition, pesticides, fertilizers, vehicle fluid leaks, and mechanical equipment waste. Increased stormwater runoff can overload pipes and sewers and damage water quality, affecting navigation and recreation. Furthermore, municipal systems that convey and treat runoff require significant infrastructure improvements and maintenance. The health of streams is closely linked to stormwater runoffvelocities and volumes. Increases in the frequencyand magnitude ofstormwater runoffdue to development can increasebankfull events and erosion, widen channels, and cause downcutting in streams. Effective on-site management practices let stormwater infiltrate the ground, thereby reducing the volume and intensity of stormwater flows.1° Additionally, reducing stormwater runoff helps maintain the natural aquifer recharge cycle and restore depleted stream base flows. By selecting a building that has met the requirements of SS Credit 1, Option 2, Path 2, the project team is recognizing the importance of reducing stormwater runoff and the accnriated environmental benefits. 2. Related Credits A building's efforts to reduce the rate and quantity of stormwater runoff may involve the use of pervious pavements, native or adapted vegetation, and increased on-site infiltration strategies, assisting projects with earning the following credits: ■ SS Credit 4 Option a, Path 3: Stormwater Management—Quality Control ■ SS Credit 4 Option a, Path 4: Heat Island Reduction—Nonroof Efforts to capture and reuse rainwater forirrigation or in nonpotable applications inside the building, such as toilets and urinals, can help projects earn the following credits: ■ SS Credit 4 Option a, Path 7: Water-Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by 50% ■ SS Credit r, Option 2, Path 8: Water-Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation ■ SS Credit 1, Option z Path 10: Water Use Reduction-30% Reduction 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit 4. Implementation Identify a space in a building that has implemented r of the 2 compliance paths or that can meet equivalent performance requirements. Include this requirement in the criteria for selecting a base building. Local permitting agencies may have detailed information on the stormwater control techniques implemented or in use at the base building. Check the application for the building's stormwater management permit for this information. 5. Timeline and Team Because tenants may not be able to influence the base building and site infrastructure design, LEED for Commercial Interiors projects may require a different approach than LEE!) for New Construction or Core & Shell projects. Work with building owners or facility managers to first CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 13 EFTA00281552 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 2 assess the base building for compliance with the LEED requirements. Since many local jurisdictions have comparable requirements, part of this process may include consulting with local permitting officials to determine whether the local stormwater requirements at the time of the base building construction were adequately stringent to meet this credit. If the existing system does not meet the credit requirements, investigate opportunities to modify the site design. This may include modification of existing stormwater management systems and replacing site hardscapes with vegetated areas that decrease site runoff. 6. Calculations The following calculation illustrates one method that can be used to support the credit submittals. Stormwater runoff volumes are affected by surface characteristics on the site as well as rainfall intensity over a specified time period. Stormwater volumes generated are directly related to the net imperviousness of the project site. By reducing the amount of impervious surface on the site, stormwater volumes are reduced. Estimate the imperviousness of the project site as follows: 1. Identify the different surface types on the site: roof, pavement (e.g., roads and sidewalks), landscaping, and other areas. a. Determine the total area for each of these surface types using site drawings. Use Tablet to assign a runoff coefficient to each surface type. If a surface type is not included in the table, use a 'best estimate" or manufacturer information. For instance, if pervious paving is used, consult the manufacturer to determine the imperviousness (the percentage of the surface that does not allow infiltration). 3. Summarize the area and runoff coefficient for each surfacetype on a spreadsheet. Multiply the nmoff coefficient by the area to obtain an impervious area for each surface type. This figure represents the square footage of each surface area that is t00% impervious (Equation t). 4. Add the impervious areas for each surface type to obtain a total impervious area for the site. 5. Divide the total impervious area by the total site area to obtain the imperviousness of the site (Equation 2). For sites with so% imperviousness or less, imperviousness discharge must not increase from predevelopment to postdevelopment conditions. For previously developed sites with imperviousness greater than so%, imperviousness discharge must be reduced by 259‘ from predevelopment to postdevelopment conditions. Table 1. Typical Runoff Coeffiicient Surface Type Runoff Coefficient I Surface Type Runoff Coefficient Pavement. Asphalt 0.95 Turf, Flat (0- 1% slope) 0.25 Pavement, Concrete 0.95 Turf, Average (1 - 3% slope) 0.35 Pavement, Brick 0.85 Turf, Hilly (3 - 10% slope) 0.40 Pavement, Gravel 0.75 Turf, Steep (> 10% slope) 0.45 Roofs, Conventional 0.95 Vegetation, Flat (0 - 1% slope) 0.10 Roof, Garden Roof (<4 in) 0.50 Vegetation, Average (1 - 3% slope) 0.20 Roof, Garden Roof (4 - 8 in) 0.30 Vegetation, Hilly (3 - 10% slope) 0.25 Roof, Garden Roof (9 - 20 in) 0.20 Vegetation. Steep f> 10% slope) 0.30 Vegetation. Steep f> 10% slope) 0.10 Equation 1 Impervious Area (sf) = Surface Area fsf) X Runoff Coefficient 14 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281553 Equation 2 SS Imperviousness (%) — Total Pervious Area (s0 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: Total Site Area (s0 PATH 2 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Determine the rates and quantities for pre- and postdevelopment conditions for the required storm events. • Prepare a stormwater plan assessment from design documentation, or have one completed by a civil engineer or other professional. • List stormwater management strategies and record the percentage of rainfall that each is designed to handle. 8. Example Site Imperviousness The project is an office renovation with site improvements to an existing concrete parking lot of average slope. Surface types include sidewalks, parking areas, landscaping, and the roof. The roof area is assumed to be equal to the building footprint, as determined from site drawings. Table 2 shows calculations for the design case. To reduce imperviousness, some concrete sidewalks and asphalt parking areas can be replaced with pervious paving and vegetation. The building footprint is reduced and vegetated roofs are installed to reduce runoff. Next, calculations are done for the baseline case (the existing site conditions; Table 3). The calculations demonstrate that the design case has an imperviousness of 47% and the baseline case has an imperviousness of 95%, or a 50% reduction. The project has exceeded the 25% minimum, thus earning1 point. Table 2. Design Case Imperviousness Surface Type Runoff Coefficient Area (sf) Impervious Area _m_ (d) Pavement. Asphalt 0.95 5.075 4,821 Pavement, Pervious 0.60 1,345 807 Roof, Garden Roof (4 - 8 in) 0.30 8,240 2,472 Vegetation, Average (1 - 3% slope) 0.20 4.506 901 Total Area 14,660 Total Impervious Area 8,100 Imperviousness 55% Table 3. Baseline Case Imperviousness Surface Type Runoff Coefficient Area (so Impervious Area (sf) Pavement. concrete 0.95 19.166 18.208 Total area 14.660 Total impervious area 18.208 Imperviousness 95% 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 15 EFTA00281554 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 2 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations The approach to this credit varies dramatically across different regions and climate zones because the t-year and z-year 24-hour design storms are particular to a given location. Local stormwater management requirements also differ. The strategies employed in an urban environment where water is discharged to a municipal master system will be much different from the approach for a rural project that discharges to streams or lakes with high water quality standards. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Though unlikely to be within the control of the tenant, operations best practices include developing an ongoing inspection and maintenance plan to ensure the proper upkeep of all aspects of the stormwater management system, including desired levels of vegetation and mulching, repair of washouts, and proper functioning of any system controls. Silting in infiltration trenches or dry retention wells, for example, may impair performance. At a minimum, the maintenance plan should include periodic visual site inspections to identify unsatisfactory conditions and recommendations for typical corrective actions. If stormwater harvesting systems are used, period checks for leaks and blockages should be scheduled, and occasional cleaning may be necessary to keep the system operating effectively. Prevention of on-site erosion will extend the life of the installed measures. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Center for Watershed Protection http://vnvw.cwp.org A nonprofit dedicated to disseminating watershed protection information to community leaders and watershed managers, the center offers online resources, training seminars, and watershed protection techniques. Stormwater Manager's Resource Center http:fiwww.stormwatercenter.net This site forpractitioners and localgovemment officials provides technical assistance on stormwater management issues. U.S. EPA Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds http://www.e gov ov Liow This website has information about watersheds and information about water resource protection, water conservation, landscaping practices, and water pollution reduction. U.S. EPA, Post-Construction Stormwater Management in New Development and Redevelopment http://cfpub.epagovinpdesistormwaterimenuofbmpsfindex.cfm This EPA website provides information about catch basins as a tool for sediment control. U.S. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, National Climate Data Center http:fiww.ncdc.noaa.govioaincdc.html This website provides historical rainfall data and isohyetal maps for various storm events. 16 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281555 13. Definitions An aquifer is an underground water•bearing rock formation that supplies groundwater, wells, and springs. Retention ponds capture stormwater runoff and clear it of pollutants before its release. Some retention pond designs use gravity only; others use mechanical equipment, such as pipes and pumps, to facilitate transport. Some ponds are dry except during storm events; others permanently store water. Erosion is a combination of processes or events by which materials of the earth's surface are loosened, dissolved, or worn away and transported by natural agents (e.g., water, wind, or gravity). Impervious surfaces have a perviousness of less than so% and promote runoff of water instead of infiltration into the subsurface. Examples include parking lots, roads, sidewalks, and plazas. Infiltration basins and trenches are devices used to encourage subsurface infiltration of runoff volumes through temporary surface storage. Basins are ponds that can store large volumes of stormwater. They need to drain within 72 hours to maintain aerobic conditions and be available for future storm events. Trenches are similar to infiltration basins but are shallower and function as a subsurface reservoir for stormwater volumes. Pretreatment to remove sediment and oil may be necessary to avoid clogging infiltration devices. Infiltration trenches are more common in areas where infiltration basins are not possible. Porous pavement and permeable surfaces allow runoff to infiltrate into the ground. Stormwater runoff consists of water from precipitation that flows over surfaces into sewer systems or receiving water bodies. MI precipitation that leaves project site boundaries on the surface is considered stormwater runoff. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 17 EFTA00281556 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 3 OPTION 2, PATH 3: STORMWATER DESIGN-QUALITY CONTROL 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues As areas are developed and urbanized, surface permeability is reduced, resulting in increased stormwater runoff that is transported via gutters, pipes, and sewers to receiving waters. This stormwater contains sediment and other contaminants that have negative effects on water quality, navigation, and recreation. Furthermore, conveyance and treatment of stormwater require significant municipal infrastructure and maintenance. Sources of stormwater pollution include atmospheric deposition, vehicle fluid leaks, and mechanical equipment wastes. During storm events, these pollutants are washed away and discharged to downstream waters, damaging aquatic habitats and decreasing biological diversity of aquatic species. 2. Related Credits A building's efforts to capture and treat stormwater runoff may involve the use of pervious pavements, native or adapted vegetation, and increased on-site infiltration strategies, assisting projects with earning these credits: • SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 2: Stormwater Management—Quantity Control • SS Credit t, Option 2, Path 4: Heat Island Reduction—Nonroof Efforts to capture and reuse rainwaterforirrigation or in nonpotable applications inside the building, such as toilet and urinals, can help projects earn the following credits: • SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 7: Water-Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by so% • SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 8: Water-Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation • SS Credit 1, Option a. Path io: Water Use Reduction-30% Reduction 3. Summary of Referenced Standard U.S. EPA 840892oo2, Guidance Specifying Management Measures for Sources of Non-Point Pollution in Coastal Waters, effective January 1993 http://www.emgoviowowInps/MMGI Hardcopy or microfiche (836 pages): National Technical Information Service (PB93-234672), http:/Sv, The EPA Office of Water http:fiwww.epa.gov/OWOW This document discusses a variety of management practices that can remove pollutants from stormwater volumes. Chapter 4, Part II, addresses urban runoff and suggests strategies for treating and filtering stormwater volumes after construction is completed. 4. Implementation Choose a base buildingthat has in place a stormwater treatment system that meets the requirements of SS Credit 1, Option 2, Path 3. Since underground systems usually aren't visible, some research into the building's history may be required to determine whether the stormwater system complies with the credit requirements. Consult facility personnel, design documents, manufacturer information, and code officials about the base building's stormwater treatment systems. Building management and permitting authority may have the information needed to demonstrate that the credit requirements are met. For physical 18 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281557 components, such as extractors, manufacturers' cut sheets can confirm that the installed system can remove suspended solids and phosphorus as required by the referenced standard. Facilities can be constructed to remove contaminants from the portion of stormwater that cannot be contained or reused on-site. Possible strategies include constructed wetlands, stormwater filtering systems, bioswales, retention basins, and vegetated filter strips. While evaluating potential buildings for commercial interior projects, see whether the base building site design incorporates compliant systems. 5. Timeline and Team Because tenants may not be able to influence the base building and site infrastructure design, LEED for Commercial Interiors projects may require a different approach than LEED for New Construction or Core & Shell projects. Work with building owners or facility managers to assess the base building for compliance with the LEED requirements. Since many local jurisdictions have comparable requirements, consult with local permitting officials to determine whether the local stormwater requirements at the time of the base building construction were adequate to meet this credit. If the edsting system does not meet the credit requirements, investigate opportunities to modify the site design. This may include modification of edsting stormwater management systems and replacing site hardscapes with vegetated areas that decrease site runoff. 6. Calculations I n most cases,buildings thathaveimplemented standard EPAorlocalbestmanagementpracticeswill not need to complete any calculations to demonstrate compliance with the requirements. [(designs far different from accepted best management practices have been developed and implemented, detailed engineering calculations may be required to demonstrate the reductions in total suspended solids (TSS) and total phosphorus (TP). 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ List the best management practices used to treat stormwater and record the percentage of annual rainfall that each is designed to handle. ■ For structural controls, list and describe the measures, and determine the percentage of annual rainfall that each is designed to handle. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit t, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations The approach to this credit varies dramatically across different regions and climate zones because the t-year and 2-year 24-hour design storms are particular to a given location. Local stormwater management requirements also differ. The strategies employed in an urban, coastal environment where water is discharged to concrete channels and then the ocean will be much different from the approach for a rural, inland project that discharges to streams or lakes. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 19 EFTA00281558 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 3 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Ideally, the landlord has implemented a maintenance plan that includes periodic visual site inspections to identify any erosion and recommendations for typical corrective actions. Preventing erosion will extend the life of installed stormwater measures, since silting of infiltration trenches or dry retention wells may impair long-terrn performance. Further, this plan should address maintenance of any pervious pavement systems. This might include quarterly vacuuming or washing. The tenant should consider requiring periodic inspection and maintenance of these systems during lease negotiations 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (limxiftvww.usgbc.orgjprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 13. Definitions A constructed wetland is an engineered system designed to simulate natural wetland functions for water purification. In LEED, constructed wetlands are essentially treatment systems that remove contaminants from wastewater. Retention ponds capture stormwater nmoff and clear it of pollutants before its release. Some retention pond designs use gravity only; others use mechanical equipment, such as pipes and pumps, to facilitate transport. Some ponds are dry except during storm events; others permanently store water. Impervious surfaces have a perviousness of less than so% and promote runoff of water instead of infiltration into the subsurface. Examples include parking lots, roads, sidewalks, and plazas. Infiltration basins and trenches are devices used to encourage subsurface infiltration of runoff volumes through temporary surface storage. Basins are ponds that can store large volumes of stormwater. They need to drain within 72 hours to maintain aerobic conditions and be available for future storm events. Trenches are similar to infiltration basins but are shallower and function as a subsurface reservoir for stormwater volumes. Pretreatment to remove sediment and oil may be necessary to avoid clogging infiltration devices. Infiltration trenches are more common in areas where infiltration basins are not possible. Porous pavement and permeable surfaces allow runoff to infiltrate into the ground. Stormwater runoff consists ofwater from precipitation that flows over surfaces into sewer systems or receiving water bodies. MI precipitation that leaves project site boundaries on the surface is considered stormwater runoff. Total phosphorus (TP) consists of organically bound phosphates, polyphosphates, and orthophosphates in stormwater, the majority of which originates from fertilizer application. Chemical precipitation is the typical removal mechanism for phosphorus. Total suspended solids (TSS) are particles that are too small or light to be removed from stormwater via gravity settling. Suspended solid concentrations are typically removed via filtration. 20 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281559 OPTION 2, PATH 4: HEAT ISLAND EFFECT-NONROOF 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Theuseofdark,nonreflectivesurfaces for parking,roofsmallcways,andotherhardscapescontributes to the heat island effect by absorbing the sun's warmth, which then radiates into the surroundings. Because of heat island effect, ambient temperatures in urban areas are artificially elevated by 2° to ic3F compared with surrounding suburban and undeveloped areas." The result is increased cooling loads in the summer, requiring larger heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) equipment and greater electricity consumption, both of which generate greenhouse gases and pollution. Heat islands are detrimental to site habitat, wildlife, and animal migration corridors. Plants and animals are also sensitive to large fluctuations in daytime and nighttime temperatures and may not thrive in areas affected by heat islands. Economic Issues The energy used to cool a building represents a substantial portion of the operating budget over its lifetime. Reducing heat islands can significantly lower cooling costs and HVAC equipment needs. According to the Department of Energy's Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, the annual energy savings potential of heat island reduction measures, studied in the metropolitan areas of Sacramento, Baton Rouge, and Salt Lake City, range from $4 million to $15 million." By selecting base buildings that have taken steps to reduce heat island effect from nonroof surfaces, tenants can benefit from lower operating costs associated with space cooling. 2. Related Credits Properly designed and installed open-grid pavements increase stormwater infiltration on the site and reduce stormwater runoff, assisting projects with earning the following credits: ■ SS Credit t, Option 2, Path z Stormwater Design—Quantity Control ■ SS Credit t, Option 2, Path 3: Stormwater Design—Quality Control If the base building uses vegetation to shade hardscapes, refer to the landscape irrigation requirements in these 2 credits: ■ SS Credit t, Option 2, Path 7: Water Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by so% ■ SS Credit 1, Option 2, Path 8: Water-Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Choose a base building with physical characteristics that reduce its contribution to heat island effect. LEED for Commercial Interiors SS Credit t, Option 4, has 3 compliance paths, all of which aim to reduce the potential for nonroofbuilding surfaces to absorb and retain heat. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make shaded, reflective, or open-grid site hardscapes a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. Ss CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 2C09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 21 EFTA00281560 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 6. Calculations Shading of Nonroof Impervious Surfaces t. Identify all nonroof hardscape surfaces on the project site and sum the total area (T). Hardscapes must include all roads, sidewalks, courtyards, and parking lots within the LEED project boundary. a. Identify all hardscape surfaces that are shaded by trees or other landscape features (or will be shaded within 5 years from the date of installation). Shade coverage must be calculated at so to noon, and 3.. on the summer solstice. The arithmetic mean of these 3 values will be used as the effective shaded area. Calculated the effective shaded area (S). 3. Identify all hardscape surfaces shaded by solar energy panels and sum the total area (E). The shaded area can be considered equivalent to the area covered by the panels on the site plan (from a direct overhead aerial perspective). 4. Identify all hardscape surfaces shaded by architectural devices or structures that have an SRI of at least 29 and sum the total area (A). The shaded area can be considered equivalent to the area covered bythe architectural devices or structures on the site plan (from adirect overhead aerial perspective). 5. Identify all the hardscape surfaces that have an SRI of at least 29 and sum the total area (R). SRI can be calculated from emissivity and solar reflectance values. Emissivity is calculated by the manufactureraccording toASTM E408 or ASTM C 1374 and solar reflectance is calculated according to ASTM E 903, ASTM E 1918 or ASTM C 1549. Alternatively, use the SRI values for typical paving materials listed in Tables in lieu ofobtaining specific emissivity and solar reflectance measurements for the listed materials. Table 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) for Standard Paving Materials Material Emissivity Reflectance SRI Typical new gray concrete 0.9 0.35 35 Typical weathered• gray concrete 0.9 0.20 19 Typical new white concrete 0.9 0.7 86 Typical weathered• white concrete 0.9 0.4 45 New asphalt 0.9 .05 0 Weathered asphalt 0.9 .10 6 ' Reflectance of surfaces can be maintained with cleaning. Typical pressure washing of cernentitious m tents can restore reflectance close to original value. Weathered values are based on no cleaning. 6. Identify all hardscape surfaces that have an open grid paving system that is at least so% pervious and sum the total area (O). 7. Sum the area of all qualifying surfaces to determine the total qualifying area (Q), using Equations. Equation 1 Q=( S -I- E -I- A -FR +0 ) 8. The total qualifying area must be at least 30% of the total hardscape area (T), as in Equation 2.. 22 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281561 Equation 2 Q > T X 0.3 Underground or Covered Parking 1. Determine the total number of parking spaces within the project boundary. a. Determine the number of parking spaces that are under cover (include underground, under deck, under roof, or under building). This number must be at least so% of the total number of parking spaces. 3. A base building with no parking is not eligible for this credit path. Open-Grid Parking Areas 1. Identify the total parking lot area on the project site (T). a. Identify all hardscape surfaces that are open-grid paving that is at least so% pervious and sum the total area (O). 3. The total qualifying area (O) must be at least so% of the total parking lot area, as in Equation 3. Equation 3 T O > — 2 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ If surfaces are shaded, prepare a site plan that highlights all nonroof hardscape areas. Clearly label each portion of hardscape that counts toward credit achievement. List material information about the compliant surfaces (e.g., SRI values of reflective paving materials). ■ If parking spaces are placed under cover, determine the total number of parking spaces and the portion covered. If applicable, assemble SRI values for the roofs that cover parking areas. si If hardscapes are open-grid paving, prepare a site plan that highlights the areas covered by the open-grid pavement system. Assemble information about the open-grid system used. 8. Examples The tenant space is in a building situated on a 25,00o-square-foot site, ofwhich ts,000 square feet is occupied by the building footprint and vegetated areas. Deciduous trees shade parking and driveway areas, and light-colored concrete with an SRI of 35 is in place for the driving aisles and walkways (Figure 1). Areas that contain both light-colored hardscapes and are shaded by trees are counted only once. Table 2 lists the areas of qualifying surfaces. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 23 EFTA00281562 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 Table 2. Sample Areas of Qualifying Surfaces Description Area CA Total nonroof hardscapes 10.000 Shaded areas 3.000 Areas of hardscapes with minimum SRI-29 4.000 Total qualifying surfaces 7.000 n this example, the total area of qualifying surfaces is greater than so% of the total area of nonroof hardscapes, and the project earns t point. Figure 1. Shading and SRI for Credit Compliance Parking Area with an SRI of 19 (does not contribute towards credit Diagram courtesy of Ow99 Shaded Area (contributes towards credit achievement) Driving Aisle with SRI of 35 (contributes towards credit Walkways with SRI of 35 (contributes towards credit 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn credit for exemplary performance under SS Credit I, Path ta, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, by demonstrating that 2 or more of the compliance paths described above have been met. 10. Regional Variations Heat island intensities depend on an area's weather and climate, proximity to water bodies, and topography:I Buildings in very cold climates or at high latitudes may not experience the same rise 24 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EFTA00281563 of surface and ambient temperatures. Buildings in urban areas and those in climate zones 1, 2, and 3 (as defined by ASNIIASHRAEIIESNA Standard 90.1-2007) are most affected by heat islands and are likely to benefit from measures to decrease cooling loads by avoiding additional heat absorption. In sunny climates, building tenants may need to mitigate glare from reflective pavements into the building by providing shading devices. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Tenants who have located in a building that uses the strategies described in this credit should be aware of the need to maintain materials and systems. Surface materials with high reflectivity should be cleaned at least every 2 years to maintain good reflectance. Some open-grid pavement systems require special maintenance to remain pervious. If this is the responsibility of the tenant, project teams should request maintenance information from product manufacturers and installers and make sure this information is given to the operations team. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Concrete Pavement Association This national association represents concrete pavement contractors, cement companies, equipment and material manufacturers, and suppliers. See Albedo: A Measure of Pavement Surface Reflectance, R&T Update (3.05) (June zooz): Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Heat Island Group http://eetd.lbl.gov/HeatIslandi Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory conducts heat island research to find, analyze, and implement solutions to minimize heat island effect. Current research efforts focus on the study and development of more reflective surfaces for roadways and buildings. U.S. EPA, Heat Island Effect http:fiwww.epa.goviheatislandfindex.htm This website offers basic information about heat island effect, its social and environmental costs, and reduction strategies. 13. Definitions Albedo is synonymous with solar reflectance. Emissivity is the ratio of the radiation emitted by a surface to the radiation emitted by a black body at the same temperature. Greenhouse gases are relatively transparent to the higher-energy sunlight but trap lower-energy infrared radiation (e.g., carbon dioxide, methane, and CFCs). Hardscape consists of the inanimate elements of the building landscaping. Examples include pavement, roadways, stonewalls, concrete paths and sidewalks, and concrete, brick, and tile patios. Heat island effect refers to the absorption of heat by hardscapes, such as dark, nonreflective pavement and buildings, and its radiation to surrounding areas. Particularly in urban areas, other sources may include vehicle exhaust, air-conditioners, and street equipment; reduced airflow from tall buildings and narrow streets exacerbates the effect. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 25 EFTA00281564 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 Impervious surfaces have a perviousness of less than 50% and promote runoff of water instead of infiltration into the subsurface. Examples include parking lots, roads, sidewalks, and plazas. Infrared (or thermal) emittance is a parameter between o and 1 (or o% and t00%) that indicates the ability of a material to shed infrared radiation (heat). The wavelength range for this radiant energy is roughly 5 to 40 micrometers. Most building materials (including glass) are opaque in this part of the spectrum and have an emittance of roughly 0.9. Materials such as clean, bare metals are the most important exceptions to the 0.9 rule. Thus clean, untarnished galvanized steel has low emittance, and aluminum roof coatings have intermediate emittance levels. On-site wastewater treatment systems transport, store, treat, and dispose of wastewater volumes generated on the project site. Perviousness is the percentage of the surface area of a paving system that is open and allows moisture to soak into the ground below. Solar reflectance, or albedo, is a measure of the ability of a surface material to reflect sunlight— visible, infrared, and ultraviolet wavelengths—on a scale ofo tot. Black paint has a solar reflectance of 0; white paint (titanium dioxide) has a solar reflectance oft. The solar reflectance index (SRI) is a measure of a material's ability to reject solar heat, as shown by a small temperature rise. Standard black (reflectance 0.05, emittance 0.90) is o and standard white (reflectance 0.80, emittance 0.9o) is too. For example, a standard black surface has a temperature rise of go- F (50-C) in full sun, and a standard white surface has a temperature rise of 14.6'F (8.1t). Once the maximum temperature rise of a given material has been computed, the SRI can be calculated by interpolating between the values for white and black. Materials with the highest SRI values are the coolest choices for paving. Because of the way SRI is defined, particularly hot materials can even take slightly negative values, and particularly cool materials can even exceed 100. (Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory Cool Roofing Materials Database) Undercover parking is underground or under a deck, roof, or building; its hardscape surfaces are shaded. 26 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281565 OPTION 2, PATH 5: HEAT ISLAND EFFECT-ROOF 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The use of dark, nonreflective roofing surfaces contributes to the heat island effect by absorbing the sun's warmth, which then radiates into the surroundings. Because of the heat island effect, ambient temperatures in urban areas are artificially elevated, resulting in increased cooling loads, greater electricity consumption, and higher emissions of greenhouse gases and pollution. Heat islands are also detrimental to site habitat, wildlife, and the migration corridors of various species. Plants and animals are sensitive to large fluctuations in daytime and nighttime temperatures and may not thrive in areas affected by heat islands. In addition, base buildings that have vegetated roofs provide habitat for birds, insects, and other wildlife. Economic Issues Tenants can benefit from reduced costs associated with cooling and HVAC equipment by selecting base buildings that have vegetated roofing and/or highly reflective roofing materials. 2. Related Credits Properly designed and installed vegetated roofs increase stormwater infiltration on the site and help reduce stormwater runoff, assisting projects with earning these 2 credits: ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path a: Stormwater Design—Quantity Control ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 3: Stormwater Design—Quality Control Vegetated roofs also reduce the availabilityofrainwaterthatcan be harvested for nonpotable purposes, making the following water-efficiencycredits more challenging to achieve: ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 7: Water-Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by so% ■ SS Credit 1, Option 2, Path 8: Water-Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 10: Water Use Reduction-3o% Reduction 3. Summary of Referenced Standards AS IA International Standards http://www.astm.org ASTM E1980-01, Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces This standard describes how surface reflectivity and emissivity are combined to calculate a solar reflectance index (SRI) for a roofing material or other surface. The standard also describes a laboratory and field testing protocol that can be used to determine SRI. ASTM E408-71.(1996)m, Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using Inspection-Meter Techniques This standard describes how to measure total normal emittance of surfaces using a portable inspection-meterinstrument. Thetest methods are intended forlarge surfaceswhere nondestructive testing is required. See the standard for testing steps and a discussion of thermal emittance theory. ASTM E903-96, Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmitaance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres Referenced in the ENERGY STAR roofing standard, this test method uses spectrophotometers and need be applied only for initial reflectance measurement. It specifies methods of computing solar- weighted properties using the measured spectral values. This test method is applicable to materials S S CI Credit I OPTION 2: PATH 5 2C09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 27 EFTA00281566 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 5 having both specular and diffuse optical properties. Except for transmitting sheet materials that are heterogeneous, patterned, or corrugated, this test method is preferred over Test Method E1084. The ENERGY STAR roofing standard also allows the use of reflectometers to measure roofing materials' solar reflectance. See the roofing standard for more details. 4. Implementation Choose a base building that has incorporated highly reflective roof surfaces or vegetated roofs. Use the LEED-certified buildings database to find local projects that have achieved LEED credit for roof heat island reduction and include this requirement in the criteria for selecting a base building. Local roofing product representatives may be able to identify buildings where their compliant products have been installed. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make an installed vegetated roof or reflective roofing a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations i. Determine the total roof surface area of the project building (square feet). a. Determine the area of the roof covered by mechanical equipment, solar energy panels, and appurtenances, and deduct these areas from the total roof surface area. 3. Determine whether the areas of qualifying reflective and vegetated roofing are adequate to meet the credit requirements, using Equation'. Tablet provides SRI values for typical roofing materials. Project teams may use these values to determine compliance if manufacturers' data are not available for existing installed materials. Equation 1 Area of Low Slope SRI Material 78 X 0.75 SRI Value Area of Steep — Slope SRI Material 0.75 29 X SRI Value Vegetated Roof Area 0.5 Total Roof Deducoci Area Area Table 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) for Typical Roofing Materials Example SRI Values for Solar Infrared Temperature Solar Solar Reflectance Infrared Eminence Temperature Rise SRI Gray EPDM 0.23 0.87 68°F 21 Gray asphalt shingle 0.22 0.91 67°F 22 Unpainted cement tile 0.25 0.9 65°F 25 White granular surface bitumen 0.26 0.92 63°F 28 Red clay tile 0.33 0.9 58°F 36 Light gravel on buitt-up roof 0.34 0.9 57°F 37 Aluminum coating 0.61 0.25 48°F 50 White-coated gravel on built-up roof 0.65 0.9 28°F 79 White coating on metal roof 0.67 0.85 28°F 82 White EPDM 0.69 0.87 25F 84 White cement tile 0.73 0.9 21F 90 White coating, 1 coat. 8 mils 0.8 0.91 14F 100 PVC white 0.83 0.92 I IF 104 White coating, 2 coats, 20 mils 0.85 0.91 9F 107 Source: LBNL Cool Roofing Materials Database 28 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281567 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Prepare roof drawings that show the total roof area and the areas of reflective materials or vegetated roof systems. • List the roofing products and their emittance percentages, reflectance percentages, SRI values, and slopes. Retain product specifications that verify product characteristics. 8. Examples The project has selected tenant space in an office building that has a to,000-square-foot low-slope roof with both high-reflectance roofing materials and a vegetated roof system. The vegetated roof makes up 35% of the roof area. White EPDM roofing with a SRI of 85 covers 60% of the roof area, and the remaining5% is covered by rooftop mechanical equipment. Table 2 summarizes the roofing types. Table 2. Roofing Area Summary, by Type Roofing Type Area GO Vegetated roof area 3.500 White EPDM roof area (SRI-851, low slope 6.000 Mechanical equipment 500 Total roof area 10.000 Using Equation 1, ( 6" ▪ 3500 = 0.75 0.5 85 78 X ( ) 15,718 a 10,000 - 500 n this example, the white EPDM roofing plus the vegetated roofing meets the requirements of this credit, and the project earns 1 point. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn credit for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, by demonstrating that t00% of the building's roof area (excluding mechanical equipment, photovoltaic panels, and skylights) consists of a vegetated roof system. 10. Regional Variations Heat island intensities depend on an area's weather and climate, proximity to water bodies, and topography." Buildings in very cold climates or at high latitudes may not experience the same rise of surface and ambient temperatures. Projects in urban areas and those in climate zones t, 2, and 3 (as defined by ASNIIASHRAEIIESNA Standard 90.1-2007) are most affected by heat islands and are likely to benefit from measures to decrease cooling loads by avoiding additional heat absorption. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Tenants who have located in a building that uses the strategies described in this credit may not be responsible for their upkeep but should nevertheless be aware of the need to maintain materials and systems. Surface materials with high reflectivity should be cleaned at least every zyears to maintain good reflectance. S S CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 29 EFTA00281568 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 5 Building operators must have the necessary information to maintain any vegetated roofing system. An operations plan should specify the schedule for inspecting the roof membrane and plantings and maintaining drainage paths. Until plants are fully established, watering and fertilization may be necessary. Properly designed green roofs do not require mowing or cutting, though occasional weeding may be required. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpifiwww.usgbc.org(pLojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Cool Roof Rating Council http://wv.coolroofs.org This nonprofit organization is dedicated to implementing and communicating fair, accurate, and credible radiative energy performance rating systems for roof surfaces; supporting research into roofing surfaces' energy-related radiative properties, including durability; and providing education and objective support to parties interested in understanding and comparing various roofing options. ENERGY STAR. Reflective Roofing Products http://www.energystar.govfindex.cfrn? roof prods.pr_roof_products This website provides solar reflectance levels required to meet ENERGY STAR® requirements for qualified roof products. Green Roofs for Healthy Cities This nonprofit industry association consists of individuals and public and private organizations committed to developing a market for green roof infrastructure products and services across North America. Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Heat Island Group, Cool Roofs http://eetd.lbl.gov/HeatIsland/CoolRoofsj This site offers a wealth of information about cool roof research and technology, including links to the cool roofing materials database. Pennsylvania State University, Center for Green Roof Research http://hortWeb.cas.psu.eduiresearchigreenroofcenteri The center aims to demonstrate and promote green roof research, education, and technology transfer in the Northeastern United States. Whole Building Design Guide, Extensive Green Roofs http://ww.wbdg.orgtresourcestreenroofs.plip This article by Charlie Miller, PE, details the features and benefits of constructing green roofs. 13. Definitions Albedo is synonymous with solar reflectance. Emissivity is the ratio ofthe radiation emitted by a surface to the radiation emitted by a black body at the same temperature. Greenhouse gases are relatively transparent to the higher-energy sunlight but trap lower-energy infrared radiation (e.g., carbon dioxide, methane, and CFCs). Heat island effect refers to the absorption of heat by hardscapes, such as dark, nonreflective pavement and buildings, and its radiation to surrounding areas. Particularly in urban areas, other 30 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281569 sources may include vehicle exhaust, air-conditioners, and street equipment; reduced airflow from tall buildings and narrow streets exacerbates the effect. Infrared (or thermal) emittance is a parameter between o and 1 (or o% and t00%) that indicates the ability of a material to shed infrared radiation (heat). The wavelength range for this radiant energy is roughly 5 to 40 micrometers. Most building materials (including glass) are opaque in this part of the spectrum and have an emittance of roughly 0.9. Materials such as clean, bare metals are the most important exceptions to the 0.9 rule. Thus clean, untarnished galvanized steel has low emittance, and aluminum roof coatings have intermediate emittance levels. Solar reflectance, or albedo, is a measure of the ability of a surface material to reflect sunlight— visible, infrared,and ultraviolet wavelengths—on a scale of0 to 1. Black paint has a solar reflectance of 0; white paint (titanium dioxide) has a solar reflectance oft. The solar reflectance index (SRI) is a measure of a material's ability to reject solar heat, as shown by a small temperature rise. Standard black (reflectance 0.05, emittance 0.90) is o and standard white (reflectance 0.80, emittance 0.9o) is too. For example, a standard black surface has a temperature rise of 90-F (50-C) in full sun, and a standard white surface has a temperature rise of 1¢6'F (8.1-C). Once the maximum temperature rise of a given material has been computed, the SRI can be calculated by interpolating between the values for white and black. Materials with the highest SRI values are the coolest choices for paving. Because of the way SRI is defined, particularly hot materials can even take slightly negative values, and particularly cool materials can even exceed too. (Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory Cool Roofing Materials Database) SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 31 EFTA00281570 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 6 OPTION 2, PATH 6: LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues This credit option seeks to recognize projects that minimize their contribution to light pollution from interior lighting. Light pollution consists of both light trespass (affecting adjacent sites) and sky glow (affecting the sky). Poorly designed interior perimeter lighting can affect the nocturnal ecosystem on the site if interior light passes through translucent or transparent openings in the building envelope and unnecessarily illuminates the exterior environment. This light pollution can hinder enjoyment of the night sky for both the building occupants and neighbors. Minimizing light pollution encourages nocturnal wildlife to thrive at the building site and permits observations of the night sky. Another benefit is better visual comfort and improved visibility. Sensitively designed lighting systems that minimize glare and provide more uniform light at lower levels create aesthetically pleasing, more secure environments. Acarefullydesigned and maintained lighting system can help a project be a nonintrusive member of the community. Economic Issues Well-controlled lighting provides the right amount of lighting in the right place at the right times, thereby saving energy. By selecting high-efficiency luminaries and light sources, the project team can maximize energy and maintenance savings over the lifetime of the building. 2. Related Credits By lighting areas only as necessary, designers avoid wasting light by spilling it through openings in the envelope (translucent or transparent). These efforts, along with the integration of lighting controls, support the achievement of the following credits: ■ EA Credit 1.1: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power ■ EA Credit 1.2: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls Development of a comprehensive lighting design that has individual and group controls should also include automatic occupancy controls to shut off interior perimeter lighting when spaces are not occupied. These considerations relate to the following credit: • IEQ Credit 6.1: Controllability of Systems—Lighting 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Locate the project in a building with interior and exterior lighting equipment designed to eliminate light trespass from the building and the site, and include this requirement in the base building selection criteria. Local USGBC chapters or the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) may have detailed information on projects that have achieved light pollution reduction requirements. Project teams can meet the requirements of this credit through t of a options: OPTION 1 All nonemergency interior lighting fixtures must be automatically controlled and programmed to turn off or have their input power reduced by at least so% following regular business hours. Controls may be automatic sweep timers, occupancy sensors, or programmed master lighting 32 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281571 control panels. Manual or occupancy-based override capabilities that enable lights to be turned on for after-hours use should be included in the design. Projects operating 24 hours a day are exempt from the after-hours override automatic shutoff and thus must use Option 2. OPTION 2 All exterioropenings, such as windows, must have shielding that can be automatically controlled and programmed to close from 11:00 to 5:00 M. Shielding options include automatic shades that have less than 14A transmittance. An example is a rolling shade that controls light transmittance and is operated automatically, with a timer. 5. Timeline and Team Duringthedesign phase, the project team should considerstrategiesthatwill reduceoreliminatelight from exiting the building through openings in the building envelope (translucent or transparent). During construction administration, the architect or design team should verify that the shop drawings are compliant with the intended design. Field verification and adjustment of fixtures and fixture heads should take place during installation. After construction is complete, commissioning will ensure that automatic lighting controls or shading devices are operating according to the design intent. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ If automatic controls are used for interior lighting, prepare drawings showing their location and incorporate the sequence of operation for lighting into drawings and specifications or the building operation plan. ■ [(automatic shading devices are used to control interior lighting, prepare drawings of shading devices, assemble specifications or product data showing that the shading devices result in transmittance of less than 1095, and incorporate the sequence of operation for automatic shading devices into drawings and specifications or the building operation plan. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations The project team should ensure that automatic control schedules for lighting or shading devices are documented in the building's operation plan. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 6 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 33 EFTA00281572 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 6 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpWwww.usgbc.orgiptojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Illuminating Engineering Society of North America httpg/www.iesna.org The mission of IESNA is to benefit society by promoting knowledge and disseminating information for the improvement of the lighted environment. International Dark-Sky Association http://www.darksIcy.ozgiida/ida_z/indoc_html This nonprofit agency is dedicated to educating about and providing solutions to light pollution. Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Lighting Research Center http://www.Ircspi.edu This leading university-based research center is devoted to providing objective information about lighting technologies, applications, and products. Sky and Telescope This site Includes facts on light pollution and its effect on astronomy and information about purchasing light pollution-minimizing light fixtures. Print Media TheIESNALightingHandbook, ninth edition,edited by Mark S. Rea (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, woo). Lighting for Exterior Environments RP-33-99, by The IESNA Outdoor Environment Lighting Committee (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America,t999). Concepts in Practice Lighting: Lighting Design in Architecture, by Torquil Barker (B.T. Batsford Ltd., 1997). The Design ofLighting, by Peter Tregenza and David Loe (E Sc AN Spona998). 13. Definitions Light pollution is waste light from building sites that produces glare, is directed upward to the sky, or is directed off the site. Waste light does not increase nighttime safety, utility, or security and needlessly consumes energy. Light trespass is obtrusive light that is unwanted because of quantitative, directional, or spectral attributes. Light trespass can cause annoyance, discomfort, distraction, or loss of visibility. Sky glow is caused by stray light from unshielded light sources and light reflecting off surfaces that then enter the atmosphere and illuminate and reflect off dust, debris, and water vapor. Sky glow can substantially limit observation of the night sky, compromise astronomical research, and adversely affect nocturnal environments. 34 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281573 OPTION 2, PATH 7: WATER EFFICIENT LANDSCAPING-REDUCE BY 50%, AND PATH 8: WATER EFFICIENT LANDSCAPING-NO POTABLE WATER USE OR NO IRRIGATION 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Landscape irrigation practices in the United States consume large quantities of potable water. Outdoor uses, primarily landscaping, account for 30% of the z6 billion gallons of water consumed daily in the United States.'s Improved landscaping practices can dramatically reduce and even eliminate irrigation needs. Maintaining or reestablishing native or adapted plants on building sites fosters a self-sustaining landscape that requires minimal supplemental water and provides other environmental benefits as well, such as attracting native wildlife and creating a building site integrated with its natural surroundings. In addition, native or adapted plants tend to require less fertilizer and pesticides, and therefore reduce water quality degradation and other environmental impacts. Water-efficient landscaping helps conserve local and regional potable water resources. Maintaining natural aquifer conditions is important to providing reliable water sources for future generations. Consideration of water issues during planning can encourage development where resources can support it and prevent development if it would exceed the resource capacity. Economic Issues A water-efficient landscape design can lower municipal water use and maintenance requirements for the base building. The resulting cost savings may be reflected in lower lease rates. 2. Related Credits In addition to reducing potable water consumption, rainwater capture systems can be used to manage stormwater runoff and can help projects earn points under these credits: ■ SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path z: Stormwater Design—Quantity Control ■ SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 3: Stormwater Design—Quality Control Landscape plantings that shade hardscapes can help achieve the following credit: ■ SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 4: Heat Island Effect—Nonroof Additionally, landscape plantings can mitigate climate conditions and reduce building energy consumption (for example, by shading south-facing windows), contributing to this credit: ■ EA Credit I: Optimize Energy Performance The use of a vegetated roof may contribute to the achievement of another SS credit: ■ SS Credit t, Option 2, Path 5: Heat Island Effect—Roof 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Choose a base building with water-efficient landscape irrigation that is designed to reduce or eliminate the use of potable water by incorporating features such as these: ■ Landscaping with indigenous plants. CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7: PATH 8 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 35 EFTA00281574 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 ■ Rainwater collection systems. • High-efficiency irrigation strategies, such as microirrigation systems, moisture sensors, timers, and weather database controllers. • Graywater systems used for site irrigation. Landscape irrigation using "nuisance" groundwater (i.e., groundwater that must be pumped away from the building's basement or foundation) is an example of a strategy to achieve this option. However, a well installed specifically to collect groundwater for irrigation does not meet the intent of this credit. Additionally, a project site that has no landscaping is not eligible. Buildings without vegetation or other ecologically appropriate features on the grounds can nevertheless earn points by reducing the use of potable water for watering any roof or courtyard garden space or outdoor planters, provided the planters or garden space cover at least 5% of the building site area (including building footprint, hardscape area, parking footprint, etc.). If the planters or garden space cover less than 5% of the building site area, the project is ineligible for this credit. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make installed native landscaping, rainwater collection systems, high- efficiency irrigation strategies, or graywater systems a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations The following calculation methodology is used to support the credit submittals for Options 7 and 8. To quantify water-efficient landscaping measures, determine the irrigation volumes for the designed landscape irrigation system for July and compare these with irrigation volumes required for a baseline landscape irrigation system. The resulting water savings is the difference between the 2 systems. The factors that must be calculated to determine irrigation volumes are explained in detail in the following paragraphs and summarized in Tablet. To calculate the percentage reduction in potable or natural water use for this credit, establish a baseline water use rate for the project and then calculate the as-designed water use rate according to the steps listed below. Standard Assumptions and Variables • All calculations are based on irrigation during July. ■ The landscape coefficient (KO indicatesthevolumeofwaterlost throughevapotranspiration. It varies with the plant species, microclimate, and planting density. The formula for determining the landscape coefficient is given in Equation 3. ■ The species factor (Ics) accounts for variation in water needs by different plant species, divided into 3 categories (high, average, and low water need). To determine the appropriate category for a plant species, use plant manuals and professional experience. This factor is somewhat subjective, but landscape professionals know the general water needs of plant species. Landscapes can be maintained in acceptable condition at about 50%of the reference evapotranspiration (ETO) value, and thus the average value of ks is 0.5. If a species does not require irrigation once it is established, then the effective ks = a and the resulting Kr. = 0. • The density factor (Ica) accounts for the number of plants and the total leaf area of a landscape. Sparsely planted areas will have lessevapotranspiration than densely planted areas. An average kd is applied to areas where shading from trees is 60% tome:1%. This is equivalent to shrubs and groundcover that shade 90% to 100% of the landscape area. Low kd values are found where shading from trees is less than 60%, or where shrub and groundcover shading is less than 90% 36 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281575 For instance, a 25% ground shading from trees results in a Ica value of 0.5. In mixed plantings, where the tree canopy shades understory shrubs and groundcover, evapotranspiration increases. This represents the highest level of landscape density, and the kd value is to to 1.3. ■ The microclimatefactor (km) accountsforenvironmentalconditionsspecifictothelandscape, including temperature, wind, and humidity. For instance, parking lots increase wind and temperature effects on adjacent landscapes. The average Iczne is t.o; this refers to conditions where evapotranspiration is unaffected by buildings, pavements, reflective surfaces, or slopes. High-km conditions occur where evaporative potential is increased byheat-absorbing and reflective surfaces or exposure to high winds; examples include parking lots, west sides of buildings, and the west and south-facing slopes, medians, and areas experiencing wind tunnel effects. Low-km landscapes include shaded areas and areas protected from wind, such as north sides of buildings, courtyards, areas under wide building overhangs, and north-facing slopes. STEP 1. Create a Design Case Determine the landscape area for the project. This number must represent the as-designed landscape area and must use the same project boundary as is used in all other LEED credits. Sort the total landscape area into the major vegetation types (trees, shrubs, groundcover, mixed, and turf grass), listing the area for each. Determine the following characteristics for each landscape area: species factor (lcs), density factor (ka), and microclimate factor (km). Recommended values for each are provided in Table t. Select the low, average, or high value for each parameter as appropriate for the site. Explain any variance from these recommended values in the credit narrative. Table 1. Landscape Factors Vegetation type Species Factor 041 Density Factor (ro) Microclimate Factor (knc) Low Average High Low Average Hie. Low Average High Trees 0.2 0.5 0.9 0.5 1.0 1.3 0.5 1.0 1.4 Shrubs 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.5 1.0 1.1 0.5 1.0 1.3 Groundcover 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.5 1.0 1.1 0.5 1.0 1.2 Mixed trees. shrubs. groundcover 0.2 0.5 0.9 0.6 1.1 1.3 0.5 1.0 1.4 Turf grass 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.6 1.0 1.0 0.8 1.0 1.2 Calculate the landscape coefficient (KL) by multiplying the 3 area characteristics, as shown in Equation 1. Equation 1 K1 = k, x ks x km, Determine the reference evapotranspiration rate (ETo) for the region. This rate is a measurement of the total amount ofwater needed to growa reference plant (such as grass or alfalfa), expressed in millimeters or inches. The values for ET° in various regions throughout the United States can be found in regional agricultural data (see Resources). The ETO for July is used in the LEED calculation because this is typically the month with the greatest evapotranspiration effects and, therefore, the greatest irrigation demands. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 37 EFTA00281576 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 Calculate the project-specific evapotranspiration rate (ETL) for each landscape area by multiplying the (ETO) by the ICE., as shown in Equation a. Equation 2 Eh fin) = ETo X 1(i. Determine the irrigation efficiency (IE) by listing the type of irrigation used for each landscape area and the corresponding efficiency. Table a lists irrigation efficiencies for different irrigation systems. Calculations will be accepted that include water use reduction and efficiencies from rotating heads, pressure-regulating heads, and "smart" irrigation controls. These numbers must be supported by either manufacturers' documentation or detailed calculations by the landscape designer. Table 2. Irrigation Types and Efficiencies TYPe ffici E ency Sprinkler 0.625 Drip 0.90 Determine, if applicable, the controller efficiency (CE), the percentage reduction in water use from any weather-based controllers or moisture sensor-based systems. This number must be supported by either manufacturers' documentation or detailed calculations by the landscape designer. Determine, if applicable, the volume of reuse water (harvested rainwater, recycled graywater, or treated wastewater) available in July. Reuse water volumes may depend on rainfall volume and frequency, building-generated graywater and wastewater, and on-site storage capacity. On- site reuse systems must be modeled to predict volumes generated on a monthly basis as well as optimal storage capacity. For harvested rainwater calculations, project teams may either use the collected rainwater total for July based on historical average precipitation, or use historical data for each month to model collection and reuse throughout the year. The latter method allows the project team to determine the volume of water that can be expected in the storage cistern at the beginning ofluly and add it to the expected rainwater volume collected during the month; it also allows the team to determine the optimal size of the rainwater cistern. To calculate the total water applied (TWA) and total potable water applied (TPWA) for each landscape area and the installed case, use Equations 3 and 4. Equation 3 ( Design Case TWA (gal) = Area (s0 X Eh (in) IE ) X CE X 0.6233 (gaUsfAn) Equation 4 Design Case TPWA (gal) = TWA (ga0 — Reuse Water (gal) STEP 2. Create the Baseline Case In the baseline case, the species factor (k3), density factor (Ica), and irrigation efficiency (IE) are set to average values representative of conventional equipment and design practices. The same microclimate factors (kmc) and the reference evapotranspiration rate (ET0) are used in both cases. If the project substitutes low-water-using plants (such as shrubs) for high-water- using types (such as turf grass), the landscape areas can be reallocated in the baseline case, but 38 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281577 the total landscape area must remain the same. The baseline cannot be t00% turf grass if typical landscaping practices in the region include trees, shrubs, and planting beds. Calculate the TWA for the baseline case using Equation 5. Equation 5 Ell. (in) Baseline Case TWA (gal) = Area (sr) X X 0.6233 (galisf/in) IE STEP 3 Calculate the percentage reduction in total irrigation water use (potable and reuse) AND the percentage reduction of potable water use for irrigation. Calculate the percentage reduction of potable water use according to Equation 6. Equation 6 Percentage Reduction of Potable Water 1%) Design TPWA 1 ) X 100 Baseline TWA If the percentage reduction of potable water use for irrigation achieved is so% or more, it meets the requirements for Option 7. If the percentage reduction of potable water use for irrigation achieved is t00% and the percentage reduction of total water use for irrigation is so% or more, it meets the requirements for Option 8 as well as Option 7. If the percentage reduction of potable water use for irrigation is 1OO%, also calculate the percentage reduction of total water (potable plus reuse), according to Equation 7. Equation 7 Percentage Reduction of = Total Water (%) Design TWA Baseline TWA X too 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Estimate the amounts of potable and nonpotable water used for landscape irrigation. ■ Estimate the percentage reduction in water demand, and report on the portion of irrigation that will come from each nonpotable source (if any). • Prepare a landscape plan showing a planting schedule and irrigation system. 8. Examples EXAMPLE 1. OPTION 2, PATH 7 An office building in Austin, Texas, has a total site area of 6,000 square feet. The site comprises 3 landscape types: shrubs, mixed vegetation, and turf grass. MI are irrigated with a combination of potable water and graywater harvested from the building. The reference evapotranspiration rate (ETO) for Austin in July, obtained from the local agricultural data service, is 8.12. The high- efficiency irrigation system utilizes drip irrigation with an efficiency of go% and reuses an estimated 4,zoo gallons of graywater during July. Table 3 shows the calculations to determine total potable water use for the designed case. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 2C09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 39 EFTA00281578 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 The baseline case uses the same reference evapotranspiration rate and total site area. However, it uses sprinklers for irrigation (IE = 0.625), does not take advantage of graywater harvesting, and irrigates only shrubs and turf grass. Calculations to determine total water use for the baseline case are presented in Table 4. The design case has an irrigation water demand of 14,63zgallons.Graywater reuse provides 4,zoo gallons toward the demand, and this volume is treated as a credit in the water calculation. Thus, the total potable water use in July is 1443z gallons. The baseline case has an irrigation demand of 38,967 gallons and uses no graywater. The project thus achieves a potable water savings of 73% and earns SS Credit 1, Path 7. Table 3. Design Case (July) Landscape Type Area (sf) Species Factor (kr) Density Factor Ord) Microclimate Factor waked KL ETL IE TWA (gal) Shrubs 1.200 Low 0.2 Avg 1.0 High 1.3 0.26 2.11 Drip 1.754.5 Mixed 3.900 Low 0.2 Avg 1.1 High 1.4 0.31 2.50 Drip 6,755 Turf grass 900 Avg 0.7 Avg 1.0 High 1.2 0.84 6.82 Sprinkler 6,122 Subtotal TWA (gal) 14,632 July rainwater a d graywata harvest (gall (4.200) TPWA (gall 10,432 Table 4. Baseline Case (July) Landscape Type Area (so Species Facta (") Density Facta (lad Microclimate Factor (km) KL ETL IE 1WA (gal) Shrubs 1.200 Avg 0.5 Avg 1.0 High 1.3 0.65 5.28 Sprinkler 6.316.4 Turf grass 4,800 Avg 0.7 Avg 1.0 High 1.2 0.84 6.82 Sprinkler 32.650.8 Subtotal TWA (gal) 38,967 EXAMPLE 2. OPTION 2, PATH 8 The project team could achieve Path 8 bycompletelyeliminating the need for potable water. One strategy is to rely on native plants and harvest rainwater for irrigation use, as shown in Figure 1. Figure 1. A sketch of potential areas for rainwater collection and native plantings on-site to eliminate the need for potable water for irrigation. water low Iron roof le garden • alt. In Iron roof to cistern for water collection droughttts era planting; 40 LIED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GRIEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281579 Figure 2. A site section showing the cistern for rainwater harvesting which feeds a drip irrigation system to eliminate any potable water needed for irrigation. Et. OIN nine. chnsit hirdt phnii ten nisralls loltrazt *el tool+o. the gii0en UnM 4O 0,/ $3,11:et tM pv.PNOI 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations Much of the United States is faced with increasing demands on existing water supplies, and it is therefore important to landscape sites appropriately for the climate. Appropriately designed landscaping should take into account climate and microclimate, sun exposure, soil type, site drainage, topography, and irrigation options. In hot, dry climates, use drought-tolerant plants and xeriscape designs. Reducing or eliminating turf grass will lessen the demand on potable water. Rocks and stones can be incorporated into the landscape instead. If turf grass is desired, select a species that can endure drought. In hot, humid, and temperate climates, use native plants combined with rain or moisture sensors to avoid unnecessary watering in the wet seasons. The use of captured rainwater can help eliminate the use of potable water for irrigation needs. In cold climates, install hardy native plants and trees. Rain or moisture sensors will prevent excessive watering. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations The building's facility manager will typically be responsible for the operations and maintenance of the water-efficient landscaping systems. A simple way to increase the efficiency of a conventional system is to schedule watering early or late in the daywhen evaporation is minimal.This allows more water to soak into the ground and reach the roots of the plants. Irrigation systems and controllers must be commissioned to work optimally. This includes inspecting, maintaining, and adjusting the systems on a regular basis. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpdhvww.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Water Works Association, WaterWiser: The Water Efficiency Clearinghouse httruwww.awwa.orydwaterwiser This clearinghouse includes articles, reference materials, and papers on all forms of water efficiency. California State University at Fresno, Center for Irrigation Technology httplicati.csufresno.edulcit CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 41 EFTA00281580 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 CIT is an independent research and testing facility providing information to designers, manufacturers, and users of irrigation equipment. Irrigation Association htuxfiwww.irrigation.org This nonprofit organization promotes products that efficiently use water in irrigation applications. Rain Birds ET Manager"' Scheduler This free software provides sufficient local evapo-transpiration data for the United States and Canada. Use data from the closest or most climate-appropriate location. University of Missouri Extension, Water-Efficient Gardening and Landscaping http://muextension.missouri.edukcplorlagguides/hortigoOtz.htm This website has general descriptions and strategies for water efficiency in gardens and landscapings. Print Media Evapotranspiration and Inigation Water Requirements, ASCE Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No.70 (ASCE, 1990). Efficient Irrigation: A Reference Manual for Turf and Landscape, by Geoff Connellan (University of Melbourne, 2002). Estimating Irrigation Water Needs of Landscape Plantings in California (University of California Cooperative Extension and California Department of Water Resources,1999). This guide explains the landscaping coefficient method established by the University of California. http://wv.owue.vrater.ca.govidocstwucolsoo.pdf. Landscape Inigation: Design and Management, by Stephen W. Smith (John VViley &Sons, 1996). Ttuffrn.gation Manual, fifth edition, by Richard B. Choate (Telsco Industries, 1994). Water-Efficient Landscaping: Preventing Pollution and Using Resources Wisely (the EPA, 2002). This EPA manual describes ways to reduce water consumption through creative landscaping techniques. 13. Definitions An aquifer is an underground water-bearing rock formation that supplies groundwater, wells, and springs. Conventional irrigation refers to the most common irrigation system used in the region where the project is located. A common conventional irrigation system uses pressure to deliver water and distributes it through sprinkler heads above the ground. Drip irrigation delivers water at low pressure through buried mains and submains. From the submains, water is distributed to the soil through a network of perforated tubes or emitters. Drip irrigation is a high-efficiency type of microirrigation. Evapotranspiration is the loss of water by evaporation from the soil and by transpiration from plants. It is expressed in millimeters per unit of time. Graywater is defined by the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) in its Appendix G, Gray Water Systems for Single-Family Dwellings, as "untreated household wastewater which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Greywater includes used water from bathtubs, showers, bathroom wash basins, and water from clothes-washer and laundrytubs. It must not include waste water from kitchen sinks or dishwashers." The International Plumbing Code (I PC) defines graywater in its Appendix C, Gray 42 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281581 Water Recycling Systems, as "waste water discharged from lavatories, bathtubs, showers, clothes washers and laundry sinks." Some states and local authorities allow kitchen sink wastewater to be included in graywater. Other differences with the UPC and IPC definitions can likely be found in state and local codes. Project teams should comply with graywater definitions as established by the authority havingjurisdiction in the project area. The landscape area is the total site area less the building footprint, paved surfaces, water bodies, and patios. Potable water meets or exceeds the EPA's drinking water quality standards and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems. Xeriscaping is a landscaping method that makes routine irrigation unnecessary. It uses drought- adaptable and low-water plants as well as soil amendments such as compost and mulches to reduce evaporation. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 43 EFTA00281582 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 OPTION 2, PATH 9: INNOVATIVE WASTEWATER TECHNOLOGIES 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Water closets and urinals do not require the same high level of water quality that is necessary for fixtures such as faucets and showerheads. Reducing the amount of water needed for the potable water supply reduces the total amount withdrawn from natural water bodies. Similarly, reducing or eliminating the volume of sewage that leaves the site reduces public infrastructure, chemical inputs, energy use, and emissions at municipal water treatment works. Water efficiency and reuse can greatly reduce these environmental impacts, and project teams should consider comparing the environmental impacts of off-site treatment and supply versus on-site treatment. On-sitewastewater treatment systems transform perceived "wastes" into resources that can be used on the building site and provide opportunities to enhance occupants' understanding of nutrient cycles. These resources include treated water volumes for potable and nonpotable use, as well as nutrients that can be applied to the site to improve soil conditions. Economic Issues Facilities and spaces that generate large amounts of wastewater can realize considerable savings by reducing the amount of potable water needed for sewage conveyance. High-efficiency toilets and urinals may have a minimal cost premium depending on the building type, but other strategies, such as recycling graywater or rainwater harvesting, require added initial investment by the building developer and may be reflected in the lease rates for these properties. Choosing space in a building with high-efficiency plumbing systems, or incorporating them into tenant spaces where applicable, can reduce water utility costs for the tenant. 2. Related Credits Efforts to reduce potable water for sewage conveyance can contribute to achieving the following credits: ■ SS Credit t Option B, Path to: Water Use Reduction-30% ■ WE Prerequisite t: Water Use Reduction ■ WE Credit 1: Water Use Reduction Water treatment systems, if included in the tenant scope of work, require commissioning and are related to the following credits: ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit z: Enhanced Commissioning 3. Summary of Referenced Standards U.S. Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of199z (and as amended) This act addresses energy and water use in commercial, institutional, and residential facilities. U.S. Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 2005 This statute became U.S. law in August zoos. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Uniform Plumbing Code, Section 402.0: Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings, effective zoo6 Publication IAPMO/ANSI UPC 1-2006 http:thvww.iapmaorg The Uniform Plumbing Code defines water-conserving fixtures and fittings for water closets, 44 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281583 urinals, and metered faucets. This code, accredited by the American National Standards Institute, safeguards life, health, property, and public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, construction, installation, quality, location, operation, maintenance, and use of plumbing systems. International Code System, International Plumbing Code, Section 604, Design of Building Water Distribution System, effective we:16 International Code Council http://wmv.iccsafe.org The International Plumbing Code defines maximum flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures and fittings for use in public and private lavatories, showerheads, sink faucets, urinals, and water closets. 4. Implementation Choose abasebuilding with wastewatertechnologiesthat are designedto reduce the use ofmunicipal potable water. Either the municipal potable water used for sewage conveyance should be reduced by 50%, or 100% of the on-site wastewater should treated to tertiary standards. Include one of these requirements in the criteria for selecting a base building. Potable water is used for many functions that do not require high-quality water, such as toilet and urinal flushing and landscape irrigation. Effective methods for reducing potable water use for sewage conveyance include installation of low-consumption flush fixtures, such as high-efficiency water closets and urinals, nonwater urinals and toilet fixtures, and the harvesting of rainwater or reuse of graywater. Graywater systems collect the wastewater from sinks, showers, and other sources to reuse for flushing of toilets and urinals, to irrigate landscape, and to serve other functions that do not require potable water. Graywater treatment may be required prior to reuse depending on the intended end use and the local codes. If it is likely that a graywater system will be used in the future, install dual plumbing lines during the initial project construction to avoid the substantial costs and difficulty of adding them later. When reusing graywater volumes from the building, model the system on an annual basis to determine graywater volumes, generated storage capacity of the system, and any necessary treatment processes before reusing the water volumes. Graywater may not be consistently available throughout the year, depending on building occupants' activities. For instance, graywater volumes in typical office buildings will change only slightly with vacation schedules and holidays, but the volume in a school building will fall during the summer recess, and sufficient water may not be available for irrigation. When considering an on-site rainwater, graywater, or blacicwater collection system, first check with local government agencies for regulations and required permits. Each state has its own standards and requirements for the installation and operation of rainwater, graywater, and water treatment systems. Texas and California, for example, have standards that encourage the use of graywater systems, whereas other states have regulations that may limit or prohibit using graywater. In many areas, irrigation with graywater must be subsurface, although some regions allow aboveground irrigation. Projects that plan to treat wastewater on-site should consider constructed wetlands, mechanical recirculating sand filters, and anaerobic biological treatment reactors. The quality of rainwater is typically higher than that of collected graywater, so rainwater systems have significantly fewer code requirements and are often less expensive than graywater systems. Stormwater retention systems can be designedwith cisterns to hold rainwater runoff for nonpotable use. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 45 EFTA00281584 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 Local climate and weather pattems should be factored into determining the feasibilityof harvesting rainwater to reduce potable water for plumbing fixture flushing and landscape irrigation. When precipitation is evenly spread out throughout the year, rainwater harvesting systems may not require large storage capacities. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make innovative wastewater systems a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations The following calculations are based on the annual generation ofblacicwater volumes from plumbing fixtures such as water closets and urinals. The calculations compare the design case with a baseline case and are based on occupancy conditions and fixtures and fittings for the entire building in which the tenant space is located. User Groups It may be advantageous when performing the water use calculations to divide the facility into separate user groups, calculate water use for each, and sum the values to determine whole building performance. Usergroups are populationswithin the building that use a specific subset ofwashroom facilities. Indicate which fixtures are available to each. If all occupants within the building have access to all fixtures, or if all fixtures are standard throughout the building, enter only a single user group. That is the simpler approach, but it may be more appropriate to define two or more groups to account for different fixtures in one area of the building or special usage patterns by a population within the building. For example, if fixture usage patterns are different on the first floor, enter a separate fixture group for the first floor. The following scenario illustrates the application of different fixture usage groups. The Riggs Hotel is in an urban center. The ground floor includes a restaurant open to the public, the hotel lobby, and administrative offices. The upper floors contain guest rooms. Restaurant, back- of-house, and guestroom restroom facilities have different fixture and fitting models. The project team has identified 3 distinct populations in the building and the specific restroom facilities they use: (t) restaurant (including customers and restaurant staff), (2) administrative back-of-house (including hotel administrators and operations staff), and (3) guest rooms (including hotel guests). Calculating Occupancy Calculate the FTE for regular building occupants, based on a standard 40-hour weekly occupancy period. An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of 1.0, and part-time and overtime occupants have an FTE value based on their hours per day divided by 8 (FTE calculations for each shift of the project must be used consistently for all LEED credits). In buildings with multiple shifts, use the number of FTEs from all shifts. For residential projects, use the number of residents. Estimate the transient building occupants, such as students, visitors, and customers. Transient occupants can be reported as either a daily total or a full-time equivalent. When using daily totals for transients, match the fixture uses for each occupancy type with the values shown in Table 3 (e.g., for the daily total of students, assume 0.5 lavatory faucet uses per daily student visitor). If transients are reported as a daily full-time equivalent value, fixture uses for FTEs must be assumed regardless of the transient population's identity (e.g., for students reported as FTEs, assume 3 lavatory faucet uses per student FTE). Use a transient occupancy number that is a representative daily average over the course of a year. 46 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281585 If occupancy is not known, see Appendix 1, Default Occupancy Counts, for requirements and guidance. If the number of transient visitors per day for retail facilities is unknown, estimate the FTE value of this population based on the default values presented in Table 2. Table t provides default fixture usevalues for different occupancytypes. These values should be used inthecalculations forthis credit unless specialcircumstanceswarrant modifications. Mostbuildings with students, visitors, and retail customers will also have FTE occupants. Half of all students and visitors occupants are assumed to use a flush fixture and a lavatory faucet in the building and are not expected to use a shower or kitchen sink. A fifth of retail customers are assumed to use a flush and a flow fixture in the building and no shower or kitchen sink. The default for residential occupants is s uses per day ofwater closet and lavatory faucet, 1 shower, and 4 kitchen sink uses. For consistency across LEED projects, the calculations require the use of a balanced, 1-to-1 gender ratio unless specific project conditions warrant an alternative. For these special situations, provide a narrative description to explain the unique circumstances. Table 1. Standard Fixture Uses, by Occupancy Type Fixture Type FTE StudentNisitor Retail Customer Resident Uses/Day Water Closet — Female 3 0.5 0.2 5 —Male 1 0.1 0.1 5 Urinal — Female o 0 0 Ma — Male 2 0.4 0.1 Ma Lavatory Faucet — duration 15 sec: 12 sec with autccontrol — residential, duration 60 sec 3 0.5 0.2 5 Shower — duration 300 sec — residential, duration 480 sec 0.1 0 0 Kitchen Sink, — duration 15 sec — residential, duration 60 sec 1 Na 0 n/a 0 Na ma 4 Table 2. Default Values for Transient Retail Occupants Retail space FTE per 100 Id) Large-format retailer (greater than 50,000 square feet) 0.91 Grocery store 0.87 Restaurant 1.05 Small retailer 0.67 Service 0.77 Sources: 2001 Unifami Building Code. 2004-2005 Database for Enerp Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update Study: field investiptionamk performed by LEED Retail Cae Committee Members: ASNUPSIIRAEBESPUt 90.1-2007: LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction. 2009 Eotion. Design Case The design case annual water use is determined by totaling the annual volume of each fixture type and subtracting any nonpotable water supply. The design case must use the rated flow rates and flush volumes for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings. Obtain water consumption data from manufacturers' published product literature. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 47 EFTA00281586 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 Perform calculations for each type of blackwater-generating fixture (Table 3). Table 3. Sample B lac kwater-Generati ng Fixtures and Fittings and Water Consumption Rush Ihture Flow Se (gpf) Conventional water closet 1.6 High-efficiency toilet (HET). single-flush gravity 1.28 HET, single-flush pressure assist 1.0 HET, dual flush (full-flush) 1.6 HET, dual flush (low-flush) 1.1 HET, foam flush 0.05 Non-water toilet 0.0 Conventional urinal 1.0 High-efficiency urinal (HEU) 0.5 Nonwater urinal 0.0 If rainwater or graywater harvested on-site is used for sewage conveyance, enter the estimated quantity in the calculation. Subtract the total annual quantity of nonpotable water from the total annual design case water usage. Calculations are required to demonstrate that the reuse volumes of rainwater or graywater are sufficient to meet water closet demands. Baseline Case The baseline case annual water use is determined by setting the fixture flush rates and flow rates to default values (as opposed to actual installed values in the design case). Eligible Fixtures This credit is limited to savings generated by water using flush fixtures (i.e., urinals and water closets). 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Determine the number of occupants of each type (e.g., FTEs, retail customers, visitors). ■ Retain plumbing fixture schedules and manufacturer data showing the water consumption rates, manufacturer, and model of each fixture and fitting. ■ List plumbing fixtures by usage groups, if appliable. ■ Define each usage group used. ■ If applicable, retain information about system schematics and capacity of rainwater or graywater systems. 8. Examples EXAMPLE 1. Wastewater Treatment System On-site biological treatment transforms waste into resources that can be used on the building site. Figure 1 shows the steps for on-site treatment. As solids settle in the aerobic septic tank, microbes begin to feed and break down the waste. The closed aerobic reactor is aerated by pumps to help remove aromatic compounds. The open aerobic reactors contain plants, algae, snails, and fish that further break down the organic waste. In the constructed wetland, aerobic 48 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281587 and anaerobic reactions remove the remaining impurities and nitrates. This creates clean, nonpotable water that can be used in irrigation systems, water closets, or cooling towers. Figure I. On-site Biological Treatment of Wastewater Closed Aerobic Reactor Waste in from the building Anaerobic Septic Tank Clean effluent out Constructed Wetland EXAMPLE 2. Calculating Design and Baseline Cases Table 4 shows sample potable water calculations for sewage conveyance for a 2-story office building with 300 occupants. The calculations are based on a typical 8-hour workday. It is assumed that building occupants are so% male and 5096female. Male occupants are assumed to use water closets once and urinals twice in a typical workday. Female occupants are assumed to use water closets 3 times. Table 4. Design Case Fixture Type Daily Uses Flowrate (gpf) Occupants Sewage Generation (gal) Low-Flow Water Closet (Male) 0 1.1 150 0 Low-Flow Water Closet (Female) 3 1.1 150 495 Composting Toilet (Male) 1 0.0 150 0 Composting Toilet (Female) 0 0.0 150 0 Waterless Urinal (Male) 2 0.0 150 0 Waterless Urinal (Female) 0 0.0 150 0 Total Daily Volume (gal) 495 Annual Work Days 260 Annual Volume (gal) 128,700 Rainwater or Graywater Reuse Volume (gal> (36,000) Total Annual Volume (gal> 92,70D First, the design case is considered to determine annual potable water usage for sewage conveyance. The building uses either nonpotable rainwater for sewage conveyance or no water SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 49 EFTA00281588 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 for sewage conveyance (i.e., fixtures are waterless urinals and composting toilets). Table 4 summarizes the sewage generation rates; 92,700 gallons of potable water are used annually for sewage conveyance. In the example, 36,000 gallons of rainwater are harvested and directed to water closets for flushing. Table 5. Baseline Case Flatus Type Daily Uses Flowrate (60) 0ccuParlts Sewage Generation teen Water Closet (Male) 1 1.6 150 240 Water Closet (Female) 3 1.6 150 720 Urinal (Male) 2 1.0 150 300 Urinal (Female) 0 1.0 150 0 Total Daily Volume (gal) 1.260 Annual Work Days 260 Total Annual Volume (gal) 327.600 Table 5 summarizes baseline calculations. The baseline case estimates that sewage conveyance requires 327,600 gallons of potable water per year. Comparison of the baseline with the design case indicates that the building realizes a 72% reduction in potable water volumes used for sewage conveyance (1 - 92,700/327,600). Thus, this strategy earns 2 points under this credit. When developing the baseline, only the fixtures, sewage generation rates, and the water reuse credit are different from the design case; usage rates, occupancy, and number of workdays remain the same. 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations The necessity and availability of wastewater reuse and treatment strategies vary by region. Where aquifers cannot meet the needs of the population, rainwater and other recovered water is the least expensive alternative source. In drought-prone regions, on-site graywater and blackwater treatment may provide an alternative to using potable water for faucets and showers. Local and regional building and health codes and ordinances govern on-site water treatment and the use ofharvested rainwater and graywater;these strategies are prohibited in some states.Additionally, codes differ in their handling of alternative plumbing fixtures, such as dual-flush or low-flow water closets, composting toilets, and waterless urinals. Confirm the legality of nontraditional approaches with code officials prior to making a commitment to specific water-saving strategies. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations To ensure continued water savings as well as owner and occupant satisfaction, maintenance staff must be trained in the operations and maintenance of any specialized equipment. For example, waterless urinals generally need to be cleaned according to manufacturers' specifications and their chemical traps appropriately maintained, and 0.5-gallon and O.2-gallon flushing urinals must also be maintained according to manufacturers' specifications. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 50 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281589 Websites American Rainwater Catchment Systems Association http://wv.arcsa-usa.org This website includes an riety of publications such as the Texas Guide to Rainwater Harvesting. Choosing a Toilet This article in Fine Homebuilding describes several types ofwater-efficient toilets. Environmental Building News, Water: Doing More with Less This article describes building water efficiency. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, National Climatic Data Center http://wcvw.ncdc.noaa.govfoaincdc.html This site is useful for researching local climate data such as rainfall amounts. It also includes links to state climate offices. Rocky Mountain Institute (RMI), Water http://www.rmi.orgisitepagesjpidu.8.Op This portion of RMI's website is devoted to water conservation and efficiency. The site contains information on commercial, industrial, and institutional water use, watershed management, and articles on policy and implementation. Terry Love's Consumer Toilet Reports This website offers a plumber's perspective on many of the major toilets used in commercial and residential applications. U.S. EPA, Constructed Wetlands for Wastewater Treatment and Wildlife Habitat 17 Case Studies,1993 http://wmv.emgov/owowiwetlands/construc The case studies in this document, Publication 832/8.93-005, describe 17 wetland treatment systems that improve water quality and wildlife habitat. The projects described include systems with constructed and natural wetlands; created and restored habitats; and municipal effluent, urban stormwater, and river water quality improvements. U.S. EPA, How to Conserve Water and Use It Effectively http://+nnvtv.epa.gov/owow/NPS/chaP3.html This website provides guidance for commercial, industrial, and residential water-users on saving water and reducing sewage volumes. U.S. EPA, On-Site Wastewater Treatment Systems Manual http://wwwepa.gov/OW-OWM.htmlisepticipubsiseptic_management_handbook.pdf This manual provides a focused, performance-based approach to on-site wastewater treatment and system management, including information on a variety of on-site sewage treatment options. U.S. EPA, WaterSense http://www.epafs_oviwatersense The WaterSense Program is intended to make it easyforU.S. consumers to savewater and protectthe environment Look for the WaterSense label to help choose high-quality,water-efficient products. A variety of products is available, and they do not require a change in lifestyle. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 51 EFTA00281590 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 Water Closet Performance Testing This site provides 2 reports of independent test results on flush performance and reliability for a variety of toilets. Print Media Constntcted Wetlandsfor WastewaterTnahnent and Wildlre Habitat: 17 Case Studies (EPA 832/8-93-005) (U.S. EPA, 1993). Mechanical & Electrical Equipment far Buildings, eighth edition, by Benjamin Stein and John Reynolds (John Wiley and Sons,1992). Sustainable Building Technical Manual (Public Technology, Inc., t996). On-Site WastewaterTreatment Systems Manual (U.S. EPA,2002). http://ww.epa.goviowmisepticfpubsiseptic_2002_osdm_all.Of This manual provides a focused and performance-based approach to on-site wastewater treatment and system management. The document provides valuable information on various on-site sewage treatment options. 13. Definitions Aquatic systems are ecologically designed treatment systems in which a diverse community of biological organisms (e.g., bacteria, plants, fish) treat wastewater. An aquifer is an underground water-bearing rock formation that supplies groundwater, wells, and springs. Blackwater definitions vary, but wastewater from toilets and urinals is always considered blackwater. Wastewater from kitchen sinks (perhaps differentiated by the use of a garbage disposal), showers, or bathtubs is considered blackwater under some state or local codes. Composting toilet systems utilize foam flush or nonwater toilet fixtures to treat human waste via biological processes, producing biologically stable end products. Graywater is defined by the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) in its Appendix G, Gray Water Systems for Single-Family Dwellings, as "untreated household wastewater which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Greywater includes used water from bathtubs, showers, bathroom wash basins, and water from clothes-washer and laundrytubs. It must not include waste water from kitchen sinks or dishwashers." The International Plumbing Code (I PC) defines graywater in its Appendix C, Gray Water Recycling Systems, as "waste water discharged from lavatories, bathtubs, showers, clothes washers and laundry sinks." Some states and local authorities allow kitchen sink wastewater to be included in graywater. Other differences with the UPC and IPC definitions can likely be found in state and local codes. Project teams should comply with graywater definitions as established by the authority having jurisdiction in the project area. Nonpotable water. See potable water. On-site wastewater treatment systems transport, store, treat, and dispose of wastewater volumes generated on the project site. Potable Water is water that is suitable for drinking and is supplied from wells or municipal water systems. Potable Water is water that meets drinking water quality standards and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities havingjurisdiction. Process water is used for industrial processes and building systems such as cooling towers, boilers, and chillers. It can also refer to water used in operational processes, such as dishwashing, clothes washing, and ice making. 52 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281591 Tertiary treatment is the highest form of wastewater treatment and includes removal of organics, solids, and nutrients as well as biological or chemical polishing, generally to effluent limits of io mg/L biological oxygen demand (BOD) 5, and m mg/L total suspended solids (TSS). Wastewater is the spent or used water from a home, community, farm, or industry that contains dissolved or suspended matter. (Federal Remediation Technologies Roundtable) Waterless urinals are dry plumbing fixtures that use advanced hydraulic design and a buoyant fluid to maintain sanitary conditions. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 53 EFTA00281592 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 OPTION 2, PATH 10: WATER USE REDUCTION-30% REDUCTION 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Refer to the Benefits and Issues section of WE Credit Water Use Reduction. Option z, Path to of SS Credit t differs from WE Credit tin that it applies to whole buildings, rather than to occupant spaces within buildings. 2. Related Credits For information on related credits, refer to the Related Credits section in WE Credit t. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards The Energy PolicyAct (EPAct) of1992 (and as amended) This act addresses energy and water use in commercial, institutional, and residential facilities. The Energy PolicyAct (EPAct) of 2005 This statute became U.S. law in August zoos. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, Uniform Plumbing Code, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings, effective 2006 Publication IAPMOJANSI UPC 1-2006 http:fiwww.iapmo.org The Uniform Plumbing Code defines water-conserving fixtures and fittings for water closets, urinals, and metered faucets. This ANSI-accredited code safeguards life, health, property, and public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, construction, installation, quality, location, operation, maintenance, and use of plumbing systems. International Code Council, International Plumbing Code, Section 604, Design of Building Water Distribution System, effective 2006 http://wwwiccsafe.org The International Plumbing Code defines maximum flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures and fittings for use in public and private lavatories, sink faucets, urinals, and water closets. 4. Implementation Choose a base building that is equipped with water-conserving plumbing fixtures for the entire building. The building owner is required to demonstrate that these fixtures use 30% less water compared with the baseline fixture performance, and must also have an ongoing plan to require future occupants to comply. This path applies to LEED projects that use so% or less of the building's total square footage; this requirement prevents large projects that occupy the majority of the building from getting double credit here and under WE Credit I. See WE Prerequisite 1 for more information. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make water-conserving fixtures and fittings a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. See WE Prerequiste t for more information. 6. Calculations The following section describes the calculation methodology for determining water use savings under this credit. The water use reduction for the project is the difference between the calculated design case and a baseline case. The percentage is determined by dividing the design case usage 54 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281593 by the baseline usage. The methodology differs from traditional plumbing design, in which the calculations are based on fixture counts; under this credit, the water use calculation is based on fixture and fitting water consumption rates and estimated usage by the occupants. Estimated occupant usage is determined by calculating full-time equivalent (FTE) and transient occupants and applying appropriate fixture use rates to each occupant type. For this credit, occupancy is based on the entire facility, not just the tenant space occupied by the LEED project. User Groups It may be advantageous when performing the water use calculations to divide the facility into separate user groups, calculate water use for each, and sum the values to determine whole building performance. Usergroups are populationswithin the building that use a specific subset ofwashroom facilities. Indicate which fixtures are available to each. If all occupants within the building have access to all fixtures, or if all fixtures are standard throughout the building, enter only a single user group. That is the simpler approach, but it may be more appropriate to define two or more groups to account for different fixtures in one area of the building or special usage patterns by a population within the building. For example, if fixture usage patterns are different on the first floor, enter a separate fixture group for the first floor. Calculating Occupancy Calculate the FTE for regular building occupants, based on a standard 40-hour weekly occupancy period. An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of 1.0, and part-time and overtime occupants have an FTE value based on their hours per day divided by 8 (FTE calculations for each shift of the project must be used consistently for all LEED credits). In buildings with multiple shifts, use the number of FTEs from all shifts. For residential projects, the number of residents is the occupancy number. Estimate the transient building occupants, such as students, visitors, and customers. Transient occupants can be reported as either a daily total or a full-time equivalent. When using daily totals for transients, match the fixture uses for each occupancy type with the values shown in Table 3 (e.g., for the daily total of students,assume 0.5 lavatory faucet uses per daily student visitor). If transients are reported as a daily full-time equivalent value, fixture uses for FTEs must be assumed regardless of the transient population's identity (e.g., for students reported as FTEs, assume 3 lavatory faucet uses per student FTE). Use a transient occupancy number that is a representative daily average over the course of a year. If occupancy is not known, see Appendix 1, Default Occupancy Counts, for requirements and guidance. If the number of transient visitors per day for retail facilities is unknown, estimate the FTE value of this population based on the default values presented in Tablet. Tablet provides default fixture usevalues fordifferent occupancytypes. These values should be used in the calculations for this credit unless special circumstanceswarrant modification. Most buildings with students, visitors, and retail customers will also have FTE occupants. Half of all students and visitors are assumed to use a water closet or urinal and a lavatory faucet in the building and are not expected to use a shower or kitchen sink. A fifth of retail customer occupants are assumed to use a water closet or urinal and lavatory faucet in the building and no shower or kitchen sink. The default for residential occupants is 5 uses per day of water closet and lavatory faucet, t shower,and 4 kitchen sink uses. For consistency across LEED projects, the calculations require the use of a balanced, 1-to-1 gender ratio unless specific project conditions warrant an alternative. For these special situations, provide a narrative description to explain the unique circumstances. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 55 EFTA00281594 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 Table 1. Default Values for Transient Retail Occupants Retail space FTE per 100 (sf) Large-format retailer (greater than 50.000 square feet) 0.91 Grocery store 0.87 Restaurant 1.05 Small retailer 0.67 Service 0.77 Sources: 2001 Uniform Building Code. 2004-2005 Database for Enemy Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update Study: feat investigation *AA performed b LEED Retail Core Committee Members: ASNUPSIIRADIESNA 90.1-2007; LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction. 2009 Edition. Table 2. Standard Fixture Uses, by Occupancy Type Ftchre type FTE StudentNisitor Retail Customer Resident Us shay Water Closet — Female 3 0.5 0.2 5 —Male 1 0.1 0.1 5 Urinal — Female 0 0 0 We — Male 2 0.4 0.1 n/a Lavatory Faucet — duration 15 sec; 12 sec with autccontrol — residential, duration 60 sec 0.5 0.2 5 Shower - duration 300 sec — residential, duration 480 sec 0.1 0 0 1 Kitchen Sink, — duration 15 sec — residential, duration 60 sec 1 Na 0 n/a 0 Na n/a 4 Design Case Water Consumption Calculations The design case annual water use is determined by totaling the annual volume of each fixture type and subtracting any nonpotable water supply. The design case must use the rated flow rates and flush volumes for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings. Obtain water consumption data should be obtained from manufacturers' published product literature. Table 3 shows examples of typical water consumption rates for different fixture and fitting technologies. If rainwater or graywater harvested on-site is used for sewage conveyance, enter the estimated quantity in the calculation. Subtract the total annual quantity of nonpotable water from the total annual design case water usage. Calculations are required to demonstrate that the reuse volumes of rainwater or graywater are sufficient to meet water closet demands. 56 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281595 Table 3. Sample Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings and Water Consumption Flush Mire Flow rate (get) Flow flatus Flow rate Conventional water closet 1.6 Conventional private lavatory 2.2 gpm High-efficiency toilet (HET). single-flush gravity 1.28 Conventional public lavatory 0.5 gpm or s 0.25 gpc HET, single-flush pressure assist 1.0 Conventional kitchen sink 2.2 gpm HET, dual flush (full-flush) 1.6 Low-flow kitchen sink 1.8 gpm HET, dual flush (low-flush) 1.1 Conventional shower 2.5 gpm HET, foam flush 0.05 Low-flow shower 1.8 gpm Nonwater toilet 0.0 Conventional urinal 1.0 High-efficiency urinal (HEU) 0.5 Nonwater urinal 0.0 Facilities in residences and apartments, private bathrooms in hotels and hospitals, and restrooms in commercial establishments where the fixtures are intended for the use of a family or an individual are considered private orprivate-use facilities.All other facilities are considered public or public use. If the classification for public or private use is unclear, default to public-use flow rates in performing the calculations associated with this credit. Baseline Case Water Consumption Calculations Thebaseline case annualwateruse is determinedbysettingthefucture and fittingwaterconsumption rates to the baseline values (as opposed to actual installed values in the design case). Eligible Fixtures This prerequisite is limited to savings generated bywater-using fixtures as shown in Table 1. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Determine the number of occupants of each type (e.g., FTEs, retail customers, visitors). ■ Retain plumbing fixture schedules and manufacturers' data showing the water consumption rates, manufacturer, and model of each fixture and fitting. ■ List plumbing fixtures by usage group, if appliable. ■ Define each usage group used. ■ Retain information about system schematics and capacity of any rainwater or graywater systems. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an exemplary performance credit under SS Credit t, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, by demonstrating a 40%water use reduction for the whole building. 10. Regional Variations Refer to the Regional Variations section in WE Prerequisite 1. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 57 EFTA00281596 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations To ensure continued water savings and satisfaction for owners and occupants, maintenance staff should be trained in the operations and maintenance of any specialized equipment. For example, waterless urinals generally need to be cleaned according to manufacturers' specifications and their chemical traps appropriately maintained, and 0.5-gallon and O.2-gallon flushing urinals, must also be maintained according to manufacturers' specifications. Water saving opportunities through operations and maintenance should include metering and data recording efforts. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools mxiiwww.iictr.orgfrpjaS) for additional resources and technical information. Also refer to the Resources section of WE Prerequisite 1. 13. Definitions Refer to the Definitions section of WE Prerequisite 1. 58 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281597 OPTION 2, PATH 11: ON-SITE RENEWABLE ENERGY 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Energy production contributes significantly to air pollution in the United States, releasing such pollutants as sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxide, and carbon dioxide—primary contributors to acid rain, smog, and climate change—that have widespread and adverse effects on humans, especially respiratory health. The overall environmental benefits of renewable energy depend on the energy source and the process by which energy is generated. For example, utilization of biomass can reduce the estimated 136 million tons of woody waste from construction, demolition, and land-clearing that is sent to landfills annually,i6 but if these wastes are not processed properly, their combustion could result in harmful air quality. Although renewably generated electricity is not entirely benign, it greatly decreases the negative environmental impacts of power generation. Renewable energy generated on-site is an excellent way for owners to reduce the environmental impacts associated with a building's energy requirements. Economic Issues Selecting space in a building that uses on-site renewable energy technologies can result in energy cost savings. Utility rebates are often available to reduce initial costs of renewable energyequipment The initial costs ofinstalling or providing renewable energyon-site can be offset bysavings on energy costs accrued over a period of time. A life-cycle cost analysis of the potential savings that could accrue over the life-cycle of the renewable energy source can help project teams in their decision- making process. In some states, first costs can also be offset by net metering, in which excess energy is sold back to the utility, and through programs that provide incentives for using renewable energy. Project teams must ascertain whether these options are available locally, particularly for the type of renewable energy they plan to use. Research on the available technologies is essential; consider climatic, geographical, and other regional factors that influence the appropriateness of an on-site renewable source for the building's energy use. 2. Related Credits Renewable energy equipment installed as a part of the tenant scope will require commissioning and measurement and verification efforts, as described in the following credits: ■ EA Prerequisite is Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit 3: Measurement and Verification 3. Summary of Referenced Standard ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA oo.ilizoo7, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers American National Standards Institute http:fiwww.ashrae.org Illuminating Engineers Society of North America On-site renewable or site-recovered energy that might be used to achieve EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, is handled as a special case in the modelingprocess. Ifeither renewable or recovered energy is produced at the site, the energy cost budget method considers it free energy and it is not included in the design energy cost. See the Calculation section for details. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 59 EFTA00281598 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 4. Implementation Choose a base building that is equipped with an on-site renewable energy system. Demonstrate the technology's contribution to the total energy requirements of the building (expressed as a fraction of annual energy cost). Technologies Eligible technologies within the base building include photovoltaic, solar thermal, geothermal, wind, biomass, and biogas energy. Eligible systems produce either electric power or thermal energy for use on-site and should, where possible, deliver power to the grid when their output exceeds the site demand. Contact local utilities or electric service providers to determine whether net metering is available. Energy savings from the use of on-site renewables should be based on either the metered renewable energy produced and used on-site, or the metered renewable energy produced and used on-site or sent to the grid. Energy produced on-site that is not captured and used, whether on-site or via the grid, cannot be included in the credit calculations. For example, if a project building uses photovoltaic panels to generate electricity on-site but does note store energy when output exceeds demand or use net metering, only the portion of renewable electricity actually consumed on-site counts. Renewable energy produced on-site and then sold to the grid is not eligible. Eligible On-site Systems On-site renewable energy technologies eligible for Option t t include these: ■ Photovoltaic systems. ■ Wind energy systems. ■ Solar thermal systems. ■ Biofuel-based energy systems (see list of eligible biofuels, below). ■ Geothermal energy systems. ■ Low-impact hydroelectric power systems. ■ Wave and tidal power systems. There are some restrictions for geothermal energy systems, solar thermal energy systems, and biofuel-based electrical systems. Geothermal energy systems using deep•earth water or steam sources (but not vapor compression systems for heat transfer) may be eligible for this credit. These systems may either produce electric power or provide thermal energy for primary use at the building. Active solar thermal energy systems that employ collection panels, heat transfer mechanical components such as pumps or fans, and defined heat storage systems such as hot water tanks are eligible for this credit. Thermosiphon solar and storage tank "batch heaters" are also eligible. The following biofuels are considered renewable energy under this credit: ■ Untreated wood waste, including mill residues. ■ Agricultural crops or waste. ■ Animal waste and other organic waste. ■ Landfill gas. 60 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281599 Ineligible On-site Systems These types of on-site systems are not eligible for this credit: ■ Architectural features. ■ Passive solar strategies. ■ Daylighting strategies. ■ Geo-exchange systems (e.g.,geothermal or ground-source heat pumps). Architectural passive solar and daylighting strategies provide significant energy savings. Their contributions are reflected in project-wide energy efficiency levels and facilitate the achievement of EA Prerequisite 2 and EA Credit t. Geo-exchange systems are earth-coupled heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) applications that use vapor-compression systems for heat transfer and do not obtain significant quantities of deep-earth heat. They are not eligible as renewable energy systems. The contributions of these systems are reflected in project-wide energy efficiency levels and facilitate the achievement of EA Prerequisite 2 and EA Credit t. Energy production based on the following biofuels is not eligible for this credit: ■ Combustion of municipal solid waste. ■ Forestry biomass waste other than mill residue. ■ Wood coated with paints, plastics, or formica ■ Wood treated for preservation with materials containing halogens, chlorine compounds, halide compounds, chromated copper arsenate, or arsenic. If more than 196 of the wood fuel has been treated with these compounds, the energy system is ineligible. Retention of Renewable Energy Environmental Attributes For renewable energy coming from on-site sources, the associated environmental attributes must be retained or retired; they cannot be sold. Project teams should understand and value the positive effect of on-site renewables on the surrounding ecosystems. For on-site renewables, energy that exceeds the project building's demand may be sold at fees equivalent to the market rate of nonrenewable energy, but no premium maybe charged for the renewable nature of the energy. Such a premium indicates that these attributes have not been retained, and therefore the project team cannot take credit for that energy as renewable. To encourage the greater development of on-site renewable energy systems, the sale of renewable energy certificates (RECs) is allowed from an on-site renewable energy system that claims credit if the building owner or energy system owner, either separately or acting together, meets the following conditions: ■ RECs equal to 200% of the system's annual rated energy output each year are purchased from another source, which must be Green-e eligible. The system's rated output must reflect all system performance characteristics as well as actual local site conditions (e.g., climate, mounting location, and angles). The rationale for the 1-for-2 ratio is that many states have set renewable portfolio standards and in-state renewable energy targets that can be traded in the form of credits. These in-state RECs are typically more expensive to achieve and usually cost more (e.g., $0.05/kWh for New England wind power vs. $0.0t/lcVVh for RECs from West Texas or Dakotas wind). From an environmental and financial perspective, these are not the same for 2. reasons: SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 61 EFTA00281600 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 • In-state and out-of-state RECs reduce carbon dioxide emissions by the same amount, but out-of-state RECs result in fewer reductions of other emissions than in-state RECs, where the population is concentrated and where RECs are largely purchased. • Distant renewable energy generation may be stranded by limited technical and design capacities. Given that in-state RECs create more benefits than out-of-state RECs for non-COz impact but are equal in their COz impacts, in-state credits maybe replaced by out-of-state credits on a 1-for-2. basis. This allows green building projects to capture the value of RECs created by on-site renewables while reducing net COL ■ The seller of the on-site RECs must follow all established guidelines for the sale of RECs and not claim any of the environmental attributes for the on-site system. 5. Timeline and Team The project team, with the owner, architect, and engineer, should first estimate the potential energy use of the building so that renewable technologies with adequate capacitycan be identified. Systems producing on-site renewable electrical power should be designed to facilitate net metering back to the grid for periods when the renewable energy system output exceeds the site demand. Ask local utilities and electric service providers about incentive and rebate programs. The project team should make on-site renewable energy generation a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. The LEED- certified buildings database can help identify local buildings that have achieved LEED credit for on-site renewable energy, and local USGBC chapters may also have detailed information on such projects. 6. Calculations Determining On-site Renewable Quantity The quantity of energy generated on-site by renewable systems may be predicted using a bin type calculation or determined through submetering. Projects that use a bin calculation are required to account for the contribution of variables associated with the renewable source. For example, a building-integrated photovoltaic (BIPV) design would include the effects of sunny, partly cloudy, and overcast conditions, the orientation and altitude of the array, and system losses. Tablet shows the factors that affect calculation of the energy generated by a BIPV array. Once the amount of energy generated by the renewable system is calculated, an energy cost must be computed to establish the LEED level of achievement. The renewable energy cost is calculated by multiplying the renewable energy contribution by either the local utility rate or the Energy Information Administration (EM) zoos average energy cost for the renewable fuel type. Multiply the quantity of on-site energy produced by the applicable energy rate for this fuel type. Determining Whole Building Energy Consumption The fraction of energy cost supplied by the renewable energy features is calculated against existing utility data (for buildings in operation at least 1z months), energy costs calculated by the U.S. Department of Energy (EM zoos Commercial Sector Average Energy Costs by State) in conjunction with the Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) database of annual electricity and natural gas usage per square foot, or total energy costs as calculated by a whole building simulation. Calculations based on existing utility data Existing buildings with a utility history may use recent annual utility bills as a basis for the 62 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 LDiTP EFTA00281601 calculating renewable energy contribution. Divide renewable energy cost (renewable energy generated multiplied by utility rate) for a to-month period by the to-month total utility costs for the building. Calculations based on CBECS data Use the Department of Energy's Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey database to determine the estimated electricity use. This database provides electricity intensity factors (kWh/of/yr) for various building types in the United States. To determine the building's annual energy cost, multiply total energy consumption by the average cost for electricity and natural gas (from EM commercial sector rates for the state). Dividing the renewable energy cost by the building annual energy cost yields the percentage renewable energy. Calculations based on energy simulation Projects that complete a whole building simulation in accordance with Option B of EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC, may use the simulated total building energy consumption as a basis for calculating the renewable energy contribution. Table 1. BIPV Renewable Energy Calculation BIPV System Design Number of stories 5 Length of south facade 525 (If) Depth of awning .2 00 Gross area of awning 5,250 Cs° Shading effects 85% Net area of awning 4.463 (sf) PV capacity 5.5 (wiz!) Awning peak capacity 25 (kW) Average daily output 4.03 (kWh)/100 (s0 Average annual output 65,641 (IA) 80 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Determine energy use for the project, demonstrate the portion of that supplied by on-site renewable energy systems, and identify a back-up energy source. ■ Prepare documentation from the project owner verifying the performance of on-site renewable systems, confirming system capacity, and confirming that renewable energy is not double-counted. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an exemplary performance credit under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, by demonstrating that on-site renewable energy accounts for to% or more of the annual building energy cost. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 63 EFTA00281602 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 10. Regional Variations The availability and appropriateness ofa renewable energytechnologyfor abuildingvaries by region. Factors like climate, geography, and location can greatly affect a building's choice of the renewable source. For maximum energy savings, project teams should look for buildings that drawfrom on-site renewable energy sources most efficient for their region, such as solar energy in the southwestern United States, biomass in regions with agricultural land, or wind power in coastal regions. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations There are no operations and maintenance considerations for this credit. 12. Resources Please see the USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpliwww.usgbc.oreprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Wind Energy Association httpWwww.awea.org AWEA is a national trade association representing wind power plant developers, wind turbine manufacturers,utilitycompanies,consultants, insurers,financiers,researchers,andothersinvolved in the wind industry. ENERGY Guide This website includes information on different power types, including green power, and general information on energy efficiency and tools for selecting power providers based on economic, environmental, and other criteria. National Renewable Energy Laboratory, National Center for Photovoltaics httpWwww.nrel.govhicpv This website provides clearinghouse information on all aspects of photovoltaic systems. North Carolina Solar Center, Database of State Incentives for Renewable Energy (DSIRE) http://www.dsireusa.org This database contains all available information on state financial and regulatory incentives (e.g., tax credits, grants, and special utility rates) that are designed to promote the application of renewable energy technologies. DSIRE also offers additional services such as the preparation and printing of reports that detail the incentives state-by-state. U.S. Department of Energy, EERE, Renewable Energy Maps and Data httpWwwwt.eere.energy.govimaps_data The maps and data section of DOE's EEREwebsite provides information on regional distribution of renewable energy sources and technologies in the United States. U.S. Department of Energy, National Renewable Energy Laboratory httpljwww.nrel.gov NREL is a leader in the U.S. Department of Energy's effort to ensure that the nation's energy future is environmentally and economically sustainable. U.S. Department of Energy, Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy http://wwweere.energy.gov The EERE website includes information on all types of renewable energy technologies and energy efficiency. 64 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281603 U.S. EPA, Green Power Partnership http:(/www.epa EPA's Green Power Partnership provides assistance and recognition to organizations that demonstrate environmental leadership by choosing green power. It includes a buyers guide with listings of green power providers by state. Print Media Wind and Solar Power Systems, by Mukund Patel (CRC Press 1999). Wind Energy Comes of Age, by Paul Gipe (John Wiley &Sons 1995). 13. Definitions Biofuel-based energy systems are electrical power systems that nut on renewable fuels derived from organic materials, such as wood by-products and agricultural waste. In LEED, biofuels include untreated wood waste (e.g., mill residues), agricultural crops or waste, animal waste and other organic waste, and landfill gas. Biomass is plant material from trees, grasses, and crops that can be converted to heat energy to produce electricity. The environmental attributes ofgreen power include the emissions reductionbenefits that result from the substitution of renewable energy sources for conventional power sources. Geothermal energy is electricitygenerated by hamessinghot water or steam from within the earth. Geothermal heating systems use pipes to transfer underground heat for heating, cooling, and hot water. These systems retrieve heat from the earth during cool months and return heat in summer months. Photovoltaic (or solar) energy is produced by photovoltaic cells that convert sunlight energy into electricity. Hydro energy is electricity produced from the downhill flow of water from rivers or lakes. Net metering is a metering and billing arrangement that allows on-site generators to send excess electricity flows to the regional power grid. These electricity flows offset a portion of those drawn from the grid. For more information on net metering in individual states, visit the DOE's Green Power Network website at http://www.eere.energy.govigreenpowerInetmetering. On-site renewable energy is derived from renewable sources, including solar, wind, geothermal, low-impact hydro, biomass, and biogas, and is integrated into the building energy use and present within the project site perimeter. Renewable energy comes from sources that are not depleted when used. This includes energy from the sun, wind, and small (low-impact) hydropower. Renewable energy certificates (RECs) are tradable environmental commodities representing proof that a unit of electricity was generated from a renewable energy resource. RECs are sold separately from the electricity itself and thus allow the purchase of green power by a user of conventionally generated electricity. Solar thermal systems collect or absorb sunlight via solar collectors and heat water that is then circulated to the building's hot water tank. The hot water can be used to warm swimming pools or provide domestic hot water for residential and commercial use. Wave and tidal power systems capture energy from waves and the diurnal flux of tidal power, respectively. The captured energy is commonlyused for desalination,water pumping,and electricity generation. Wind energy is electricity generated by wind turbines. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 209 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 65 EFTA00281604 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 12 OPTION 2, PATH 12: OTHER QUANTIFIABLE ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE An "other quantifiable environmental performance" characteristic is any green feature that was implemented according to (t) the requirements of another LEED rating system credit or (2) the exemplary performance criteria of any of the above paths in this credit. A green feature selected from another LEED rating system must be different from those addressed under the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System. 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Path inewards propertiesthatemploythe highest andbestgreenbuildingstrategies—innovations that go beyond those covered in this credit. Path 12 thus accommodates credits from other LEED rating systems not specifically itemized in Paths 1 through it. For example, the exemplary performance criteria under SS Credit 5.1, Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat, in LEED for New Construction awards t innovation point for restoring or protecting a minimum of 75% of the site area (excluding the building footprint) with native or adapted vegetation on previously developed or graded sites. Projects that implement such a program at a LEED-certified building site may apply for this option. Path 12 may also be used when the selected building meets the exemplary performance criteria specified for a requirement of SS Credit 1, Paths 1 through 11; project teams should refer to the information under Exemplary Performance in Paths 1 through t t to determine the performance level needed to achieve an additional point. 2. Related Credits Refer to the Related Credits section in the credit from the other rating system or under Paths t through 11. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards Refer to the standards referenced for the credit from the other rating system or under Paths 1 through 11. 4. Implementation Choose a base building that has achieved an environmental performance characteristic for at least t credit found in another LEED rating system. Innovation in Design credits that are not addressed by existing credits in other LEED rating systems will also be considered. A team can earn 1 point for each credit that offers an additional point, as appropriate, for exemplary performance. Submit a credit information request to confirm the credit selection unless a precedent has been set byanother project certified under LEED for Commercial Interiors. A second way to earn this credit is to achieve exemplary performance for eligible credits in SS Credit 1, Option 2, Paths 1 through is. A maximum oft additional point can be awarded if the specified threshold is achieved. 5. Timeline and Team Refer to the Timeline and Team information under the selected credit. 6. Calculations Refer to the Calculations section under the selected credit. 66 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281605 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Prepare a brief narrative, calculations, or other information that demonstrates the nature of the other environmental benefits delivered. Refer to the Documentation Guidance section under the selected credit. 8. Examples Refer to the Examples section under the selected credit. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects earning SS Credit 1, Path ii, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, through exemplary performance of any of the SS Credit 1 compliance paths are not eligible for additional exemplaryperformance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Refer to the Regional Variations section under the selected credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Refer to the Operations and Maintenance section under the selected credit. 12. Resources Please see the USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 13. Definitions There are no definitions associated with this credit. S S CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 12 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 67 EFTA00281606 68 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281607 DEVELOPMENT DENSITY AND COMMUNITY CONNECTIVITY Credit SS Credit 2 Points 6 points Intent To channel development to urban areas with existing infrastructure, protect greenfields and preserve habitat and natural resources. Requirements OPTION 1. Development Density Select space in a building that is located in an established, walkable community with a minimum density of 6o,000 square feet per acre net. The density calculation is based on a typical two-story downtown development and must include the area of the project being built. OR OPTION 2. Community Connectivity Select space in a building on a site that meets the following criteria: • Is located within itz-mile of a residential area or neighborhood with an average density of to units per acre net • Is within t/z-mile of at least 10 basic services • Has pedestrian access between the building and the services. For mixed-use projects„ no more than t service within the project boundary maybe counted as t of the to basic services, provided it is open to the public. No more than z of the to services required may be anticipated (i.e. at least A must be existing and operational). In addition, the anticipated services must be documented appropriately to demonstrate that they will be operational in the locations indicated within t year of occupation of the applicant project. Examples of basic services include the following: • Bank • Place of Worship • Convenience Grocery • DayCare Center • Cleaners • Fire Station • Beauty Salon • Hardware • Laundry • Library • Medical or Dental Office • Senior Care Facility • Park • Pharmacy • Post Office • Restaurant • School • Supermarket • Theater • Community Center • Fitness Center • Museum Proximity is determined by drawing a itz-mile radius around a main building entrance on a site map and counting the services within that radius. Greenfield developments and projects that do not use existing infrastructure are not eligible. SS CREDIT 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 69 EFTA00281608 CI Credit 2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Consider proximity to transportation and community services. Selecting base buildings located within walking distance of existing or planned basic services reduce transportation impacts, such as air pollution and greenhouse gas emissions. Manycities have edsting buildings that could be rehabilitated, an approach that reducesthe demand for new materials. The potential trade-offs for sites in dense areas include limited open space and factors that may compromise indoor environmental quality, such as contaminated soils,undesirable air quality, or limited daylighting opportunities. Economic Issues Locating a Commercial Interiors project on an infill site helps control urban sprawl and uses existing infrastructure, including roads, utility services, and other amenities that benefit the local economy. If a site is close to mass transit, significant cost reductions maybe achieved by downsizing parking space for building occupants. In addition, making access to basic services walkable may improve the productivity and health of building occupants by reducing the time spent driving and increasing their levels of physical activityDboth of which translate into reduced costs for tenants. The redevelopment of urban areas helps restore, invigorate, and sustain established urban living patterns, creating a more stable and interactive community. 2. Related Credits By selecting buildings located in urban areas, tenants can increase the likelihood of providing building occupants with access to public transportation, thus assisting project teams with earning the following credit: • SS Credit 3.t: Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation The most common approach for achieving this credit is to give preference to sites within an existing urban fabric. Work with local jurisdictions to follow the urban development plan and meet or exceed density goals. When choosing sites based on infrastructure, transportation, and quality of life, explore opportunities for alliances and innovations with neighboring spaces. Look at locations with redevelopment plans that will achieve the required development density by the completion of the project. Choose a building in an area where community revitalization is already underway and the required development density will be met by the time the project is completed. OPTION 1. Development Density To determine the development density, assess the density of the LEED project site, as well as the densities of surrounding developments. Determine the total area of the project site and the total square footage of the building. For projects that are part of a larger property (such as a campus), define the project area (outlined in the LEED project's scope). The project area must be defined consistently throughout LEED documentation. Calculate the densityofthe project site and the density radius usingthe equations below. Overlay the density radius on a site map that includes the project site and surrounding areas, originating from the center of the LEED project site. This is the density boundary. For each property within the density boundary (including the LEED project site and any properties that intersect the 70 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281609 density boundary), create a table with the building square footage and site area of each property. Include all properties except for undeveloped public areas, such as parks and water bodies. Do not include public roads and right-of-way areas. Information on neighboring properties can be obtained from your city or county zoning department. OPTION 2. Community Connectivity Consider both residential and commercial neighbors when determining the community connectivity of a project. Prepare a site map (Figure 0 and draw a tfz-mile radius around the main building entrance. Radii maybe drawn around multiple entrances for projects with multiple buildings or more than 1 main entrance. The combination of the area in these radii would then be considered the project radius. Figure 1.Sample Map for Community Connectivity mv 8 me,cane 14airci eat laWc Clia.f., °nate:Ian Sd Cravat Mace el Wail* P. Gal Paschool. Choy Coe Fordo 1.1630x INK*? ma Hacivao.naavas $C a , Da mecica Cfric.Meead O O O 8 lo.rcles OokiWadol)(6.1)•aol Saio, Pat Pak O AtioteiL PhamogY Pwo Cane. Iteavaant ID Sanclo,a flancolay. SSW ID Lonna° Crocay kpanaael :: Ref.:bold Mas pe, Afloat ma* Mark all residential developments within the radius. For the project to earn this credit, a residential area with a minimum density of to units per acre must be present within the radius. Mark all commercial buildings within the radius. At least to basic services must be present within the radius for the project to earn this credit. Services other than those listed in the credit requirements will be considered on a project-by-project basis. Listeach ofthe identified services,the business name. and the servicetypeto confirmcompliance. Tablet illustrates an example. SS CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 71 EFTA00281610 SS CI Credit 2 Table 1. Sample Community Connectivity Tabulation Service Identification (Corresponds to uploaded Vicinity Ran) Business Name Seneca lype 1 Restaurant 1 Restaurant 2 Grocery 1 Convenience Grocery 3 Urgent Care 1 Medical 4 Pharmacy 1 Pharmacy 5 Gym 1 Fitness 6 Hair Care 1 Beauty 7 Bank 1 Bank 8 Restaurant 2 Restaurant 9 Cleaners 1 Cleaners 10 Post Office 1 Pest Office With the exception of restaurants, no service may be counted more than once in the calculation. Up to a restaurants maybe counted toward achievement of this credit. Count only those services for that can be accessed by pedestrians from the project; that is, pedestrians must be able to walk to the services without being blocked bywalls, highways, or other barriers. The project building itself cannot be considered t of the to basic services; however, in a mixed- use building, a maximum oft service within the building may be counted as s of the to. A service in a mixed-use project must be open to the public. Up to 2 services that are anticipated to be built in the near future can count toward this credit; at least 8 services must be existing and operational. Any anticipated services must be documented by lease agreements or other appropriate documentation (e.g., a letter from the owner or other appropriate party) to demonstrate that theywill be operational in the locations indicated within a year of occupation of the project building. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make development density or community connectivity a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations OPTION 1. Development Density To determine the development density ofa project, both the project densityand the densities of surrounding developments must be considered. The calculations detailed below refer to the base building in which the LEED for Commercial Interiors project is located, the base building site area, and the buildings surrounding the base building. The density calculation process is described in the following steps: STEP 1 Determine the total area of the project site and the total square footage of the building. For projects that are part of a larger property (such as a campus), define the project area as the area that is defined in the project's scope. The project area must be defined consistently throughout LEED documentation. 72 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281611 STEP 2 Calculate the development density for the project by dividing the total square footage of the building by the total site area in acres. This development density must be 60,00o square feet or more per acre (Equation 1). Equation 1 (s0 Building Square Footage (s1) Development Density (acre) Site Area (acres) STEP 3 Convert the total site area from acres to square feet and calculate the square root of this number. Then multiply the square root by 3 to determine the appropriate density radius (Equation a). The square root function is used to normalize the calculation by removing effects of site shape. Equation 2 Density Radius III) = 3 X I {Site Area (acres) X 43,560 (sf/acre) STEP 4 Calculate the average property density within the density boundary by adding up the square footage values and site areas of each property and dividing the total square footage by the total site area. The average property density of the properties within the density boundary must be 60,000 square feet or more per acre. If this requirement is met, LEED for New Construction and LEED for Core & Shell projects earn 5 points under this credit LEED for Schools projects earn 4 points. Equation 3 Average Property Density within Density Boundary E Square Footage E Site Area OPTION 2. Community Connectivity There are no calculations required for this option. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • For development density, develop a project site vicinity plan that includes the development density radius. • For community connectivity, develop a project site vicinity plan that indicates the half-mile radius and the locations of qualifying services and residential areas; list the services and identify tliem by type. SS CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 73 EFTA00281612 SS CI Credit 2 8. Examples Development Density A 30,000-square-foot office building is located on a 0.44-acre urban site. The building density, calculated by dividing the square footage of the building space by the site area in acres, is 68,t82 square feet per acre (Table 2). the density thus exceeds the 60,000 square feetminimum required by the credit. Table 2. Building Density Calculations Project Buildings Building Space fat Site Area (acres) Project 30000 0.44 Density (sf/acre) a 68.182 Next, the density radius is calculated to be 415 feet using the following equation. Equation 2 Density Radius (In= 3 X i [0.44 (acres) X 43.560 (silence) = 415 PO The density radius of 415 feet is applied to an area plan of the project site and surrounding area. The plan identifies all properties that are within or are intersected by the density radius. The plan includes a scale and a north indicator (Figure 2). Figure 1. An illustration of a Sample Area Plan M " __IT II `frig scale: north rn L! ew ed Pal dino Consulting LI.C. 74 LLLU /i LI LHLNLL UUIUL I UH (.11(LLN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281613 For each property located within the density radius, list the building space and site area (Table 3). These values are summed and the average density is calculated by dividing the total building square footage by the total site area. Table 3. Sample Area Properties Properties within Density Radius Building Space (se Site Area (acres) Properties within Density Radius Building Space (sf) Site Area (acres) Project Site 30.000 0.44 M 24.080 0.64 A 33,425 0.39 N 28,740 0.3 B 87,500 1.58 0 6,690 0.15 C 6,350 0.26 P 39,000 0.39 D 27,560 0.32 0 348,820 2.54 E 66,440 1.17 R 91,250 1.85 F 14,420 1.36 S 22,425 0.27 G 12,560 0.2 T 33,650 0.51 H 6,240 0.14 U 42,400 0.52 I 14,330 0.22 V - 0.76 i 29,570 0.41 W 19,200 0.64 K 17,890 0.31 X 6,125 0.26 L 9,700 0.31 Total Building Space (sf) 1,018,36 Total Site Area (acres) 5 15.94 Average Density (sfiacre) 63,887 For this example, the average building density of the surrounding area is greater than 60,000 square feet per acre, so the example qualifies for 6 points under this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Densely developed communities may have air quality, making it difficult forbuilding occupants and operators to address health and comfort issues. Consider optimizing the mechanical systems for air quality protection by using superior filtration media and selecting materials that do not contribute to indoor air quality issues. Encourage building operators to actively manage for high indoor air quality through the use of the EPA's Indoor Air Quality Building Education and Assessment Model (I-BEAM) or other strategies. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:/Avww.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. SS CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 75 EFTA00281614 SS CI Credit 2 Websites Congress for New Urbanism http:(/www.cnu.org The Congress for the New Urbanism promotes pedestrian-friendly, neighborhood-based development as an alternative to sprawl. Urban Land Institute ULI Washington http://washington.uli.org The Urban Land Institute is a nonprofit organization based in Washington,.., that promotes the responsible use of land to enhance the total environment. The International Union for the Scientific Study of Population http://www.iussp.org IUSSP promotes scientific studies of demography and population-related issues. Print Media ChangingPlaces: RebuildingCommunity in the Age ofSprawl,by Richard Moe and Carter Wilkie (Henry Holt & Company,1999). Density by Design: New Directions in Residential Development, by Steven Fader (Urban Land Institute, 2000). Green Development Integrating Ecology, and Real Estate, by Alex Wilson, et al. (John Wiley & Sons, 1998). Once There Were Greenfields: How Urban Sprawl Is Undennining Americais Envinnnzent, Economy, and Social Fabric, by F. Kaid Benfield, et al. (Natural Resources Defense Council,1999). Suburban Nation: The Rise of Sprawl and the Decline of the American Dream, by Andres Duany, et al. North Point Press, 2000). 13. Definitions Building density is the floor area of the building divided by the total area of the site (square feet per acre). Building footprint is the area on a project site used by the building structure, defined by the perimeter of the building plan. Parking lots, landscapes, and other nonbuilding facilities are not included in the building footprint. Greenfields are sites not previously developed or graded that could support open space, habitat, or agriculture. A mixed-use project involves a combination of residential and commercial or retail components. Neighborhood is synonymous with residential area. Pedestrian access allows people to walk to services without being blocked by walls, freeways, or other barriers. Previously developed sites once had buildings, roadways, parking lots, or were graded orotherwise altered by direct human activities. Propertyarea is the total areawithin the legal property boundaries of a site; it encompasses all areas of the site, including constructed and nonconstructed areas. Public transportation consists of bus, rail, or other transit services for the general public that operate on a regular, continual basis. 76 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281615 A residential area is land zoned primarily for housing at a density of io units per acre or greater. These areas may have single-family and multifamily housing and include building types such as townhomes, apartments, duplexes, condominiums, or mobile homes. Site area is synonymous with property area. SS CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 77 EFTA00281616 78 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281617 ALTERNATIVE TRANSPORTATION-PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION ACCESS I- t Credit SS Credit 3.1 Points 6 points Intent To reduce pollution and land development impacts from automobile use. Requirements OPTION 1. Rail Station Proximity Locate the project in a building within 1/2.-mile walking distance (measured from a main building entrance) of an existing (or planned and funded) commuter rail, light nil or subway station. OR OPTION 2. Bus Stop Proximity Locate the project within 1/4-mile walking distance (measured from a main building entrance) of r or more stops for a or more public campus or private bus lines usable by tenant occupants. SS CREDIT 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 79 EFTA00281618 SS CI Credit 3.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The extensive use of single-occupancy vehicles and their heavy reliance on petroleum contribute to environmental problems. Fortunately, alternatives to conventional transportation methods exist. Many people are willing to use other options if they are convenient. The use of mass transit helps reduce energy demand for transportation and associated greenhouse gas emissions, as well as the space needed for parking lots that encroach on the green space of a building site. Minimizing parking lots reduces the building footprint and sets aside more space for natural areas or greater development densities. Reductions in single-occupancy vehicle use directly affect fuel consumption and reduce air and water pollution fromvehicle exhaust. On the basis ofpassenger miles traveled, public transportation is twice as fuel efficient as private vehicles and annually saves 45 million barrels of Another benefit of public transportation is the associated reduction in the need for infrastructure used by vehicles. Parking facilities and roadways for automobiles have negative impacts on the environment because impervious surfaces, such as asphalt, increase stormwater runoff while contributing to urban heat island effects. Economic Issues Many occupants view proximity to mass transit as a benefit, and this can influence the value and marketability of the building. For building occupants, costs associated with traveling to and from the workplace can be significantly reduced through access to public transportation. Not only is this an economic benefit for building occupants, it helps business owners attract and retain employees. Reducing the size of parking areas based on anticipated use of public transportation by building occupants may alter operating costs associated with parking lot maintenance. If local utilities charge for stormwater based on impervious surface area, minimizing these areas can result in lower stormwater fees. 2. Related Credits Sites close to existing public transportation infrastructure tend to be in more densely developed areas. The following credit maybe more likely achievable for projects in such locations: ■ SS Credit 2: Development Density and Community Connectivity 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Choose a base building that has convenient access to existing transportation networks to minimize the need for new transportation lines. Local transit authorities can provide maps and directories that will help identify the available transportation options. Consider developing a transportation management plan that evaluates anticipated transportation use patterns and offers alternatives aimed at reducing commuting in single-occupancy vehicles. This management plan could be considered a comprehensive approach to addressing the 4 credits within SS Credit 4, Alternative Transportation. This is particularly useful for large buildings, buildings that are part of a master plan implementation, and developments with multiple buildings. If possible, survey future potential building occupants about whether the available public transportation options meet their needs. Look for functional sidewalks, paths, and walkways that lead directly to existing mass transit stops. 80 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281619 If a light rail or subway station is sited, planned, and funded at the time the project is completed, it satisfies the intent of this credit. If private shuttle buses will be used to meet the requirements, they must connect to public transportation and operate during the most frequent commuting hours. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make proximity to public transportation a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations OPTION 1 and OPTION 2 Use an area drawing, aerial photograph, or map to calculate the walking distance to the transit stops. If the building has multiple main or public entrances, project teams can measure walking distances from multiple building entrances. Software tools like Google" Maps Pedometer (www. ) maybe useful for determining walking distance. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Identify local rail stations or bus routes serving the project building. ■ Develop a site vicinity plan, to scale, and label walking paths between the project building's main entrance and rail stations or bus stops. ■ If the team anticipates rail development, obtain verification of funding for the rail project. 8. Examples LEO Enterprise, Inc., has selected tenant space in a downtovm office building. The building iswithin walking distance of public transportation. Figurer shows a rail station within 1/2.-mile walking distance from the building's main entrance, the entrance used by the tenant. The map includes a scale bar and a north indicator. SS CI Credit 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 81 EFTA00281620 SS CI Credit 3.1 Figure 1: Sample Area Drawing: Distance to Rail I I I Ire 1/4 1/2 mM 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an exemplary performance credit under the Innovation in Design section for SS Credit 3.1, Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access by complying with the requirements oft of the 2. options described below. OPTION 1. Comprehensive Transportation Management Plan Institute a comprehensive transportation management plan that demonstrates a quantifiable reduction in personal automobile usethroughbyproviding multiple transportation alternatives. Only 1 exemplary performance credit is available for implementing a comprehensive transportation management plan for any of the SS Credit 3, Alternative Transportation, credits. OPTION 2. Double Transit Ridership Because projects in locations with good mass transit can achieve substantially and quantifiably higher environmental benefits, meeting the following threshold qualifies a project forexemplary performance. The Center for Clean Air Policy' has found that average transit ridership increases by 0.5% for every 1.0% increase in growth of transit service levels, which leads to the conclusion that quadrupling transit service generally doubles transit ridership. To achieve exemplary performance, meet the following minimum requirements: ■ Locate the tenant space in a building that is within 112 mile of at least 2 existing commuter rail, light rail, or subway lines. 82 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281621 OR • Locate the tenant space in a building that is within 14 mile of at least 2 or more stops for 4 ci or more public or campus (private) bus lines usable by tenants. SS AND ■ Frequency of service must be at least 200 transit rides per day, total, at these stops. A combination of rail and bus lines is allowable. This strategy is based on the assumption that the threshold of the base credit would provide, in most cases, at least so transit rides per day (half-hourly service 24 hours per day or more frequent service for less than 24 hours per day). If, on average, transit ridership increases by 0.5% for every 1.0% increase in transit service, then quadrupling the number of rides available would, on average, double the transit ridership: 4 x so rides = zoo rides. Include a transit schedule and map with the LEED certification submittal. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Transit infrastructure can be underutilized if building occupants are not informed about public transportation opportunities or encouraged to use these systems. Consider working with building owners,tenantsandoperatorstodevelop ongoing programsto support transit use andinfrastructure. Appropriate strategies will vary by building ownership, tenant organization and occupancy type. For example, a multitenant facility with third-party management is less likely to provide subsidized transit passes than an owner-occupied facility, but it could establish a program to inform occupants about transit opportunities. Programming options to consider include the following examples: ■ Providing financial incentives or subsidized passes for public transit. ■ Instituting a "free ride home" program for public transit commuters who need to work unexpected hours. ■ Promotingthe use of mass transit byproviding information on transportation options,routes, services, and incentives. ■ Participating in local or regional transportation planning to ensure that building occupants' needs are considered. ■ Establishing a method for tracking public transit ridership. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org/pLojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites U.S. EPA and Department of Transportation, Best Workplaces for Commuters http://wv.bestworIcplaces.orgfindex.htm This program publicly recognizes employers who have exemplary commuter benefits programs. It provides tools, guidance, and promotions to help employers give commuter benefits, reap the financial gains, and achieve national recognition. U.S. EPA, Office of Transportation and Air Quality http://www.emgovfotaq Credit 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 83 EFTA00281622 SS CI Credit 3.1 This EPA website provides information about the types and effects of air pollution associated with automobile use and links to resources for organizations interested in promoting commuter-choice programs. 13. Definitions A campus or private bus is a bus or shuttle service that is privately operated and not available to the general public. In LEED, a campus or private bus line that falls within 1/4 mile of the project site and provides transportation service to the public can contribute to earning credits. Mass transit is designed to transport large groups of persons in a single vehicle, such as a bus or train. Public transportation consists of bus, rail, or other transit services for the general public that operate on a regular, continual basis. Walking distance is the length of the walkable pathway between the building and public transportation. 84 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281623 ALTERNATIVE TRANSPORTATION-BICYCLE STORAGE AND CHANGING ROOMS Credit Points SS Credit 3.2 2 points Intent To reduce pollution and land development impacts from automobile use. Requirements Provide secure bicycle racks and/or storage (within zoo yards of a main building entrance) for s%or more of tenant occupants (measured at peak periods). Provideshowerandchangingfacilities in thebuilding,orwithin zooyards ofabuildingentrance, for o.s% of full-time equivalent (Pit) occupants. SS CREDIT 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 85 EFTA00281624 SS CI Credit 3.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The environmental effects of automobile use include vehicle emissions that contribute to smog and air pollution, as well as environmental impacts from oil extraction and petroleum refining. Bicycling as an alternative to personal vehicle use offers a number of environmental benefits. Bicycle commuting produces no emissions, has zero demand for petroleum-based fuels, relieves traffic congestion, reduces noise pollution, and requires far less infrastructure for roadways and parking lots. Roadways and parking lots, on the other hand, produce stormwater runoff, contribute to the urban heat island effect, and encroach on green space. Bicycles are more likely to be used for relatively short commuting trips. Displacing vehicle miles with bicycling, even for short trips, carries a large environmental benefit because a large portion of vehicle emissions occur in the first few minutes of driving. Following a cold start, emissions control equipment is less effective because of cool operating temperatures. Economic Issues The initial cost of building bike storage areas and changing facilities or showers is typically low relative to the overall project cost. When buildings accommodate bicycling infrastructure, occupants can realize health benefits through bicycle and walking commuting strategies. Bicycling and walking also expose people to the community, encouraging interaction among neighbors and allowing for enjoyment of the area in ways unavailable to automobile passengers. 2. Related Credits There are no related credits. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Choose a basebuildingthat has convenient access to safe bicycle pathways and secure bicycle storage areas for cyclists. Work with building owners to provide shower and changing areas for cyclists that are easily accessible from bicycle storage areas. Survey potential building occupants and determine whether the available bike routes and their compatibility with mass transit options meet their needs. Look for functional and direct paths that can be used by bicycle commuters. Shower facilities maybe either within the tenant's space or in a common facility within 200 yards of the main building entrance. If changing rooms and showers are not within the tenant space, demonstrate that the required capacity will not be compromised by other users. Show that the arrangements are permanent and are not subject to lease revisions or other circumstances beyond the control of the tenant. If the required bicycle-rack capacity cannot be reserved for the specific tenant space, the quantity must be based on the entire building population. Shower and changing rooms can be provided by health club memberships if those facilities are provided free of charge and if sufficient shower and changing facilities are available to satisfy the credit requirements of 0.5% of the tenant FTE. A minimum of a 2-year contract is required between the tenant and the health club. 86 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281625 5. Timeline and Team Bicycle storage and shower facilities should be incorporated into design concepts during schematic design and design development. By considering cycling early on, the project team can implement a successful alternative transportation program. For example, when selecting a base building, the project team can include proximity to existing bicycle commuting infrastructure as a criterion. Coordination among the architect, plumbing engineer, civil engineer and/or landscape architect may be required for locating and designing bicycle storage and shower facilities. The project team should also consider future expansion opportunities. 6. Calculations To determine the number of secure bicycle spaces and changing and shower facilities required, follow the steps below. STEP 1 Identify the total number of occupants for each of the following occupancy types: a. Full-time staff b. Part-time staff c. Peak transients (students, volunteers, visitors, customers, etc.) Include only occupants from the tenant space pursuing LEED certification; do not include occupants from the entire building. In tenant spaces with multiple shifts,use onlythehighest- volume shift in the calculation but consider shift overlap when determining peak users. STEP 2 For full-time and part-time staff, calculate the FTE tenant occupants based on a standard 8-hour occupancy period. An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of 1.0, while a part-time occupant has a FTE value based on her/his hours per day divided by 8 (see Equation 1). FTE calculations for the project must be used consistently for all LEED credits. Equation 1. FTE Staff Occupants Total FTE Staff Occupants — Total Staff Occupant Hours Et STEP 3 Calculate the number of secure bicycle spaces required foreachgroup ofoccupants according to Equation 2. Equation 2a. Secure Bike Spaces Staff Occupant FIE Staff Spaces — Occupants X 0.05 Equation 2b. Secure Bike Spaces Transient Peak Spaces Transients X 0.05 Certain types of transient populations can be excluded from these calculations if they cannot reasonably be expected to arrive by bicycle and thus use on-site storage facilities. For example, air travelers arriving at an airport will not need bicycle storage. Project teams should be prepared to justify the exclusion of any transients from the calculations. SS CI Credit 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 87 EFTA00281626 SS CI Credit 3.2 STEP 4 Calculate the number of showers required for staff using Equations. Equation 3. Staff Showering Facilities Showering Facilities = FTE Staff X 0.005 Transient occupants are not counted in the showering facility calculation. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Determine the number of occupants of each type and calculate the number of bicycle storage and showering facilities required. ■ Develop a plan showing the location and quantity of bicycle storage and shower facilities and determine the distance between facilities and the building entry. 8. Examples A building houses a companywith z shifts. The first shift includes 240 full-time workers and 90 part- time workers. The second shift includes 110 full-time workers and 6c3 part-time workers. There are novisitors or transient occupants who use the tenant space. Calculations to determine the total FTE staff occupants for each shift are shown in Tablet. Table 1. Sample FTE Calculation RIM Full-time Staff Part-time Staff Full-time Equivalent Staff Staff (hr) Staff (hr) Staff First Shift 240 8 90 4 285 Second Shift 110 8 60 4 140 The first shift is used for determining the peak number of bicycrng occupants because it has the greatest FTE tenant occupant total. Based on a total of 2.85 FTE-tenant occupants, the estimated number of cycling occupants is 1425 (2.13S x 0.05 = 1425); IS secure bicycle spaces are required. The result for changing and showering facilities is t.4 (285 x .005 = 1.4); 2 changing and showering facilities are required. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an innovation credit for exemplary performance by instituting a comprehensive transportation management planthat demonstrates a quantifiable reduction in personalautomobile use by providing multiple transportation alternatives. Only t exemplary performance credit is available for implementing a comprehensive transportation management plan for any of the SS Credit 3, Alternative Transportation, credits. Projects that are awarded exemplary performance for SS Credit 3.1, Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access, using the double transit ridership option are not eligible for exemplary performance under this credit. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 88 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281627 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Project teams should consider working with tenants, building owners, and operators to develop ongoing programs that support bicycle use. Appropriate strategies will vary by tenant organization, building ownership, and occupancy type but could include these: • Providing financial incentives for commuting via bicycle. • Instituting a "free ride home" program for bicycle riders who need to work unexpected hours. • Promoting the use of a bicycle to the communityby providing information on safe bike routes, locations of secure bicycle parking, lockers, showers, etc. • Providing discounts on bicycle accessories and maintenance at local bike shops. • Participating in local or regional transportation planning to ensure that building occupants' needs are considered. Provision of bike lanes and paths along corridors leading to the project can significantly influence ridership levels. • Establishing a method for tracking bicycle ridership. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:ffivww.usgbc.orgeprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Bicycle Coalition of Maine, An Employer's Guide to Encouraging Bicycle Commuting limxtivnvw.bikemaine.org p iernloyer.htm Thiswebsite from the Bicycle Coalition of Maine, this site suggests ways to encourage and facilitate bicycle commuting to employees. Commuting Guide for Employers Thiswebsite outlines strategies employers can use as they try to encourage employees to commute by bicycle. Federal Highway Administration, Office of Human and Natural Environment, Bicycle & Pedestrian Program http://www.fhwa.dot.gp_vienvironmentibikeped This program of the Federal Highway Administration's Office of Human and Natural Environment promotes access to and use and safety of bicycle and pedestrian transportation. Pedestrian and Bicycle Information Center http://vnvw.bicyclinginfo.org The Pedestrian and Bicycle Information Center provides information and resources for issues related to bicycle commuting, including health and safety, engineering, advocacy, education, and facilities. Information and links for bicycle parking issues can be found at http://www.bicyclinginfo. orgfengineering/parking.cfm. U.S. EPA and Department of Transportation, Best Workplaces for Commuters http://ww.bestworkplaces.orgfindex.htm Now managed by the Center for Urban Transportation Research at the University of South Florida, this program publicly recognizes employers who have exemplary commuter benefits programs. It provides tools, guidance, and promotions to help employers give commuter benefits, reap the financial gains, and achieve national recognition. SS CI Credit 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 89 EFTA00281628 SS CI Credit 3.2 U.S. EPA, Office of Transportation and Air Quality http:(/www.epa EPA's website provides information about the types and effects of air pollution associated with automobile use and links to resources for organizations interested in promoting commuter-choice programs. 13. Definitions Bicycle racks, in LEED, include outdoor bicycle racks, bicycle lockers, and indoor bicycle storage rooms. Full-time equivalent (FTE) represents a regular building occupant who spends 40 hours per week in the project building. Part-time or overtime occupants have FTE values based on their hours per week divided by 40. Multiple shifts are included or excluded depending on the intent and requirements of the credit. Secure bicycle storage is an internal or external space that keeps bicycles safe from theft. It may include lockers and storage rooms. Transient users are occupants who do not use a facility on a consistent, regular, daily basis. Examples include students in higher education settings, customers in retail settings, and visitors in institutional settings. 90 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281629 ALTERNATIVE TRANSPORTATION-PARKING AVAILABILITY Credit SS Credit 3.3 Points 2 point Intent To reduce pollution and land development impacts from automobile use. Requirements CASE 1. Projects with an Area Less Than 75% of the Total Building Area OPTION 1 Parking spaces provided to tenant must meet but not exceed minimum numberrequired by local zoning regulations. Preferred parking' must be provided for carpools or vanpools capable of serving 596 or more of tenant occupants. OR OPTION 2 No parking is provided or subsidized for tenant occupants. CASE 2. Projects with an Area 75% or More of the Total Building Area OPTION 1 Parking capacity must meet but not exceed minimum local zoning requirements. Preferred parking must be provided for carpools or vanpools, capable of serving 596 of the building occupants. OR OPTION 2 No new parking is added for rehabilitation projects. Preferred parking must be provided for carpools or vanpools, capable of serving 596 of the building occupants. SS CREDIT 3.3 It I 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 91 EFTA00281630 SS CI Credit 33 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Reducing private automobile use saves energy and avoids associated environmental problems, such as vehicle emissions that contribute to smog, air pollution, and greenhouse gas emissions, as well as the environmental impacts associated with oil extraction and petroleum refining. The environmental benefits of carpooling are significant. For example, me people who carpooled (2 people per car) to miles to work and to miles home instead of driving separately would prevent emissions of about 970 pounds of carbon dioxide per day and would save about so gallons of gas per day!' Parking facilities also have negative impacts on the environment because asphalt surfaces increase stormwater runoff and contribute to urban heat island effects. By restricting the size of parking lots and promoting carpooling, project teams can reduce these effects and provide such benefits as more green space. Economic Issues Carpooling reduces the size of parking areas needed to support building occupants, allowing the building to accommodate more occupants without enlarging the parking area. Carpooling also helps reduce building costs, since less land is needed for parking and less infrastructure is needed to support vehicles. Smaller parking areas can decrease the amount of impervious surfaces on a site. This may result in reduced stormwater costs if the local utility bases its fees on impervious surface area. Moreover, because fewer cars on the road means less pollution, traffic congestion, and wear and tear to roadways, many municipalities and state governments offer tax incentives for carpooling programs. 2. Related Credits There are no related credits. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Limit the availability of parking to encourage the use of alternative forms of transportation to and from the site. Real estate brokers can help identifybuildingswith easy access to public transportation and construct lease agreements so that the number of parking spaces guaranteed to tenants does not exceed minimums established by local zoning regulations. Research the parking requirements for the local zoning ordinances before completing lease negotiations. Determine the minimum numberofspaces required bythe code for the project's actual area and use building types and multipliers. For example, 20,000 square feet of offices requires too spaces, andso,000 square feet of warehouses requires so spaces, etc. Confirm that the lease does not guarantee more spaces than the calculation requirement. The criteria for "guaranteed" includes the following items: ■ Assigned spaces reserved only for the tenant's use, including tenant's guests. ■ The portion ofa restricted parking area reserved for the tenant's use (i.e.,the number of access cards issued to tenant). "Guaranteed" does not require that the payment for parking be included in the lease. When the tenant organization makes separate payments (e.g., for parking that is a concession of the building or at another facility), the applicant must demonstrate that the spaces reserved for the occupants are fewer than the calculated requirement. 92 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281631 This credit also requires the provision of preferred parking spaces for carpools to serve 596 of the occupants. Projects have met the credit requirements if they locate in a LEED-certified building that has also achieved this credit. 5. Timeline and Team Discussions regarding the reduction of parking capacity are often most productive at the project concept phase. This may entail discussions with zoning and civic officials and could include community and neighborhood organizations. A traffic study can be a valuable tool for evaluating traffic patterns and expected commuting in single-occupancy vehicles. Projects may require an additional team member, possibly a specialist or consultant, to develop this traffic study. Because of their size or location or because of regulatory requirements, many projects may entail zoning negotiations over the parking requirements. Planned developments mayhave unique parking requirements; project teams must consider these as part of overall alternative transportation strategies. Design solutions to reduce parking capacity for the project site should be incorporated during the schematic design and design development phases. The architect, design team, and project owner should coordinate decision making to choose the most appropriate approach for future occupants. 6. Calculations For projects providing designated preferred parking for carpools or van pools, calculate the number of required preferred parking spaces using the steps below. STEP 1 Calculate the FTE tenant occupants based on a standard 8-hour occupancy period. An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of in, while a part-time occupant has a FTE value based on her/ his hours per day divided by 8 (see Equation 1). FTE calculations for the project must be used consistently for all LEED credits. In buildings with multiple shifts, use only the highest volume shift in the calculation, but consider shift overlap when determining peak building users. Equation 1. FTE Staff Occupants Total FTE Staff Occupants = Total Staff Occupant Hours a STEP 2 Use Equation 2 to determine the required number of preferred parking spaces. Equation z assumes that all such spaces are for carpools (serving 2 occupants per vehicle). If carpools are known to serve more riders per car or ifvan pools achieve the same end, the outcome may be adjusted to reflect the increased volume of tenants served per space. In all cases, fractions of a space must be rounded up. Equation 2 Required Spaces = FTE Occupants X .05 2 SS CI Credit 3.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 93 EFTA00281632 SS CI Credit 33 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ For projects providing designated preferred parking for carpool or vanpool users, develop a site plan showing parking spaces for tenants and the location and quantity of preferred spaces. ■ Provide adequate communication to occupants about the location and purpose of preferred parking spaces. ■ Assemble informationabout parkingprovided to the tenant space as well aszoning regulations and lease agreements, if applicable. 8. Examples Haller Industries occupies so% of a building and has too full-time and 50 part-time employees. The total FTE occupants value isms (Table t). Table 1. Sample FTE Calculation Full-Time Staff Pad-Time Staff Full-Time Equivalent (FTE) Staff Old (hr) 100 8 50 0 125 The required number of preferred parking spaces for carpools or vanpools, based on Equation nand rounding up, is 4. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an innovation credit for exemplary performance by instituting a comprehensive transportation management planthat demonstrates a quantifiable reduction in personalautomobile use by providing multiple transportation alternatives. Only t exemplary performance credit is available for implementing a comprehensive transportation management plan for any of the SS Credit 3,Altemative Transportation, credits. Projects that are awarded exemplary performance for SS Credit 3.1, Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access, using the double transit ridership option are not eligible for exemplary performance under this credit. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations For project buildings that include preferred parking, establish procedures for the use of this amenity, communicate them to building occupants, and assign operations staff for their administration. The procedures might include establishing a system for enforcing use of designated spaces (e.g, a permitting system), discounting paid parking, and tracking use of preferred parking. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpWwww.usgbc.orgipL-ojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 94 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281633 Websites Association for Commuter Transportation (ACT) http:fiww.actweb.org/mcipage.do ACT is an association of professionals who specialize in creating a more workable transportation and commuting system. ACT provides information and advocacy on transportation issues involving commute alternatives and offers its members networking and professional development opportunities. Research Triangle Park, Smart Commute http://www.smartcommute.org Smart Commute has valuable information about telecommuting and carpool programs useful for any organization. State of Arizona Telecommuting Program This website provides background information on the significance of telecommuting and examples of the development, implementation, and results of telecommuting programs. Teletrips Teletrips helps create, implement, and manage public-private partnership programs to reduce commuter congestion, improve air quality, and reduce energy consumption. Victoria Transport Policy Institute, Online Transportation Demand Management Encyclopedia http://www.vtpi.org/tdm Transportation demand management is a general term for strategies that result in more efficient use of transportation resources. This online encyclopedia is a comprehensive source of information about innovative management solutions to transportation problems. 13. Definitions A carpool is an arrangement by which 2. or more people share a vehicle for transportation. Parking subsidies are the costs of providing occupant parking that are not recovered in parking fees. Preferred parking, available to particular users, includes designated spaces close to the building (aside from designated handicapped spots), designated covered spaces, discounted parking passes, and guaranteed passes in a lottery system. Endnotes U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. "Heat Island Effect." http://www.epa.govjheatislandf index.htm (accessed November 2°08). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water. Water-Efficient Landscaping. 2002. http:// www.epa.gov/owm/water-efficiency/final_final.pdf (accessed January zoos). Massachusetts Water Resources Authority. "Water Efficiency and Management for Commercial Buildings." http://www.mwra.state.ma.us/o4water/html/bullet4htm (accessed May2008). U.S. Census Bureau. "2006 American Community Survey: Selected Economic Characteristics." http://factfinder.census.goviservlet/ADPTable?_bm=y8c-qr_name=ACS_20o6_EST_Goo_DP38:- geo id=ot0o0US&-context=adp&-ds name=&-tree id=3os8c- lang=en&-redoLog=false&- format (accessed May2008). SS CI Credit 3.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 95 EFTA00281634 SS 5 U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy "Figure 6.1.1 Building Share of U.S. Electricity Consumption/Sales (Percent)." 2008 Buildings Energy Data Book. 2008. http://www.btscoredatabook.net/TableView.aspx?table=6.1.1 (accessed November 2008). • Energy Information Administration. Assumptions to the Annual Energy Outlook 2008. 2008. http:// www.eia.doe.govfoiaf/aeofassumption/ (accessed November2008). Hutson, Susan S., Nancy L. Barber, Joan F. Kenny, Kristin S. Linsey, Deborah S. Lumia, and Molly A. Nlaupin. Estimated Use of Water in the United States in 2000. U.S. Geological Survey, 2004. http:// pubs.usgs.gov/circ/2.004/circ1268/ (accessed November 2.008). • http://www.epa.gov/brownfields/about.htm. 9 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Reducing Stormwa ter Costs through Low Impact Development (LID) Strategies and Practices. 2007. v‘ww.epa.goviowow/nps/lid/costs.97/factsheet. html (accessed May 2008). 1" Ibid. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency "Heat Island Effect." http://www.epa.gov/heat island/ index.htm (accessed May 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency "Heat Island Effect: Urban Heat Island Pilot Project (UHIPP)." www.epa.gov/hiri/pilot/index.html (accessed May 2008). '3 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency "Heat Island Effect: Basic Information." http://www.epa. gov/hiri/about/index.html (accessed November 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency "Heat Island Effect: Basic Information." http://www.epa. gov/hiri/about/index.html (accessed November 2008). is Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Pollution Prevention Assistance Division. "The Sustainable Office Toolkit." http://mvw.p2adeorg/toolkitimodules_A_Lhtml (accessed May 2008). 'S U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Solid Waste. 'Wastes—Resource Conservation— Reduce, Reuse, Recycle—Construction & Demolition Materials." http://www.epa.gov/osw/ conserverr/imr/cdm/ (accessed November2008). American Public Transportation Association. " Use of Public Transportation by One in Ten Americans Would Lead to Cleaner Air and Reduce U.S. Oil Dependency by 40 Percent." APTA News Release (July 17, 2002), (accessed November2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Emission Facts: Greenhouse Gas Emissions from a Typical Passenger Vehicle. 2005. http://www.epa.goviotaq/climate/420foso04.htm (accessed November 2008). 96 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281635 EFFEDEMF Overview Americans'consumptionofthepublicwater supplycontinues to increase. The U.S.Geological Survey estimates that between 1990 and 2000, this consumption increased 12%, to 43.3 billion gallons per day.' The public water supply is delivered to users for domestic, commercial, industrial, and other purposes and is the primary source of water for most buildings. In 2000, these uses represented about 11% of total withdrawals and slightly less than 40% of groundwater withdrawals, constituting the third-largest category of water use in the United States, behind thermoelectric power (48% of total withdrawals) and irrigation (34% oftotal withdrawals). This high demand for water is straining supplies, and in some parts of the United States, water levels in underground aquifers have dropped more than 150 feet since the 1940s! Only about 14% of withdrawn water is lost to evaporation or transpiration or incorporated into products or crops; the rest is used, treated, and discharged to the nation's water bodies.3Discharged water contaminates rivers, lakes, and potable water with bacteria, nitrogen, toxic metals, and other contaminants. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) estimates that 1/3 of the nation's lakes, streams, and rivers are now unsafe for swimming and fishing" Even so, water bodies in the United States are so% cleaner& today than in the mid-1970s. And although consumption is rising, total U.S. withdrawals from the public water supply declined by nearly 9% between 1980 and 1985 and have varied by less than 3% for each 5-year interval since then? Those achievements can be largely attributed to the Clean Water Act and reductions in industrial, irrigation, and thermoelectric power withdrawals since 1980. Although the statistics show improvement, we are still far from sustainably using water. If total commercial building water consumption for all uses in the United States fell by just 10%, we could save more than 2 trillion gallons of water each year, Using large volumes of water increases maintenance and life-cycle costs for building operations and also increases consumers' costs for additional municipal supply and treatment facilities. Conversely, buildings that use water efficiently can reduce costs through lower fees, less sewage volume, reductions in energy and chemical use, and lower capacity charges and limits. Efficiency measures can easily reduce water use in average commercial buildings by 30% or more.° In a typical 100,000-square-foot office building, low-flow plumbing fixtures coupled with sensors and automatic controls will save a minimum of 1 million gallons of water per year.1O In addition, nonpotable water can be used for landscape irrigation, toilet and urinal flushing, custodial purposes, and building systems. Depending on local water costs, utility savings can be tens of thousands of dollars per year. Real estate firm Cushman and Wakefield, for example, implemented a comprehensive water management strategy at its Adobe headquarters in San Jose, California, in 2002 and achieved a 22% reduction in water use." The LEED for Commercial Interiors Water Efficiency (WE) prerequisite and credit encourage the use of strategies and technologies that reduce the amount of potable water consumed in buildings. Many water conservation strategies are no-cost or provide a rapid payback. Some, such as biological wastewater treatment systems and graywater plumbing systems, require more substantial investment and are cost-effective only under certain building and site conditions. The WE prerequisite and credit address environmental concerns related to building water use and disposal and promote the following measures: WE OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 97 EFTA00281636 WE OVERVIEW Monitoring Water Consumption Performance The first step to improving water efficiency is to understand current performance. Tracking water use alongside energy use can help organizations better understand how these resources relate to each other, make integrated management decisions that increase overall efficiency, and verify savings from improvement projects in both energy and water systems. Organizations that manage water and energy performance together can take advantage of this relationship to create greener, more sustainable buildings. Reducing Indoor Potable Water Consumption Reducing indoor potable water consumption may require using alternative water sources for nonpotable applications and installing building upgrades, such as water-efficient fixtures, flow restrictors on existing fixtures, electronic controls, dry composting toilet systems, and waterless urinals. Lowering potable water use for toilets, showerheads, faucets, and other fixtures can reduce the total amount withdrawn from natural water bodies. A commercial building in Boston replaced 12,6 3.5-gallons-per-flush (gpf) toilets with low-flow, 1.6-gpf toilets and reduced total water use by 15%. With an initial cost of $32,000 and estimated annual savings of $22,800, payback for the renovation was 1.4 years. Another Boston building installed 30 faucet aerators and reduced annual indoor water consumption by t90,000 gallons. The cost of the materials and labor totaled $300, and the change is estimated to save $1,250 per year, with a simple payback of 2 months." Reducing Water Consumption to Save Energy and Improve Environmental Well-Being In manybuildings, the most significant savings associated with water efficiency result from reduced energy costs. Water efficiency cuts costs by reducing the amount of water that must be treated, heated, cooled, and distributed—all of which require energy. Because water heating in commercial buildings accounts for nearly 15% of total building energy use," the efficient use of hot water results in significant energy savings. For this reason, water conservation that reduces the use of hot water also conserves energy and reduces energy-related pollution. For example, U.S. government office buildings use an estimated 244 billion to 256 billion gallons of water each year. Approximately 138.3 billion Btus of energy is required to process this water annually, 98% of which is used to heat water. By implementing water-efficiency efforts, federal buildings could conserve approximately 40% of their total water consumption and reduce related energy use by approximately 81.3z billion Btus per year!. Practicing water conservation measures can also help improve both environmental and human well- being. A recent government survey showed that at least 36 states are anticipating local, regional, or statewide water shortages by zos3.'s Human health and environmental welfare are affected when reservoirs and groundwater aquifers are depleted, since lower water levels can concentrate both natural contaminants, such as radon and arsenic, and human pollutants, such as agricultural and chemical wastes. Increasing water efficiency helps keep contaminants at safe levels. Waterefficiencyalso reducesenergyconsumption inthewatersupplyandwastewater infrastructure. American public water supply and treatment facilities consume about 56 billion kilowatt-hours (kWh) each year"—enough electricity to power more than 5 million homes for an entire year." Better water efficiency in commercial buildings will reduce the amount of energy consumed by water treatment facilities. CREDIT TITLE WE Prerequisite 1 WE Credit 1 Water Use Reduction Water Use Reduction 98 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281637 WATER USE REDUCTION Prerequisite WE Prerequisite 1 Points Required Intent To increase water efficiency within buildings to reduce the burden on municipal water supply and wastewater systems. Requirements Employ strategies that in aggregate use zo% less water than the water use baseline calculated for the building (not including irrigation). Calculate the baseline according to the commercial and/or residential baselines outlined below.' Calculations are based on estimated occupant usage and must include only the following fixtures and fixture fittings (as applicable to the project scope): water closets, urinals, lavatory faucets, showers, kitchen sink faucets and prerinse spray valves. Commercial Fixtures, Fittings, and Appliances Current Baseline Commercial toilets 1.6 gallons per flush (gpfr Except blow-out fixtures: 3.5 (gpf) Commercial urinals 1.0 (gpf) Commercial lavatory (restroom) faucets 2.2 gallons per minute (gpm) at 60 pounds per square inch (psi), private applications only (hotel or motel guest rooms, hospital patient rooms) 0.5 (gpm) at 60 (psi)** all others except private applications 0.25 gallons per cycle for metering faucets Commercial prerinse spray valves (for food service applications) Flow rates 1.6 (gpm) (no pressure specified: no performance requirement) Residential Fixtures, Fittings, and Appliances Current Baseline Residential toilets 1.6 (gpf)•• • Residential lavatory (bathroom) faucets 2.2 (gpm) at 60 psi Residential kitchen faucet Residential showerheads 2.5 (gpm) at 80 (psi) per shower stall'••• • EPAct 1992 standard foe toilets applies to both commercial " In addition to EPAct requirements. the American Society psi µSME A112.18.1-2005). This maximum has been Pkoribing Code. 4" EPAct 1992 standard foe toilets applies to both commercial "" Residential slims cornstment (stall) in dwelling units: including rain systems, waterfalls, bodysprays, kodyspas above (2.5 gpm) per shower compartment, where the floor each increment of 2,500 square inches o4 floor area thereafter from all flowingdevices equal too less than the allowable recirculated imputable water originating from within the long as the total potable water flow does rot exceed the and residential models. of Mechanical Engineers standard foe public lavatory laurels is 0.5 gpm at 60 incorporated into the national Uniform Plumbing Code and the International and residential models. The total allowable flow rate from all flowing 'boneheads at any given lime. and jets. must be limited to the allowable 'bonehead flow rate as specified ma of the shower compartment is less than 2.500 square nches. Foe or part thereof. an additional 'honchoed with total al losable non rate flow rate as specified above must be allowed. Exception: Shunts that emit shaver compartment while operating are allowed to exceed the rwaumum as flow rate as 'peeled ebony. t Tables adapted from information developed and summarised by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Office of Water based cc requirements of the Emu*. Policy Act (EPAct) c415.92 and subsequent rulings by the Department a Energy, requirements of the EPAct of 2.00 L and the plumbing oat requirements as stated in the 2006 editions of the Uniform Plumbing Code or International Plumbing axle pertaining to fbaure performance. WE PREREQUISITE 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 99 EFTA00281638 WE PREREQUISITE 1 The following fixtures, fittings and appliances are outside the scope of the water use reduction calculation: ■ Commercial Steam Cookers ■ Commercial Dishwashers ■ Automatic Commercial Ice Makers s Commercial (family-sized) Clothes Washers ■ Residential Clothes Washers ■ Standard and Compact Residential Dishwashers 100 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281639 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Reducing potable water use in buildings for urinals, toilets, showerheads, and faucets decreases the total amount withdrawn from rivers, streams, underground aquifers, and other water bodies. These strategies protect the natural water cycle and save water resources for future generations. In addition, water use reductions, in aggregate, allow municipalities to reduce or defer the capital investment needed for water supply and wastewater treatment infrastructure. Conserving municipally supplied potable water also reduces chemical inputs at the water treatment works, as well as reduces energy use and the associated greenhouse gas emissions from treatment and distribution. The energy use and emissions generated to supply municipal water vary greatly across the United States and depend on the utility's water sources, the distance water is transported, and the type of water treatment applied. End-use water efficiency can greatly reduce negative environmental impacts. Comparing the environmental impacts of off-site treatment and supply with those of on-site treatment is a worthwhile exercise. Because water heating in commercial buildings accounts for nearly is% of building energy use," conservation measures will also reduce end-use energy and energy-related pollution. Economic Issues Reductions in water consumption decrease building operating costs and bring about wider economic benefits. Reduced water consumption allows municipalities to lessen or defer the capital investment needed for water supply and wastewater treatment infrastructure, thereby leading to more stable municipal taxes and water rates. Many cost-effective systems and fixtures currently on the market support compliance with the requirement,but the cost ofwater efficiency measuresvaries widely. For example, installing tamper- proof faucet aerators on existing fixtures is a small expense compared with a rainwater-harvesting or graywater-recycling system. High-efficiency toilets and dry fixtures, such as composting toilet systems, often have higher initial costs than standard models. Newer technologies may also have higher costs and limited availability because of production constraints, and they may entail different maintenance and repair expenses,such as special cartridge components and cleaning and sealing fluids. Teams should perform a full cost-benefit and life-cycle study before installing such products. 2. Related Credits Efforts to increase rainwater harvesting, increase graywater use, and decrease the demand on local water aquifers may support the following credits: ■ SS Credit 1, Option a, Path a: Site Selection, Stormwater Design—Quantity Control ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 3: Site Selection, Stormwater Design—Quality Control ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Paths 7 and 8: Site Selection, Water-Efficient Landscaping ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 9: Site Selection—Innovative Wastewater Technologies ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 10: Site Selection—Water Use Reduction ■ WE Credit 1: Water Use Reduction Additional energy use may be needed for certain reuse strategies. Active systems also require commissioning, if within the tenant scope of work, and should be considered in relation to the following credits: ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 101 EFTA00281640 WE CI • EA Credit 3: Enhanced Commissioning Prerequisite 1 • EA Credit s: Measurement and Verification 3. Summary of Referenced Standards The Energy PolicyAct (EPAct) of 1992 (and as amended) This act addresses energy and water use in commercial, institutional, and residential facilities. The Energy PolicyAct (EPAct) of 2005 This statute became U.S. law in August zoos. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, Publication IAPMO/American National Standards Institute UPC 1-2006 Uniform Plumbing Code z006, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings http:pwww.iapmo.mg UPC defines water-conserving fixtures and fittings for water closets, urinals, and metered faucets. This ANSI-accredited code safeguards life, health, property, and public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, construction, installation, materials, location, operation, and maintenance or use of plumbing systems. International Code Council, International Plumbing Code 2006, Section 604, Design of Building Water Distribution System http:(Jwww.iccsafe.org IPC defines maximum flow rates and consumption for plumbing fixtures and fittings, including public and private lavatories, showerheads, sink faucets, urinals, and water closets. 4. Implementation The water use reduction credit calculation is based on occupancy. When restrooms are not a part of the project scope, it is important to evaluate the plumbing in common areas of the building. If the base building does not have high-performance fixtures, the project team should consider requiring upgrades to existing fixtures as part of the lease negotiations. Effective ways to reduce potable water use include installing flow restrictors and reduced flow aerators on lavatory, sink, and shower fixtures; installing and maintaining automatic faucet sensors and metering controls; installing low-consumption flush fixtures, such as high-efficiency water closets and urinals; installing nonwater fixtures. In certain cases, faucets with low-flow rates are not appropriate. For example, in kitchen sinks and janitors' closets, faucets are used to fill pots and buckets. Using a low-flow rate for tasks where the volume of water is predetermined does not save water and will likely cause frustration. Consider alternative strategies to reduce water use, such as installing special-use potfillersandhigh-efficiency faucets or foot pedal-operated faucets. WaterSense, a partnership program sponsored by EPA, helps consumers identify water-efficient products and programs. WaterSense-labeled products exceed the Uniform Plumbing Code and the International Plumbing Code standards for some high-efficiency fixtures or fittings. A variety of WaterSense labeled products and other high-efficiency plumbing fixtures, fittings, and appliances can be installed in the same way as conventional EPAct plumbing fiXtUreS, fittings, and appliances. Although water-efficient dishwashers, laundry machines, and other water-consuming fixtures are not counted in the calculations for this credit, they may be included in exemplary performance calculations for WE Credit 3, Water Use Reduction. To determine the most effective strategies fora particular condition, analyze the water conservation options available to the project based on location, code compliance (plumbing and safety), and 102 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281641 overall project function. Determine where in the building the most water is used, evaluate potential alternative water-saving technologies, and examine the impacts of alternative fixtures and technologies. Compare the design case water use with the calculated EPAct baseline to determine the optimal water savings for plumbing fixtures and fittings.Perform a detailed climate analysis to determine the availability of on-site resources and choose strategies that are appropriate and cost- effective. Table 1. UPC and IPC Standards for Plumbing Fixture Water Use Ildwe UPC and IPC Standards EPA WaterSense Standards Water closets (gallons per flush. gp0 1.60 1.28 Urinals (gpf) 1.00 0.5, Showerheads (gallons per minute. gpm*) 2.50 1.5-2.01 Public lavatory faucets and aerators (gpm') 0.5 Private lavatory faucets and aerators (gpm'') 2.2 1.5 Public metering lavatory faucets (gallons per metering cycle) 0.25 Kitchen and janitor sink faucets 2.20 Metering faucets (gallons per cycle) 0.25 *When measured al a honing water premise of 80 pounds per square irch (pso). "When measured al a Datong water premise of 60 pounds per square irch (pso). • On May 22. 2008. EPA issued a notification of intent to develop a specification for high efficiency urinals. WaterSense anticipates establishing a maximum allowable gush volume of 0.5 gpf. ' On August 30. 2007. EPA issued a notification of intent to develop a specification for shomerheads. WaterSense anticipates establishing a single maximum gm rate between 1.5 gum and 2.0 pip. Some water-saving technologies affect on-site energy performance and require commissioning• this task should be addressed by a project's measurement and verification plan. Calibration is necessary for projects using automatic sensors or flow valves. See EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, and EA Credit s, Measurement and Verification, for more information. Space constraints or characteristics of the plumbing fixtures and fittings in existing buildings may hinder water efficiency efforts. 5. Timeline and Team During predesign, setting water-use goals and strategy involves the owner, architect, and engineers. Identify local water utilities and governing authorities, research codes and applicable water laws, learn the process for obtaining permits and approval, and set water use goals and strategy. In construction documents, the architect, working with the owner, should specify efficient fixtures and appliances and complete LEED calculations and documentation. During construction, the design team and owner should confirm proper selection, installation, and operation of water fixtures, fittings, and systems. 6. Calculations The following section describes the calculation methodology for determining water savings. The calculated water use reduction for the project is the difference between the calculated design case and a baseline case. The percentage is determined by dividing the design case use by the baseline use. The methodology differs from traditional plumbing design, in which calculations are based on fixture counts; under this prerequisite, the water use calculation is based on fixture and fitting water consumption rates and estimated use by the occupants. Occupants' estimated use is determined by calculating full-time equivalent (FTE) and transient occupants within the tenant space and applying appropriate fixture use rates to each. WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 103 EFTA00281642 WE CI Prerequisite 1 Fixture Usage Groups Fixture usage groups are subsets of washroom facilities used by different types of occupants. For each group, complete the template calculator. Indicate which fixtures are involved and which occupants they serve. If all occupants within the building have access to all fixtures, or if all fixtures are standard throughout the building, enter only a single fixture usage group. That is the simpler approach, but the project team may specify multiple groups to reflect different fixtures and usage patterns. Forexample,ifwashrooms onthefirst floor are used primarilybytransient retail customers and washrooms on the second floor are used by office workers, calculate each separately. The following scenario illustrates the application of different fixture usage groups. In a retail store, employees use back-of-house restrooms exclusively; these restrooms have different fixture and fitting types and water consumption rates from those in the customer restrooms. The project team establishes a usage groups to account for the distinct populations in the space and the specific restroom facilities they use: (t) back-of-house (employees), and (a) customer restrooms (customers). Calculating Occupancy Identify the number of building occupants by occupancy type. In buildings with multiple shifts, use the number of FTEs from all shifts. Include the following: ■ Full-time staff ■ Part-time staff ■ Transients (students, visitors, retail customers) Calculate the FTE number of occupants based on a standard 8-hour daily occupancy period (40 hours per week). An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of 1.0, and part-time occupants have an FTE value based on theirhours per daydivided by 8. FTE calculations for each shift ofthe project must be used consistently for all LEED credits. Estimate the transient building occupants, such as students, visitors, and customers. Transient occupants can be reported as either daily totals or full-time equivalents. When using daily totals for transients, match the fixture uses for each occupancy type with the values shown in Table a (e.g., for the dailytotal of students, assume 0.5 lavatory faucet uses per daily student visitor). If transients are reported as a daily hill-time equivalent value, fixture uses for FTEs must be assumed regardless of the transient population's identity (e.g.,for students reported as FTEs, assume 3 lavatory faucet uses per student FTE). Use a transient occupancy number that is a representative daily average over the course of a year. If the number of transient visitors per day for retail facilities is unknown, estimate the FTE value of this population based on the default values presented in Table 3. Table 2 provides default fixture use values for different occupancy types. These values should be used in the calculations for this credit unless special circumstances warrant modifications. Most buildings with students, visitors, and retail customers will also have FTE occupants. Half of all students and visitors are assumed to use a flush fixture and a lavatory faucet in the building and are not expected to use a shower or kitchen sink. A fifth of retail customers are assumed to use a flush and a flow fixture in the buildingand no shower orldtchen sink. The default for residential occupants is s uses per day of water closet and lavatory faucet, t shower, and 4 kitchen sink uses. For consistency across LEED projects, the calculations require the use of a balanced, t-to-t sex ratio unless specific project conditions warrant an alternative. Provide a narrative description to explain any special circumstances. 104 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281643 Table 2. Default Fixture Uses, by Occupancy Type Mims Tips FTE StudentNisitor Retail Customer Resident UsesMay Water Closet — Female 3 0.5 0.2 5 —Male 1 0.1 0.1 5 Urinal — Female 0 0 0 Ma — Male 2 0.4 0.1 n/a Lavatory Faucet — duration 15 sec; 12 sec with autocontrol — residential, duration 60 sec 3 0.5 0.2 5 Shower — duration 300 sec — residential, duration 480 sec 0.1 0 0 1 Kitchen Sink, — duration 15 sec — residential, duration 60 sec 1 Na 0 n/a 0 Na n/a 4 Table 3. Default Values for Transient Retail Occupants Retell Space FTE per 100 (sf) Large-format retailer (greater than 50,000 square feet) 0.91 Grocery store 0.87 Restaurant 1.05 Small retailer 0.67 Service 0.77 Sources: 2001 Uniform Building Code. 2004-2005 Database for nagy Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update Studs field investigation vxrk performed by LEED Retail Core Committee Members: ASNUPSIIRADIESNA 90.1-2007: LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction. 2009 Edition. Design Case Water Consumption The design case annual water use is determined by totaling the annual volume of each fixture type and subtracting any nonpotable water supply. The design case must use the rated flow rates and flush volumes for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings. Obtain water consumption data from the manufacturers' product literature. In addition to the typical fixtures shown in Table 4, the project team may add others regulated by the referenced standards, as applicable. WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 105 EFTA00281644 WE CI Prerequisite 1 Table 4. Sample Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings and Water Consumption Ruth Fixture Flow Rate (gpf) Flow Finite Flow Rate Conventional water closet 1.6 Conventional private lavatory 2.2 gpm High-efficiency toilet (HET). single-flush gravity 1.28 Conventional public lavatory 0.5 gpm or s 0.25 gpc HET, single-flush pressure assist 1.0 Conventional kitchen sink 2.2 gpm HET, dual flush (full-flush) 1.6 Low-flow kitchen sink 1.8 gpm HET, dual flush (lax-flush) 1.1 Conventional shower 2.5 gpm HET, foam flush 0.05 Low-flow shower 1.8 gpm Nonwater toilet 0.0 Conventional urinal 1.0 High-efficiency urinal (HEW 0.5 Nonwater urinal 0.0 Facilities in residences and apartments, private bathrooms in hotels and hospitals, and restrooms in commercial establishments where the fixtures are intended for the use of a family or an individual are considered private orprivate-use facilities.All other facilities are considered public or publicuse. If the classification for public or private use is unclear, default to public-use flow rates in performing the calculations associated with this credit. Baseline Case Water Consumption Thebaseline case annualwateruse is determinedbysetting thefixture and fittingwaterconsumption to baseline rates listed in the requirements (as opposed to actual installed values in the design case). Eligible Fixtures This prerequisite is limited to savings generated by the water-using fixtures listed in Table 1. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Determine the type and number of occupants. • Retain manufacturers' data showing the water consumption rates, manufacturer, and model of each fixture and fitting. • List plumbing fixtures by usage group, if applicable. • Define each usage group used. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This prerequisite is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Local building and health codes differ in their treatment of alternative plumbing fixtures, such as nonwater urinals, dual-flush or low-flow water closets, and nonwater toilet systems. Confirm the legality of nontraditional approaches with code officials before committing to specific water-saving strategies. 106 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281645 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Consider installing submetering for water delivered to fixture and fittings to help operators manage water consumption and identify problems within the system. Integrating electronic data logging will facilitate consumption trend analysis. Some water conservation technologies may require special cleaning or maintenance procedures. For example, nonwater urinals generally need to be cleaned according to the manufacturer's specifications and their chemical traps appropriately maintained. Project teams should provide facility managers with appropriate maintenance information, manufacturers' contact information, and product specifications to facilitate proper operation. A preventive maintenance program that includes plumbing fixture and fitting inspection and testing ensures that flow valves do not leak and that any sensors are calibrated correctly so that the fixtures flush and/or flow the appropriate amounts at the proper time. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Rainwater Catchment Systems Association http://www.arcsa.org ARCSA was founded to promote rainwater catchment systems in the U.S. The ARCSA website includes a compilation of publications such as the Texas Guide to Rainwater Harvesting. American Water Works Association, Water Wiser: The Water Efficiency Clearinghouse http://www.awwa.org/waterwiser%ao This web clearinghouse provides articles, reference materials, and papers on all forms of water efficiency. Environmental Building News,Water: Doing More with Less The site presents an article on building water efficiency. Fine Homelmilding, Choosing a Toilet This article includes several varieties of water-efficient toilets. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, National Climatic Data Center http://ww.ncdc.noaa.govioa/ncdc.html This site is useful for researching local climate data such as rainfall amounts. It also includes links to state climate offices. North Carolina Division of Pollution Prevention and Environmental Assistance, Water Efficiency Manual for Commercial, Industrial, and Institutional Facilities http://wwwpipays.orgrreficd/00692.pdf This straightforward manual on water efficiency draws from a number of different North Carolina governmental departments. Rocky Mountain Institute, Water http://www.rmi.org/sitepagesipidi 2.8.php This portion of RMI's website is devoted to water conservation and efficiency. The site contains information on watershed management and commercial, industrial, and institutional water use and articles on policy and implementation. WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 107 EFTA00281646 WE CI Prerequisite 1 Terry Love's Consumer Toilet Reports This Website offers a plumber's perspective on many of the major toilets used in commercial and residential applications. U.S. Department of Energy, Smart Communities Network http://ww.smartcommunities.ncat.org This project website provides information about water efficiency, national and regional water efficiency assistance programs, and links to additional resources. U.S. Department of the Interior, Water Measurement Manual: A Water Resources Technical Publication httpWwww.usbr.sovipmts/hydraulics_lab/pubs/wmm This publication is a guide to effective water measurement practices for better water management. U.S. EPA, How to Conserve Water and Use It Effectively http://wv.epa.gov/OWOWInps]chap3.html This document guides commercial, industrial, and residential water users in saving water and reducing sewage volumes. U.S. EPA, WaterSense http://wmvepa.goviwatersense The WaterSense Program helps U.S. consumers save water and protect the environment. Look for the WaterSense label to help choose high-quality, water-efficient products. Avariety of products are available, and they do not require a change in lifestyle. U.S. EPA, Water Use Efficiency Program http://wmvemgoviowmfwater-efficiency This website provides an overview of the program and information about using water more efficiently. Water Closet Performance Testing This site provides a reports on independent test results for a variety of toilets' flush performance and reliability. Print Media Constructed Wetlands for Wastewater Treatment and Wildlife Habitat: 17 Case Studies, PIMA fre --93-005 (U.S. SPA,1993). On-site Wastewater Treahnent Systems Manual (U.S. EPA, =02): bktp:fiwww.epnovinrmr1/ pubs/6acrocoofghtml/62AR00008.htm. This document provides a focused, performance-based approach to on-site wastewater treatment and system management aswell as valuable information on a varietyof on-site sewage treatment options. Water, Sanitary and Waste Services for Buildings, fifth edition, by A. Wise and J. Swaffield (Longman Scientific & Technical, t995). 13. Definitions An aquifer is an underground water-bearing rock formation or group of formations that supply groundwater, wells, or springs. Automatic fixture sensors are motion detectors that automatically turn on and turn off lavatories, sinks, water closets, and urinals. Sensors can be hard wired or battery operated. 108 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281647 Blackwater definitions vary, but wastewater from toilets and urinals is always considered blackwater. Wastewater from kitchen sinks (perhaps differentiated by the use of a garbage disposal), showers, or bathtubs is considered blacicwater under some state or local codes. Composting toilet system. See nonwater toilet system. Metering controls limit the flow time of water. They are generally manual-on and automatic-off devices, most commonly installed on lavatory faucets and showers. Nonpotable water. See potable water. Nonwater (or composting) toilet systems are dry plumbing fixtures and fittings that contain and treat human waste via microbiological processes. A nonwater (or dry) urinal, replaces a water flush with a trap containing a layer of buoyant liquid that floats above the urine, blocking sewer gas and odors. On-site wastewater treatment is the transport,storage,treatment,and disposal ofwastewater generated on the project site. Potable water meets or exceeds EPA's drinking water quality standards and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems. WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 109 EFTA00281648 110 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281649 WATER USE REDUCTION Credit WE Credit 1 Points 6-11 points Intent To further increase water efficiency within buildings to reduce the burden on municipal water supply and wastewater systems. Requirements Employ strategies that in aggregate use less water than the water use baseline calculated for the building (not including irrigation). The minimum water savings percentage for each point threshold is as follows: Percentage Reduction Points 30% 6 35% 8 40% 11 Calculate the baseline according to the commercial and/or residential baselines outlined below.' Calculations are based on estimated occupant usage and must include only the following fixtures and fixture fittings (as applicable to the project scope): water closets, urinals, lavatory faucets, showers, kitchen sink faucets and pre-rinse spray valves. Commercial Fixtures. Fittings, and Appliances Current Baseline Commercial toilets 1.6 gallons per flush (CPO. Except blow-cut fixtures: 3.5 (gpf) Commercial urinals 1.0 (gpf) Commercial lavatory (restroom) faucets 2.2 gallons per minute (gpm) at 60 pounds per square inch (psi). private applications only (hotel cc motel guest rooms, hospital patient rooms) 0.5 (gpm) at 60 (psi)" all others except private applications 0.25 gallons per cycle for metering faucets Commercial prerinse spray valves (for food service applications) Flow rates 1.6 (gpm) (no pressure specified; no performance requirement) Residential Fixtures, Fittings, and Appliances Current Baseline Residential toilets 1.6 fgpfr • • Residential lavatory (bathroom) faucets 2.2 (gpm) at 60 psi Residential kitchen faucet Residential showerheads 2.5 (gpm) at 80 (psi) per shower stall••••• ' EPAct 1992 standard for toilets applies to both commercial and residential models. " In addition to EPAct requirements, the American Society of Mechanical Engineers standard for public lavatory faucets is 0.5 gpm at 60 psi (ASME A112.18.1.2005). This maximum by been incorporated into the national Uniform Plumbing Cede and the International Plumbing Code. "' EPAct 1992 standard for toilets applies to both commercial and residential models. "" Residential shower compartment (stall) in dwelling units The total allowable flow rate from all having showerheads at any given lime. including rain systems. waterfalls, be4ysprays, bodyspas and jets. must be limited to the allowable showerhead flow rate as specified above 12.5 gm) per shower compartment, where the floor area of the shown compartment is less than 2.503 square inches. Fe, each increment of 2.500 square inches of floor area thereafter or part thereof. an additional slxwierhead with total allowable flow rate from all Cowing devices equal to than the allowable flew rate as specified abort must be allowed. Exception: Showers that emit recirculated nonpotabk water originating from within the skeet compartment while operating are allowed to exceed the maernum as long as the total potable water flow don rot <Acted the flow rate as specified above. I Tabby, Ebb reed from irdorm3t tE I:: E. tired by the ITES rnyi tenment41 Pre,. AtEetwt• 'EPEI of Watt, WE CREDIT 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 111 EFTA00281650 WE CREDIT 1 The following fixtures, fittings and appliances are outside the scope of the water use reduction calculation: ■ Commercial Steam Cookers ■ Commercial Dishwashers ■ Automatic Commercial Ice Makers ■ Commercial (family-sized) Clothes Washers ■ Residential Clothes Washers ■ Standard and Compact Residential Dishwashers 112 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281651 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider See the Benefits and Issues section in WE Prerequisite 1. 2. Related Credits See the Related Credits section in WE Prerequisite t. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards Seethe Referenced Standards section in WE Prerequisite t 4. Implementation See the Implementation section in WE Prerequisite t. 5. Timeline and Team See the Timeline and Team section in WE Prerequisite t. 6. Calculations See the Calculations section in WE Prerequisite 1. 7. Documentation Guidance See the Documentation Guidance section in WE Prerequisite t. 8. Examples See the Examples section in WE Prerequisite t. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an innovation point for exemplary performance by demonstrating 45% reduction in projected potable water use. 10. Regional Variations See the Regional Variations section in WE Prerequisite 1. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations See the Operations and Maintenance section in WE Prerequisite t. 12. Resources See the Operations and Maintenance section in WE Prerequisite 1. 13. Definitions See the Definitions section in WE Prerequisite 1. Endnotes ' Hutson, Susan S., Nancy L. Barber, Joan F. Kenny, Kristin S. Linsey, Deborah S. Lumia, and Molly A. Maupin. Estimated Use of Water in the United States in 2000. U.S. Geological Survey, 2004 http:// waterusgs.govfpubsicirc/2004/circt268/htdocsftext-trends.html (accessed May 2008). U.S. Geological Survey. "USGS Study Documents Water Level Changes in High Plains Aquifer." U.S. Geological Survey News Release, (February9, 2004). http://www.usgs.govinewsroomiarticle. asp?ID=121 (accessed May 20°8). 3 Solley, Wayne B., Robert R. Pierce, and Howard A. Perlman. Estimated Use of Water in the United States in 1995. U.S. Geological Survey, 1998. http:llwaterusgs.gov/watusefpdf1995fhtml (accessed May 20°8). WE CI Credit 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 113 EFTA00281652 WE 4 5 6 i3 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water. "List of Drinking Water Contaminants & MCLS.” http:fiwww.epa.govisafewater/mcl.html (accessed May 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Wastewater Management. Water Permitting 101. 2002. http:fiwww.epa.gov/npdes/pubshoipape.pdf (accessed May 2008). Ibid. Hutson, Susan S., Nancy L. Barber, Joan F. Kenny, Kristin S. Linsey, Deborah S. Lumia, and Molly A. Maupin. Estimated Use of Water in the United States in 2000. U.S. Geological Survey, 2004 hap:// water.usgs.gov/pubsicirc/2004/circ 1268/htdocsitext-trendshtml (accessed May 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Wastewater Management. Water Permitting 101. 2002. http:fiwww.epa.goWnpdes/pubshoipape.pdf (accessed May 2008). U.S. Green Building Council. "LEED Certified Project List." http:fiwww.usgbc.orgq..EED/Proj act/ CertffiedProjectList.aspx (accessed May 2008). Based on 650 building occupants, each using an average of 20 gallons per day. Knox III, Randy H. Case Study: Adobe's "Greenest Office in America" Sets the Bar for Corporate Environmentalism. U.S. Green Building Council. Sustainability/Articlesfanicle.cgi?USGBC:200707-16.html, (accessed November 2.008). Massachusetts Water Resources Authority "Water Efficiency and Management for Commercial Buildings." http://www.mwra.state.ma.us/04waterihtmlibultem.htm (accessed May 2008). Energy Information Administration. "1999 Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey?" Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey httpliwww.eia.doe.govlemeuicbecs/ background.html (accessed May2008). U.S. Department of Energy. "Water Efficiency: Water Efficiency Basics." http://wwwLeere.energy. govifempfwaterfwater_basics.html (accessed May2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, WaterSense. "Why Water Efficiency?" http://www.epa.govi owmfwater-efficiency/water/why.htm (accessed May 2.008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, WaterSense. "WaterSense." http://www.epa.govi watersense (accessed May 2008). Ibid. Energy Information Administration, "1999 Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey," Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey http:fiwww.eia.doe.govIemeufcbecs, (accessed May 2°08). 114 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281653 UMW MO Law Overview Buildings consume approximately 39% of the energy and 74% of the electricity produced annually in the United States, according to the U.S. Department of Energy.' Generating electricity from fossil fuels, such as oil, natural gas, and coal, negatively affects the environment at each step of production and use, beginning with extraction and transportation, followed by refining and distribution, and ending with consumption. For example, coal mining disrupts natural habitats and can devastate landscapes.Acidic mine drainage degrades regional ecosystems. Coal is rinsed with water,producing billions of gallons of sludge that must be stored in ponds. Mining itself is a dangerous occupation in which accidents and the long-term effects of breathing coal dust can shorten the life spans of coal miners. Electricity is most often generated by burning fossil fuels, whose combustion releases carbon dioxide and other greenhouse gases that contribute to climate change. Coal-fired plants accounted for more than half of U.S. electricity generation in 2006.3 Burning coal releases harmful pollutants, such as carbon dioxide, sulfur dicodde, nitrogen oxides, small particulate; and mercury. Each megawatt of coal-generated electricity releases into the atmosphere an average of 2,249 pounds of carbon dicodde, 13 pounds of sulfur dioxide, and 6 pounds of nitrogen oxides) More than 65% of the sulfur dioxide released into the air, or more than 13 million tons per year, comes from electricity generation, primarily coal-burning generators! Mining, processing, and transporting coal to power plants create additional emissions, including methane vented from the coal during transport. Natural gas, nuclear fission, and hydroelectric generators all have adverse environmental consequences as well. Natural gas is a major source of nitrogen oxide and greenhouse gas emissions. Nuclear power increases the potential for catastrophic accidents and raises significant waste transportation and disposal issues. Hydroelectric generating plants disrupt natural water flows and disturb aquatic habitats. Green buildings address those issues in two ways. First, they reduce the amount of energy required for building operations, and second, they use more benign forms of energy. The better the energy performance of a building, the fewer greenhouse gases are emitted from energy production. Electricity generation using sources other than fossil fuels also reduces the environmental impacts from a building's energy use. Additionally, improved energy performance results in lower operating costs. As global competition for fuels accelerates, the rate of return on energy efficiency measures improves. Energy Performance The energy performance of a commercial interior depends on both its design and that of the base building. Materials, construction methods, building envelope, and water efficiency as well as the heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) and lighting systems all play a role in determining how efficiently the building uses energy. The most effective way to optimize energy performance is to use an integrated, whole-building approach. Collaboration among all team members and base building operators, beginning at project inception, is necessary when designing for efficiency. The Energy and Atmosphere (EA) section of the LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Interior Design and Construction promotes three kinds of activities: EA OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 115 EFTA00281654 EA OVERVIEW Tracking Building Energy Performance—Design, Commissioning, Monitoring Projects that achieve any level of certification must at a minimum perform better than the average building. Specific levels of achievement beyond the minimum are awarded a proportional number of points. First, the commercial interior must be designed to operate at a high performance level. Next, it must be commissioned to ensure that the chosen systems are performing to meet the design intent. Third, a process for ongoing measurement and verification should be established to ensure continual,high-performance of tenant-operated energy systems. The design of new facility space must be based on the designated mandatory and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 9O.1-2OO7 or USGBC-approved local code, whichever is more stringent. In addition, optimization of building energy performance beyond ASHRAE 90.1-2007 is required in EA Prerequisite 2, Minimum Energy Performance. Documenting the energy performance of the commercial interior can be accomplished through building energy simulation modeling or prescriptive options. Commissioning begins with the development of the owner's project requirements, followed at a minimum by creation of a formal commissioning plan, verification of equipment installation, and submission of a final report. Enhanced commissioning includes additional tasks, such as design and contractor submittal reviews,creation of a formal systems manual,verification of stafftraining,and a follow-up review before the warranty period ends. Commissioning identifies inefficiencies in building systems and provides a starting point for optimizing energy and water efficiency. Adjusting these systems for maximum efficiency, in turn, minimizes the environmental impacts associated with energy and water use. Properly executed commissioning can substantially reduce costs for maintenance, repairs, and resource consumption and improve indoor environmental quality, enhancing occupants' productivity. For example, studies conducted at the Lawrence Berkeley National Lab suggest that commissioning and improved operations could save 20% of the energy used by existing buildingts Monitoring the performance of building systems begins with establishing a measurement and verification plan based on the best practices developed by the International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP). The plan must cover at least one year of postconstruction occupancy. Monitoring involves using appropriate measuring instruments and can include energy modeling. Managing Refrigerants to Eliminate CFCs The release ofchlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) from refrigeration equipment destroys ozone molecules in the stratosphere and reduces the ozone layer's ability to block harmful ultraviolet light from penetrating Earth's atmosphere. CFCs in the stratosphere also absorb infrared radiation and create chlorine, a potent greenhouse gas, further harming the atmosphere. Banning the use of CFCs in refrigerants slows the depletion of the ozone layer and mitigates climate change. Standard practice for commercial interiors is to install equipment that does not use CPC-based refrigerants. Using Renewable Energy Energy generation from renewable sources—such as solar, wind, and biomass—avoids air and water pollution and other environmental consequences associated with producing and consuming traditional fossil and nuclear fuels. Although hydropower is considered renewable, it can have harmful environmental effects, such as degrading water quality, altering fish and bird habitats, and endangering species. Low-impact hydropower, if available, is recommended. Renewable energy minimizes acid rain,smog, climate change,and human health problems resulting from air contaminants. In addition, using renewable resources avoids the consumption of fossil 116 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281655 fuels, the production of nuclear waste, and the environmentally damaging operation of hydropower dams. LEED for Commercial Interiors Approach to Energy and Atmosphere Because most commercial interiors projects occupy only a portion of a larger building, for which many energy-related decisions may have already been made, LEED for Commercial Interiors focuses on the individual tenant's options for energy efficiency, lighting, HVAC, appliances, and equipment. To support tenants' decisions to use renewable energy, LEED for Commercial Interiors offers incentive to purchase green power. Table t relates the timing of credit decisions and actions to the overall project schedule. CREDIT TITLE EA Prerequisite 1 EA Prerequisite 2 EA Prerequisite 3 EA Credit 1.1 EA Credit 1.2 EA Credit 1.3 EA Credit 1.4 EA Credit 2 EA Credit 3 EA Credit 4 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems Minimum Energy Performance Fundamental Refrigerant Management Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC Optimize Energy Performance—Equipment and Appliances Enhanced Commissioning Measurement and Verification Green Power EA OVERVIEW "21;LIY EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 117 EFTA00281656 118 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281657 FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING ENERGY SYSTEMS CI Prerequisite Points EA Prerequisite 1 Required Intent To verify that the project's energy-related systems are installed and calibrated to performing according to the owner's project requirements, basis of design and construction documents. Benefits of commissioning include reduced energy use, lower operating costs, fewer contractor callbacks, better building documentation, improved occupant productivity, and verification that the systems perform in accordance with the owner's project requirements. Requirements The following commissioning process activities must be completed by the project team: • Designate an individual as thecommissioning authority (CM) to lead, reviev,rand oversee the completion of the commissioning process activities. • The CM must have documented commissioning authority experience in at least 2. building projects. • The individual serving as the CM must be independent of the project's design and construction management, though the CxA may be an employee of any firms providing those services. The CxA may be a qualified employee or consultant of the owner. • The CM must report results, findings and recommendations directly to the owner. • For projects smaller than 5o,coo gross square feet, the CxA may be a qualified person on the design or construction teams who has the required experience. • The owner must document the owner's project requirements. The design team must develop the basis of design. The CM must review these documents for clarity and completeness. The owner and design team must be responsible for updates to their respective documents. • Develop and incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents. • Develop and implement a commissioning plan. • Verify the installation and performance of the systems to be commissioned. • Complete a summary• commissioning report. Commissioned Systems Commissioning process activities must be completed for the following energy-related systems at a minimum: • Heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration (H VAC&R) systems (mechanical and passive) and associated controls. • Lighting and daylighting controls. • Domestic hot water systems. • Renewable energy systems (e.g. PV, wind, solar). EA PREREQUISITE 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 119 EFTA00281658 EA CI Prerequisite 1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Benefits of commissioning include reduced energy use, lower operating costs, fewer contractor callbacks, better building documentation, improved occupant productivity, and verification that the systems perform in accordance with the owner's project requirements. Environmental Issues Facilities that do not perform as intended may consume significantly more resources over their lifetimes. Commissioning can minimize the negative impacts buildings have on the environment by helping verify that buildings are designed and constructed to operate as intended and in accordance with the owner's project requirements. Economic Issues If commissioning has not been previously included as part of the project delivery process, the costs associated with commissioning maybe met with initial resistance. When the long-term benefits are taken into consideration, however, commissioning can be seen as a cost-effective way to ensure that the building is functioning as designed and that the planned energy savings are realized. Improved occupant well-being and productivity are other potential benefits when building systems function as intended. Proper commissioning of building systems can reduce employee illness, tenant turnover and vacancy, and liability related to indoor air quality, and it can avoid premature equipment replacement. 2. Related Credits The commissioning effort can affect many performance-based features encouraged in the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System. Consider including the following features and systems in the commissioning effort: water efficiency and metering of plumbing fixtures, outdoor air delivery and monitoring, lighting, and thermal comfort systems. See Table 1 fora list of related credits. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this prerequisite. 4. Implementation Relationship between Fundamental and Enhanced Commissioning LEED for Commercial Interiors addresses building commissioning in z places: EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, and EA Credit a, Enhanced Commissioning. For LEED design and construction projects, the scope of services for the commissioning authority (CxA) and project team should be based on the owner's project requirements. The commissioning process activities must address the commissioned systems noted in the EA Prerequisite t requirements. Forcommercial interiorprojects,the scope canvarytremendously. Some may include only lighting systems, whereas others may include all HVAC, service water, and lighting systems. EA Credit a requires that the commissioning authority be involved early in the process to help facilitate a commissioning design review and a commissioning documentation review. As the project nears completion, enhanced commissioning requires oversight of staff training, a walk-through 8 to to months after completion, and the completion of a systems manual. 120 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281659 Table 1. Potential Systems to Be Commissioned. as Applicable Systems Prerequisites and Credits Potential Commissioning Activities Heating, ventilating. air-conditioning, and refrigeration systems, both mechanical and passive, and associated controls EA Prerequisite 2. Mandatory provisions and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 have been met. EA Prerequisite 3, No CFC in newly purchased equipment. EA Credit 1.3, Option 1. HVAC equipment sized on actual loads: mechanical equipment meets enhanced efficiency standards: use of variable speed controls; appropriate zoning and controls. EA Credit 1.3, Option 2. Same as EA Prerequisite 2. IEQ Prerequisite 1. Ventilation is compliant with ANSWASHRAE 62.1-2007. 'Da Prerequisite 2. Option 2. Designated smoking rooms verification requirements. lEll Prerequisite 2. Option 3. Residential facilities: test results of air leakage and air sampling. lEll Credit 1, Functioning outdoor air monitoring system. 'Da Credit 2, Mechanical systems: air testing and balance confirm increased ventilation rates. Passive systems: minimum flow rates are set and met. 'Da Credit 3.1, Filtration media replacement. IEQ Credit 5, Exhaust system in areas where hazardous gases or chemicals are present, MERV 13 air filtration media. IEQ Credit 6.2, Functioning controllability for temperature and ventilation. IEQ Credit 7.1, HVAC system and control systems meet ANSUASHRAE 55-2004 requirements. IEQ Credit 7.2, Monitoring system function. ID Credit 1. If applicable. UgMIng controls, Including daylightIng SS Credit 1. Option 6. Existing building, site. and project lighting designs comply with requirements. EA Prerequisite 2, Mandatory provisions and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 have been met. EA Credit LI, ASHRAE 90.1-2007 compliance documentation. EA Credit L2. Functioning daylight responsive controls. IEQ Credit 8.1. Daylighting requirements are met. ID Credit 1. If applicable. Domestic hot water systems IECI Prerequisite 2. Mandatory provisions and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 have been met. ID Credit 1. If applicable. Renewable energy systems (wind, solar, etc.) SS Credit 1. Option 11. On-site renewable energy performance. 5. Timeline and Team The commissioning process is a planned, systematic quality-control process that involves the owner, users, occupants, operations and maintenance staff, design professionals, and contractors. It is most effective when begun at project inception. All members ofthe project team are encouraged to participate in the commissioning activities as part of a larger commissioning team. The team approach to commissioning can speed the process and add a system of checks and balances. The overall commissioning effort identified in both EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, and EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, is shown below in Table 2 as divided into 12 basic steps. The steps are presented in sequential order; however, some tasks can begin at various points in the project or be completed at various points in the project. For example, the development of the commissioning plan may begin in the design phase, have multiple updates during the project, and be considered completed at some point during the construction phase. CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 121 EFTA00281660 EA CI Prerequisite 1 Some of the steps shown below are required for EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, and some are required for EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning. Table a outlines the commissioning tasks, the team members primarily responsible for performing each project requirement, and the requirements common to EA Prerequisite 1 and EA Credit a. Table 2. Tasks and Responsibilities for EA Prerequisite 1 and EA Credit 2 Project Phases Commissioning Tasks (Steps 1-12) I Rating System Tasks Fundamental Enhanced Redesign, Design Phase Request for proposal Architect and engineer selection 1. Designate commissioning authority (CxA) EA Prerequisite 1. Task 1 EA Credit 2, Task 1 Owner or project team Owner or project team Owners project requirements, basis of design 2. Document owner's project requirements: Develop basis of design EA Prerequisite 1. Task 2 Owner or Cxr Design team Owner or UR' Design team Schematic design 3. Review owner's project requirements and basis of design EA Prerequisite 1. Task 2 EA Credit 2, Task 2 CAA'• CxA Design development 4. Develop and implement Cx plan EA Prerequisite 1. Task 4 Project team or Cyr Project team or CxA Construction documents 5. Incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents EA Prerequisite 1, Task 3 Project team or Cyr Project team or CxA 6. Conduct commissioning design review prior to midconstruction documents EA Credit 2, Task 2 N/A CzA Construction phase Equipment procurement Equipment installation 7. Review contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned EA Credit 2, Task 3 NfA CxA Functional testing Test and balance Performance testing acceptance 8. Verify installation ce of and performan commissioned systems EA Prerequisite 1, Task 5 CxA INA Operations and .. maintenance (m) manuals 9. Develop systems manual for commissioned systems EA Credit 2, Task 4 N/A Project team or CxA training 10. Verify that requirements for training are completed EA Credit 2, Task 2 N/A Project team or CxA Substantial completion 11.Complete a summary commissioning report EA Prerequisite 1, Task 6 CxA CxA W7 Systems monitoring 12. Review building operation within 8 to 10 months after substantial completion EA Credit 2, Task 6 N/A CxA 'Although EA Prerequisite does not require the Cut to be on the ctoiecl team until just beta the equipment installation phase. if brought in earlier, he a she can also help the owner develop the project requeements and assist with other important commissioning tasks. "Some commissioning tasks can be performed by the crane a other project team members. flowerer. the review of the owner's project requirements and basis of design must be performed by the C&A. Fir EA Prerequisite I. Fundamental Commissioning. this may be performed at any time before verification of equipment installation and acceptance. STEP 1 Designate an individual as the commissioning authority (CxA) to lead, review and oversee the completion of the commissioning process activities. Ideally, the project team should designate an individual as the CxA as early as possible in the 122 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281661 project timeline, preferably during predesign. The qualified individual designated as the CxA serves as an objective advocate for the owner and is responsible for the following: • Directing the commissioning team and process in the completion of the commissioning requirements. • Coordinating, overseeing, and/or performing the commissioning testing. • Reviewing the results of the systems performance verification. For LEED projects, a qualified CxA should have experience with 2 other projects of similar managerial and technical complexity. The owner maywant to specify additional qualifications for the CxA,dependingon the scope and nature of the commissioning. CxA certification programs are administered by various industry groups. For projects larger than 50,000 square feet, the individual serving as the CxA on a LEED project must be independent of the project's design and construction teams. The CxA may be a qualified staff member of the owner, an owner's consultant to the project, or an employee of a firm providing design and/or construction management services. The CxA may not, however, have responsibility for design (e.g., be the engineer of record) or for construction. The CxA must report results, findings, and recommendations directly to the owner. For projects smaller than 50,000 square feet, the CxA may be a qualified staff member of the owner, an owner's consultant to the project, or an individual on the design or construction team (such as the engineer of record) and may have additional project responsibilities beyond leading the commissioning services. For projects pursuing EA Credit 3, Enhanced Commissioning, the CxA may not be an employee of the design firm but maybe contracted through this firm. Table 3. Commissioning Authority Qualifications Party Acting as Commissioning Authority (CrA) Fundamental Commissioning Prerecousite,,t , Enhanced Commissioning Credit“, < 50.000 (sf) s 50.000 (sf) Employee or subcontractor of general contractor with construction responsibilities Yes Employee or subcontractor, with construction responsibilities. of construction manager who holds constructor contracts Yes Employee or subcontractor, with project design responsibilities, of the architect or engineer of record Yes Disinterested employee or subcontractor ofceneral contractor or construction manager' Yes Yes Disinterested employee of architect or engineer' Yes Yes Disinterested subcontractor to architect or engineer' Yes Yes Yes Construction manager not holding constructor contracts Yes Yes Yes Independent consultant contracted to Owner Yes Yes Yes Owner employee or staff Yes Yes Yes "Disinterested' means an employee or subcontractor who has no projec responsibilities other than commissioning. ' EA Prerequisite I requirements (see Table I above). ' DICredit 3 requirements (the CAA must review the owner's project requirements. basis of design, and design documents prior to mickonstruction documents phase and perform a back check). 4 The wile Cusi worming the enhanced commissioning tasks must also OM S« the fundamental commissioning tat. ' Regardless of ea employs the CaA, he or she 'shall hart documented commissioning authority evenence in at least two building projects' and idealty meet the minimum qualif *whew of hawing "a high level of experience in energy systems design. nista/When and operation. commissioning planning and process management. hands-on held experience with energy systems performance. interaction. startup. balancing testirg. troubleshooting, operation, and maintenance procedures and energy systems automation control knowledge." (From "Who Can Be the Commissioning Authority?" 01103106 LEED 2.2 Commissioning Subcommittee. posted under LEED Reference Documents. blipitaanzianarat I EA CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 123 EFTA00281662 EA CI Prerequisite 1 STEP 2 The owner must document the owner's project requirements for the fit-out project. The design team must develop the basis of design. The owner and design team are responsible for updates to their respective documents. Clear and concise documentation of the owner's project requirements and the basis of design is a valuable part of any successful project delivery and commissioning process. These documents are used throughout the commissioning process to provide a baseline and focus for validating systems' energy and environmental performance. Owner's Project Requirements The owner's project requirements must be completed by the owner, CxA, and project team prior to the approval of contractor submittals of any commissioned equipment or systems. Updates during the design and construction process are the primary responsibility of the owner. The owner's project requirements should detail the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of the building's use and operation as they relate to the systems to be commissioned. The owner's project requirements should address the following issues, as applicable to the project Owner and user requirements Describe the primary purpose, program, and use of the proposed project (e.g., office building with data center, academic building addition and new gymnasium) and any pertinent project history. Provide anyoverarchinggoals relative to program needs,future expansion,fledbility, quality of materials, and construction and operational costs. Environmental and sustainability goals Describe any specific environmental or sustainability goals (e.g., LEED certification). Energy efficiency goals Describe overall project energy efficiency goals relative to the local energy code, ASHRAE standard,or LEED. Describe any goals or requirements forbuildingorientation, landscaping, façade, fenestration, envelope and roof features that will affect energy use. Indoor environmental quality requirements For each program or area, describe the intended use, anticipated occupancy schedules, space environmental requirements (including lighting, temperature, humidity, acoustics, air quality, and ventilation), desired adjustability of system controls, and accommodations for after-hours use. Equipment and system expectations Describe the desired level ofquality, reliability,type,automation,fledbility,and maintenance requirements for each of the systems to be commissioned. When known, provide specific efficiency targets, desired technologies, or preferred manufacturers for building systems. Building occupant and MI personnel requirements Describe how the facilitywill be operated and bywhom. Describe the desired level of training and orientation required for the building occupants to understand and use the building systems. Basis of Design The design team must document the basis of design for the systems to be commissioned prior to approval of contractor submittals of any commissioned equipment or systems. Updates to this 124 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281663 document during the design and construction process are the responsibility of the design team. The basis of design describes the systems to be commissioned and outlines any design CI assumptions that are not otherwise included in the design documents. It should be updated with each subsequent design submission, with increasing specificity as applicable. The basis of design should include the following, as applicable: Primary design assumptions Include space use, redundancy, diversity, climatic design conditions, space zoning, occupancy, operations, and space environmental requirements. EA Standards Include applicable codes, guidelines, regulations, and other references that will be put into practice. Narrative descriptions Include performance criteria for the HVAC&R systems, lighting systems, hot water systems, on-site power systems, and other systems to be commissioned. STEP 3 The CxA must review the owner's project requirements and the basis of design for clarity and completeness. The owner and design team are responsible for updates to their respective documents. The CxA must ensure that the basis of design reflects the owner's project requirements. Both documents must be reviewed by the CxA for completeness prior to the approval of contractor submittals of any commissioned equipment or systems. STEP 4 Develop and implement a commissioning plan. Unique to a particular project, the commissioning plan is the reference document that identifies the strategies, aspects, and responsibilities within the commissioning process for each phase of a project, for all of the project team members. This document outlines the overall process, schedule,organization, responsibilities, and documentation requirements ofthe commissioning process. The commissioning plan is developed at the start of the commissioning process, preferably during design development, and is updated during the course of a project to reflect any changes in planning, schedule, or other aspects. The following list outlines required components of the commissioning plan. • Commissioning Program Overview • Goals and objectives. • General project information. • Systems to be commissioned. ■ Commissioning Team • Team members, roles, and responsibilities. • Communication protocol, coordination, meetings, and management. ■ Commissioning Process Activities Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 125 EFTA00281664 EA CI Prerequisite 1 • Documenting the owner's project requirements. • Preparing the basis of design. • Developing systems functional test procedures. • Verifying systems performance. • Reporting deficiencies and the resolution process. • Accepting the building systems. Project teams pursuing the enhanced commissioning credit (EA Credit a) may need to expand the commissioning plan to include the following commissioning process activities: ■ Documenting the commissioning review process ■ Reviewing contractor submittals. ■ Developing the systems manual. ■ Verifying the training of operations personnel. ■ Reviewing building operation after final acceptance. Table 4. Required Commissioning Plan Components Required Commissioning Plan Components Brief overview of commissioning process. List of all systems and assemblies included in commissioning authority's scope of work. Identification of commissioning team and its responsibilities. Description of management. communication, and reporting of commissioning process. Overview of commissioning process activities for predesign, design, construction, and occupancy and operations phases. including development of owner's project requirements, review of basis of design, schematic design, construction documents and submittals, construction phase verification, functional performance test development and implementation. and 10-month warranty review. List of expected work products. List of commissioning process milestones. STEP 5 Develop and incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents. Typically, the project specifications are used to inform contractors of their responsibilities in the commissioning process. These specifications may describe the components listed in Table S. Often, all commissioning requirements are outlined in a section of the general conditions of the construction specifications. Placing all commissioning requirements in a single location gives responsibility for commissioning work to the general contractor, who can then assign responsibility to subcontractors. It is also valuable to refer to commissioning requirements on the drawings, in any bid forms, and in specification sections related to the systems to be commissioned. 126 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281665 Table 5. Commissioning Requirements for Construction Documents Commissioning team involvement. Contractors' responsibilities. Submittal review procedures for commissioned systems. Operations and maintenance documentation, system manuals. Meetings. Constniction verification procedures. Startup plan development and implementation. Functional performance testing. Acceptance and closeout. Training. Warranty review site visit. STEP 6 The CxA should conduct at least t commissioning deign review of the owner's project requirements, basis of design, and design documents prior to midconstniction documents phase and back-check the review comments in the subsequent design submission. This step is required by EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. The CxA should reviewthe owner's project requirements, basis of design, and design documents to give the owner and design team an independent assessment of the state of the design for the commissioned systems. Typically,a design reviewperformedbythe CxA focuses on the following issues: ■ Ensuring clarity, completeness, and adequacy of the owner's project requirements. ■ Verifying that all issues discussed in the owner's project requirements are addressed adequately in basis of design. ■ Reviewing design documents for achieving the owner's project requirements and basis of design and coordination of commissioned systems. Additional reviews by the eth throughout the design and construction process maybe advisable and appropriate depending on the project duration, phasing, and complexity. STEP 7 The CxA should review contractor submittals applicable to the systems being commissioned for compliance with the owner's project requirements and basis of design. This review must be concurrent with the architect's or engineer's reviews and submitted to the design team and the owner. This step is required by EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. The CxA should review the contractor submittals and identify any issues that might otherwise result in rework or change orders. The CxA should specifically evaluate the submittals for the following: ■ Conformance with the owner's project requirements and basis of design. is Fulfilling operations and maintenance requirements. is Facilitating performance testing. EA CI Prerequisite 1 209 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 127 EFTA00281666 EA CI Prerequisite 1 The CxA review of contractor submittals does not typically replace or alter the scope or responsibility of the design team's role in approving submittals. STEP 8 Verify the Installation andPerformance of the Systems to be Commissioned. Commissioning is conducted to verifythe performance ofcommissioned systems as installed to meet the owner's project requirements, basis of design, and contract documents. Verification of the installation and performance of commissioned systems typically includes 3 steps for each commissioned system: installation inspection, performance testing, and the evaluation of results compared with owner's project requirements and the basis of design. ■ Installation inspections (sometimes called prefunctional inspections) are a systematic set of procedures intended to identify whether individual system components have been installed properly. Often this process occurs at startup of individual units ofequipment and may use "prefunctional checklists" or "startup and checkout forms" to ensure consistency in the inspections and document the process. Installation inspections may be performed by the CxA, the installing contractor, or others, depending on the procedures outlined in the commissioning plan. Installation inspections provide quality control to ensure that relatively minor issues (e.g., an improperly wired sensor, a control valve installed backward) are discovered and corrected prior to systems performance testing. ■ Systems performance testing (sometimes called functional performance testing) occurs once all system components are installed, energized, programmed, balanced, and otherwise ready for operation underpart-and full-load conditions. Testing should include each process in the sequence of operations under central and packaged equipment control, including startup, shutdown, capacity modulation, emergency and failure modes, alarms, and interlocks to other equipment Systems performance testing typically relies on testing procedures developed by the CxA specifically for the system to be tested. A wide variety of methods may be used to simulate and evaluate that the system being tested performs as expected (per the owner's project requirements, basis of design, and contract documents) in all modes of operation. Systems performance testing may be performed by some combination of the CxA, the installing contractor, and others, depending on the procedures outlined in the commissioning specifications and the commissioning plan. It may reveal problems with the performance of the commissioned systems and may require significant follow-up and coordination among members of the project team. ■ Evaluation of results is the final step. At each point in the process of installation inspections and systems performance testing the CxA should evaluate whether the installed systems meet the criteria for the project as set forth in the owner's project requirements and the basis of design documents. Any discrepancies or deficiencies should be reported to the owner, and the team should work collaboratively to find an appropriate resolution. STEP 9 Develop a systems manual that gives future operating staffthe information needed to understand and optimally operate the commissioned systems. This step is required by EA Credit a, Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. Provide a systems manual in addition to the manuals submitted by the contractor. The 128 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281667 systems manual generally focuses on operating rather than maintaining the equipment, particularly the interactions. The systems manual should include the following for each commissioned system: ■ Final version of the basis of design. ■ System single-line diagrams. ■ As-built sequences of operations, control drawings, and original setpoints. ■ Operating instructions for integrated building systems. ■ Recommended schedule of maintenance requirements and frequency, if not already included in the project manuals. • Recommended schedule for retesting of commissioned systems with blank test forms from the original commissioning plan. • Recommended schedule for calibrating sensors and actuators. STEP 10 Verify that the requirements for training operating personnel and building occupants have been completed. This step is required by EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. Establish anddocument trainingupc-Ltations and needswith thetenant.Manycommontraining topics are listed in Table 6. Ensure that operations staff and occupants receive this training and orientation. Pay particular attention to new or uncommon sustainable design features that could be overridden or removed because of a lack of understanding. Document that the training was completed according to the contract documents. Have a contract in place to review tenant space operation with staff and occupants, including a plan for resolution of outstanding commissioning-related issues 8 to so months after substantial completion. Table 6. Common Training Topics Common Training Topics m E m . I" a General purpose of system (design intent). Use of manuals. Review of control drawings and schematics. Startup, normal operation, shutdown, unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, manual operation, control setup and programming troubleshooting. and alarms. Interactions with other systems. Adjustments and optimizing methods for energy conservation. Health and safety issues. Special maintenance and replacement sources. Occupant interaction issues. System response to different operating conditions. STEP 11 Complete a summary commissioning report. After installation inspections and performance verification items have been completed, the results are tabulated and assembled into a commissioning report. Supporting information can be compiled as a Cx record but is not required in the summary. EA CI Prerequisite 1 2CO9 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 129 EFTA00281668 EA CI Prerequisite 1 The summary commissioning report should include the following: ■ Executive summaryofthe process and the results ofthe commissioning program,including observations, conclusions, and any outstanding items. ■ History of any system deficiencies identified and how they were resolved, including any outstanding issues or seasonal testing scheduled fora later date. ■ Systems performance test results and evaluation. ■ Confirmation from the CxA indicating whether individual systems meet the owner's project requirements, basis of design, and contract documents. In addition, for projects pursuing EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, the summary commissioning report should include the following: ■ Summary of the design review process. ■ Summary of the submittal review process. ■ Summary of the= documentation and training process. Table 7. Commissioning Report Components Commissioning Report Components Owner's project requirements. Project commissioning specifications. Verification of installation (construction checklist). Functional performance testing results and forms. documentation evaluation (EA Credit 2). Training program evaluation (EA Credit 2). Description of commissioning process benefits. Outstanding issues. Contract and plan for resolution within 8 to 10 months of substantial completion (EA Credit 2). STEP 12 Ensure the involvement by the CxA in reviewing building operation within to months after substantial completion with staff and occupants. Include a plan for resolving outstanding issues. This step is required by EA Credit 2., Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of the Building Energy Systems. The CxA should coordinate with the owner and the = staff to review the tenant space and its performance 8 to to months after substantial completion. MI unresolved construction deficiencies as well as any deficiencies identified in this postoccupancy review should be documented and corrected under manufacturer or contractor warranties. The CxA review of the building operation with operations staff and occupants should identify any problems in operating the building as originally intended. Any significant issues identified by the CxA that will not be corrected should be recorded in the systems manual. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this prerequisite. 130 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281669 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Update the commissioning plan at milestones throughout the project. This should happen, at a minimum, during the design development phase, the construction documents phase, and just prior to the kick-off meeting with the general contractor. • Prepare a systems list that indicates which systems have been included within the scope of enhanced commissioning. • Obtain confirmation that the commissioning authority has documented experience on at least 2 building projects. • Retain copies of the owner's project requirements, basis of design, commissioning specifications, commissioning report, and systems manual. 8. Examples EXAMPLE 1 The example below demonstrates the interconnectedness of the owner's project requirements, basis of design, construction documents, commissioning plan, commissioning report, and systems manual. Building Commissioning Documents Evinces agent (a the project Owner's Project Require/kilts WPM • Intr.:Out nen • Key Requirement, (inCludne LEW credit requirements) • Project ScopetObasclues (includingsystems to to commissioned) • FunCtiOnal SOLOS • Occupancy • Budget Console:ration • Performance Criteria lineaSureable and veoltitle) • OPR RINISIC0 History Ammo °doom 0,207) mom ; Updates and Revisions Systems Manual • Final BOO • S'istem Single line siren • Asibuill Sealant. Or 0Otratien. set polls. etc. • System operating instructions • Maintenance schedule • Relating Saitidulti (Can also Include OPR. WOO keeping procedures. optimizatKei guidance. trainang MattkIBIS. and COMMiSPOnirg WOKS WWI) What is needed to implement the OPR Basis of Design (BOD) • Systems and Asstrriblim • Peck/manta CritenWASSumptiOnS • OOStrilitena Cu, erreelope. HVAC. elects tcz water. other) • Governing Codes and St.. • Nam Directites • Dew Dere/00ment Gin oil (conc.:pm. calcukcions, decisions. end product Stitt lions) • 800 ReviSiOn History ApiPAE GwIttiie 0,2005 NO., r • upostesera Reasons Commissioning Plan • Cheraw., • Commnsortng Team • Desciiption ol Commissromno PrOckS1 ACtrolte6 (by project ol‘SW6 - prdwien, design. comtruction. occupancy) • Schedules (Update tIvoughsai prorectl sanest {Harr. 0.2005 ARM1R g litolatol Ind RenSiOnS WHOA( OPanifing Pion *wow% Operating Retwortmen10 EA PaeitOudite 1 fOr LEED br Existing Buildings: Operatices Maintenance How the OPR will be Oyite/y aChtWE Construction Documents (CD's) • General Cctonir.ssonaig RequirerneMs (The commissioning requirements specified in Dinsion I) • Specific ROkUkkinkentS Specific commissioning requirements specified in each of the Other appacable &WOOS Ol the project specific:lions S., Imo coimmsemns coireinerns m Corson:Ins :.,ntrkas) Issues Leg Commissioning Report • Erecolioe Summary • Deficiency ReSOlutiOnS • Systems Federman° Te,7 Results and Evaluation IYay sin emge Sarong oil “.^.^..mN ;ea.. scimls • ma htillittOs tnrAntent01 lastk. Mil 4rd toTante. ful(001$ kilt MI iv amid,. ard Pinup, EA CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 131 EFTA00281670 EA CI Prerequisite I EXAMPLE 2. Report Outline The outline below is a guide for what can be included in the summary commissioning report. There is no required order of presentation, only that these primary report components (applicable to the commissioning scope) are included in the report. The final report that goes to the owner should include copies of issue and testing logs, meeting minutes, and interim process reports. Summary Commissioning Report Executive Summary Provide a briefdescription ofproject (size,spacetypes,occupancy, etc.), highlighting commissioning goals. Provide a brief narrative on the scope of commissioning, highlighting the systems to be commissioned, process activities, and examples of significant issues: 1. Predesign activities (if any) z. Design activities (if any) 3. Construction activities 4. Postoccupancy activities (if any) Highlight any significant systemic issues that were uncovered during the commissioning process. Provide recommendations for future project commissioning activities. Deficiency Resolution Provide a more detailed summary of the types of issues uncovered and how they were resolved. These issues are best presented in order of project phases (e.g., during design, during construction). A copy of the issues log is typically included as an appendix. Systems Performance Test Results and Evaluation Summarize observations on test results and evaluations for prefunctional tests, test and balance, functional tests, and postoccupancy testing (if applicable). 9. Exemplary Performance This prerequisite is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations The significance ofcommissioningtaslcs mayvarywiththe climate. For example,in northern regions, the functioning of heating systems, such as boilers, is a critical issue. Suboptimal performance for heating systems in northern climates can result in high utility bills, wasted energy, and added emissions. In the Southeast, humidity is an important consideration. Here, the introduction of hot, humid outside air must be controlled, and suboptimal performance for cooling systems could raise utilitybills. In other regions of the country, equipment such as economizers and evaporative cooling will be used for extended periods and must function correctly. Regional climates tend to drive the selection of systems and the associated commissioning and maintenance decisions. For example, including the commissioning of the building envelope maybe 132 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281671 more important in certain regions than in others. Adding the commissioning of water systems may be important in arid regions. Regardless of the types of equipment selected, each project can greatly benefit from a systematic approach to ensuring that the right equipment and systems are specified, ordered, installed, and tested to ensure proper operation and performance. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations So that building systems operate effectively for the life of the building, use the commissioning process and outcomes to develop documents that will help facility managers run the building in a manner consistent with the design intent and equipment specifications. These documents should include the following: ■ Building operating plan (owner's operating requirements). This plan defines the delivered conditions required by building management and occupants for the successful operation of a building. It identifies the spaces, uses, occupancy types, and required conditions. It includes the time-of-day schedules of every system, the mode of operation for each system when it is running, and the desired indoor conditions or setpoints for each schedule or mode. This information is initially developed in the basis of design. ■ Systems narrative. The systems narrative is a summary description of each of the following types of base building systems installed in the project building: space heating, space cooling, ventilation, domestic water heating, humidification and/or dehumidification, and lighting. The description should include summaries of the central plant, distribution, and terminal units, as applicable, as well as the controls associated with these systems. ■ Sequence of operations. The sequence of operations represents system-level documentation that defines what operational states are desired under whatconditions. This can includewhich systems are running or idle; whether operations are full-load or part-load; staging or cycling of compressors, fans, or pumps; proper valve positions; desired system water temperatures and duct static air pressures, depending on other variables (e.g., outside air temperatures, room air temperatures, and/or relative humidity); and any reset schedules or occupancy schedules. The sequence of operations should include specific information on operating phases (warm-up, occupied, unoccupied), setpoints and controls, and feedback systems to monitor performance. ■ Commissioning report. Ensure that the commissioning report adequately identifies problems that are likely to reemerge or merit particular attention on an ongoing basis. Ensure that the commissioning report adequately identifies problems that are likely to reemerge or merit particular attention on an ongoing basis. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers http://wwt.v.ashrae.org ASHRAE advances the science of heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and refrigeration for the public's benefit through research, standards writing, continuing education, and publications. According to the ASHRAE website, "membership is open to any person associated with the field including indoor air quality, building design and operation, and environmental control for food processing and industry." EA CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 133 EFTA00281672 EA CI Prerequisite 1 Building Commissioning Association http://vnvw.boca.orgiresourcesfindahtrn BCxA promotes building commissioning practices that maintain high professional standards and fulfill buildingowners' expectations. The association offers a5-day intensive course focused on how to implement the commissioning process and that is intended for commissioning authorities with at least 2 years of experience. California Commissioning Collaborative http:(/www.cacx.org The California Commissioning Collaborative is agroup ofgovemment, utility,and building senrices professionals committed to developing and promoting viable building commissioning practices in California. Its online library, available at hs- tp://resources.cacx.orgilibraryb has more than 300 resources, including articles, papers, guides, and sample commissioning documents. California Department of General Services, Division of the State Architect, Adopting the Commissioning Process for the Successful Procurement of Schools http://www.chps.netilinks/pdfs/CominissioningProcessGuide.pdf According to its publisher, this guide is"intended to be used by school districts, programmers, design professionals, contractors, operations and maintenance personnel, and commissioning authorities to understand the commissioning process and their role in it." Energy Design Resources, Cx Assistant Commissioning Tool This web-based tool provides project-specific building commissioning information to design teams and enables users to evaluate probable commissioning cost, identify appropriate commissioning scope, and access project-related sample commissioning specifications. Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, The Cost-Effectiveness of Commercial Buildings Commissioning: A Meta-Analysis of Existing Buildings and New Construction in the United States http:Thetd.lbl.goviemills/PUBS/Cx-Costs-Benefits.html Oregon Office of Energy, Commissioning for Better Buildings in Oregon http://egov.oregon.go_WENERGY/CONS/BUS/commfbldgoc.shtml This website and document of the same name contain a comprehensive introduction to the commissioning process, including research, financial benefits, and case studies. Portland Energy Conservation Inc. http://www.peci.org PECI develops the field for commissioning services by helping building owners understand the value of commissioning and by producing process and technical information for commissioning providers. Their focus includes owners of private and public buildings and a range of building types. PECI manages the annual National Conference on Building Commissioning. University of Wisconsin, Madison, Department of Engineering Professional Development http://www.engr.wisc.edu This program offers commissioning process training courses for building owners, architects, engineers, operations and maintenance staff, and other interested parties. The program also offers accreditation of commissioning process providers and managers. Print Media ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005: The Commissioning Process (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, 2005). httpWwww.ashrae.org. 134 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281673 ASHRAE Guideline 1-1996: The HVAC Commissioning Process, (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,1996). http://www.ashrae.org. ASHRAE Guideline 4-1993: Preparation of Operations & Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,1993). http:// www.ashrae.org. The Building Commissioning Handbook, second edition, by John A. Heinz and Rick Casault (Building Commissioning Association, 2004). Commissioning Fact Sheets (Collaborative of High Performance Schools). http:ffivww.chps.net/ manual These fact sheets explore how can help school districts ensure their schools are built to high performance standards. Model Commissioning Plan and Guide Specifications (Portland Energy Conservation Inc,1998). Building Commissioning Guide, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Federal Energy Management Program (U.S. Department of Energy). http://www.eere.energy.goy. Commissioning for Better Buildings in Oregon (Oregon Office of Energy, 2007). http://ggov.oregoi gov/ENERGY/CONS/BUS/commibldgc l. PECI Model Building Commissioning Plan and Guide Specifications (Portland Energy Conservation Inc.). http://www.peci.org. 13. Definitions Basis of design includes design information necessary to accomplish the owner's project requirements, including system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes, standards, regulations, and guidelines. Commissioning (Cx) is the process of verifying and documenting that a building and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner's project requirements. The commissioning authority (CxA) is the individual designated to organize, lead, and review the completion of commissioning process activities. The CxA facilitates communication among the owner, designer, and contractor to ensure that complex systems are installed and function in accordance with the owner's project requirements. The commissioning plan is a document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. The commissioning process is a systematic quality-focused effort to ensure that building systems are designed, specified, procured, installed, and functioning in accordance with the owner's intent. The process uses planning, documentation, and verification of testing to review and oversee the activities of both designer and constructor. The commissioning report documents the commissioning process, including a commissioning program overview, identification of the commissioning team, and description ofthe commissioning process activities. Commissioning specification is the contract language used in the construction documents to detail the objective, scope, and implementation of the construction and acceptance phases of the commissioning process as developed in the design phase of the commissioning plan. This allows the construction contractor to ensure that these activities are considered in proposals for the construction work. EA CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 135 EFTA00281674 EA CI Prerequisite 1 The commissioning team includes those people responsible for working together to carry out the commissioning process. An installation inspection examines components of the building systems to determine whether they are installed properly and ready for systems performance testing. Owner's project requirements is a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria that are determined by the owner to be important to the success of the project. Systems performance testing is the process ofdeterrnining the ability of commissioned systems to perform in accordance with the owner's project requirements, the basis of design, and construction documents. Verification is the range of checks and tests carried out to determine whether components, subsystems, systems, and interfaces between systems operate in accordance with the contract documents. 136 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281675 MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE a Prerequisite EA Prerequisite 2 Points Required Intent To establish the minimum level of energy efficiency for the tenant space systems to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirements Design portions of the building as covered by the tenant's scope of work to comply with ANSI/ ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'), and complete the following: ■ Comply with the mandatory provisions (Sections 54 6.4, 74 84 94 and 10.4) of ANSI/ ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'). ■ Achieve the prescriptive requirements (Sections 5.5, 6.5, 7.5 and 9.5) or performance requirements (Section It) of ANSI/ASHRAWIESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'). ■ Reduce connected lighting power density so% below that allowed by ANSI/ASHRAE/ IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda') using either the Space-by- Space Method or by applying the whole building lighting power allowance to the entire tenant space. • Install ENERGY STARtqualified equipment for 50% (by rated-power) of ENERGY STAR eligible equipment.' installed as part of the tenant's scope of work. This requirement includes appliances, office equipment, electronics, and commercial food service equipment. Excluded are heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC), lighting, and building envelope products. Projects in California may use Title 24-2005, Part 6 in place ofANSI/ASHRAPIESNA Standard 90.1-2007. Project teams wishing to use ASIIRAE approved addenda for the purFoses ofthis crcdit maydo so at theirdiscretioc. Addenda must be applied amsLstently aalIIS all LEED mats EA PREREQUISITE 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 137 EFTA00281676 EA CI Prerequisite 2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The process of extracting and consuming energy from fossil fuels causes many negative environmental impacts, including air and water pollution, land degradation, solid waste generation, and rising greenhouse gas emissions. Fossil fuel-based energy use causes climate change as well as serious risks to environmental and human health and safety. Given both the negative environmental impacts inherent in most traditional energy-production processes and our limited energy supplies, efficiency measures are an important strategy for managing the impacts of energy consumption. The commercial real estate industry's energy use accounts for approximately 18% of U.S. carbon dioxide emissions.' Additionally, data from the U.S. Energy Information Administration show that buildings are responsible for almost half (48%) of all energy consumed and greenhouse gases emitted annually.' Economic Issues Optimizing energy performance can reduce overall operating costs. Changing operational strategies to avoid energy use—for example, turning off lights and HVAC systems when the building is unoccupied—can often be done at zero or very low initial cost and rapid payback. Even seemingly small conservation measures can be significant; for instance, replacing a single incandescent lamp with a fluorescent lamp, which uses up to 75% less energy, can save more than $30 in energy costs over the lifetime of the lamp.' 2. Related Credits LEED for Commercial Interiors addresses energy efficiency in 2 places: EA Prerequisite 2., Minimum Energy Performance, and EA Credit 1, Optimize Energy Performance. In addition to reducing energy use through efficiency, project teams can mitigate energy use impacts by using renewable energy generated off-site. Refer to these credits: • EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance • EA Credit 4: Green Power 3. Summary of Referenced Standard ANSWASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings American National Standards Institute American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ANSIJASHRAWIESNA 90.1-2007 was formulated by ASHRAE under an ANSI consensus process. I ESNA is a joint sponsor of the standard. ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA90.1-2007 establishes minimum requirements for the energy-efficient design of buildings, with these exceptions: single-family houses; multifamily structures of3 habitable stories or fewer above grade; manufactured houses (mobile and modular homes); buildings that do not use either electricity or fossil fuel; and equipment and portions of buildings systems that use energy primarily for industrial, manufacturing, or commercial processes. Building envelope requirements are provided for semiheated spaces, such as warehouses. The standard provides criteria in the general categories shown in Table 1. Within each section are mandatory provisions and additional prescriptive requirements. Some sections also contain a performance alternative. The energy cost budget method (Section 11) allows the project team to exceed some of the 138 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281677 prescriptive requirements, provided energy cost savings are made in other areas. However, in all cases, the mandatory provisions must still be met. Table 1. Energy Standard Requirements Addressed by ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 ANSI/ASHRAVIESNA 90.1-2007 Components Section 5. Building envelope (including serniheated spaces, such as warehouses) Section 6. Heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (including parking garage ventilation, freeze protection, exhaust air recovery, and condenser heat recovery for service water heating) Section 7. Service water heating (including swimming pools) Section 8. Power (including all building power distribution systems) Section 9. Lighting (including exit signs, building exterior, grounds, and parking garages) Section 10. Other equipment (including all permanently wired electrical motors) 4. Implementation Design the tenant space so that it complies with ASHRAE 90.1-2007 or the local code, whichever is more stringent. Research the status ofindividual state energycodes comparedwith energystandards on the U.S. Department of Energy's Building Energy Codes website (see Resources). If provisions of the base building are managed entirely by the landlord (and therefore cannot be changed by the building tenant) and do not meet the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007, then only areas that are not part of the tenant scope of work and exclusively controlled by the landlord are exempt from the requirements of the standard. More Stringent Local Code ASHRAE 90.1-2007 is the baseline that registered projects must meet to satisfy the prerequisite requirement. Any local code (or provision in it) that is more stringent becomes part of the prerequisite requirement. In these cases, explain and document verification that the local code (or provision) is more stringent. California Title 24 is accepted as being more stringent with no further evaluation needed. Less Stringent Local Code In LEED for Commercial Interiors, the credit standards only to apply to the tenant's scope of work; this allows teams with projects in an existing core and shell building to certify their project without havingto compel the building owner to make changes to existingsystems. However,the intent ofthis prerequisite is to establish the minimum level of energy efficiency for the space systems; projects should still meet these standards. If the local code is less stringent, follow ASHRAE 90.1-2007. Do not outline a tenant scope of work to avoid applying the standard. Whenever possible, work being done for the benefit of the tenant should meet the more stringent provisions of ASHRAE 90.1-2007. Applying ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Section 2.1(a) of the standard specifies minimum energy efficiency requirements for the following 3 construction types: ■ New buildings and their systems. ■ New portions of buildings and their systems. ■ New systems and equipment in existing buildings. The third approach applies to most commercial interior projects and is addressed below.As stated in Section 4.2.1.3, existing building alterations must comply with the provisions of Sections, 6, 7, 8,9, and t0, as longascompliancedoes not increasethebuilding'senergyconsumption.Sections5through EA CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 139 EFTA00281678 EA CI Prerequisite 2 to gable 1) explain when these provisions apply (e.g., definitions and the building elements), list the mandatory provisions, and give the applicable prescriptive criteria. EA Prerequisite 2,Minimum Energy Performance, recognizes exceptions for certain applications as outlined in the standard, such as those for historic buildings and 24-hour facilities. EA Prerequisite 2, Minimum Energy Performance, does not preclude using the exceptions provided for historic buildings or annual energy consumption comparison as long as compensating changes are made in more than 1 applicable requirement section. Section 5. Building Envelope Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) The mandatory provisions of Section 5.4 must be met if they may apply to a commercial interior project. Teams must use 1 of 3 compliance paths: Section 5.5, Prescriptive Path;Section 5.6, Building Envelope Trade-Off Option; or Section11, Energy Cost Budget Method. Section 6. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1- 2007) If the project involves altering or replacing HVAC systems in existing buildings, follow the requirements of Section 6.1.1.3. New HVAC equipment must meet the minimum efficiency requirements set by the standard. Note that project teams considering EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC, Option 1, should consult the New Buildings Institute publication Advanced Buildings: Energy Benchmark for High Performance Buildings (2-Benchmark) Prescriptive Criteria E 2.5 for more stringent minimum efficiency requirements. Air-conditioning added for spaces previously not air-conditioned must meet the requirements of Section 6.z. Alterations to existing systems must not reduce economizer capability unless they meet the criteria set out in Section 6.5.1. EA Prerequisite 2, Minimum Energy Performance, does not preclude using any of the exceptions in Section 6.1.1.3 that address equipment modifications and repairs, alterations involving extensive revisionsto other systems, refrigerantchange, relocation ofexistingequipment, or access limitations for ducts and pipes. Section 6 provides 3 compliance paths, any of which meet the requirement of the prerequisite if justified and properly followed: ■ Use the simplified approach option for HVAC Systems in Section 6.3, which addresses small buildings whose HVAC design meets certain criteria. ■ Meet the mandatory and prescriptive provisions in Sections 64 and 6.5. ■ Meet the mandatory provisions of Section 64 and the energy cost budget method in Sectional. The mandatory provisions of Section 64 include minimum equipment efficiency requirements, controls, and HVAC system construction and insulation; they address ducts, plenums, and piping. A project team not using the energy cost budget method must follow the prescriptive path in Section 6.5, which establishes the requirements for economizers, simultaneous heating and cooling limitations (significant to energy use reductions), humidification, air system design and control, hydronic system design and control, energy recovery, exhaust hoods, and radiant heating systems. Project teams must meet he minimum efficiency requirements for system components listed in ASH RAE 90.1-2007,Tables 6.8.1A-G, even if using the energy cost budget method. Section 7. Service Water Heating Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) Section 7 addresses heating water for domestic or commercial purposes (restrooms,kitchens, etc.). When altering systems within existing buildings, follow the same requirements set out for new 140 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281679 construction, unless there is insufficient space or a system is inaccessible. Project teams must meet the mandatory provisions of Section 7.4, and either the prescriptive path in Section 7.5 or the energy cost budget method in Section a. The mandatory provisions of Section 7.5 delineate requirements for efficiency, controls, pools, and heat traps for storage tanks. Section 8. Power Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Section 8.4.1) Section 84 describes mandatory provisions coveringvoltage drops in the power distribution system. There are no prescriptive provisions for this section. Section 9. Lighting Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) Section 9 outlines guidelines for replacement lighting systems and new systems. If the scope of the lightingwork will replace less than halfofthe odsting tortures with new ones andwill use no additional power, all other provisions of the section apply. Section 9 specifies the same mandatory provisions and prescriptive requirements for either the building area method or space-by-space method. Section 94 describes the mandatory provisions for controls (941), including automatic lighting shutoff, space controls, exterior lighting controls, task lighting, tandem wiring (9.42); exit signs (9.4.3); and exterior building and grounds lighting (9.44 and 945). Pay special attention to Section 941, Lighting Control. Buildings larger than 5,000 square feet must have an automatic control device to shut off all lighting in the building. The shut-off device maybe a programmable control to schedule time-of-day control for areas no greater than 25,000 square feet but no less than every floor. The approach may use occupant sensors to turn lights off after 30 minutes of no activity or a signal from another control or alarm system that indicates the area is unoccupied. EA Prerequisite 2 does not preclude using any of the exceptions provided in Section 941.1 for 24-hour operations, patient care areas, and where automatic shutoff would endanger the safety or security of occupants. A space control device must be provided in each area enclosed by ceiling-height partitions. Any device that must be turned on manually must be readily accessible and visible to users. Shared spaces (such as classrooms, conference and meeting rooms, and employee lunch and break rooms) must be equipped with a control that turns lights off within 30 minutes after occupants leave. In all other spaces, a device may be turned on manually or controlled by an occupancy sensor. Rooms smaller than 10,000 square feet must have at least 1 control for every2,50o square feet, and rooms larger than 10,000 square feet must have least 1 every 10,000 square feet. If the control can override the time-of- day scheduled shutoff control, the override should be limited to 4 hours. LEED for Commercial Interiors recognizes additional lighting controls in EA Credit 1.2, Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting, for daylight-responsive controls, and EQ Credit 6.1, Controllability of Systems—Lighting, for individual controls for task lighting and shared controls in multioccupant spaces. The function of these additional controls must comply with ASHRAE go.1-2007. The building area method of demonstrating compliance uses the building area types listed in Table 9.5.1 of ASH RAE 90.1-2007. The interior lighting power allowance is determined by multiplying the gross lighted floor area of the building type by the lighting power density value in the associated table. More than sbuilding area type may be used; trade-offs amongbuilding area types are permitted provided the total installed interior lighting power does not exceed the interior lighting power allowance. The space-by-space method is more flexible than the building area method and allows project teams to address each space individually. For each area, the lighting power density value in Table 9.6.t is multiplied by the square footage. The interior lighting power allowance is the sum of those results. Trade-offs among spaces are allowed provided the total proposed lighting power density is less than EA CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 141 EFTA00281680 EA CI Prerequisite 2 the sum of the lighting power budget allowances for all individual occupancies. Additional interior lighting power maybe added to the allowance for certain applications as described in Section 9.6.2. The exterior lighting power allowance is calculated by multiplying the allowed lighting power for each exterior surface (found in ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Table 945) by the total area or length associated with that surface, summing the results, and then multiplying this number by 1.05. For exterior lighting surfaces, the allowed lighting power can be used only for the specific application; it cannot be traded among surfaces or with other exterior lighting. Section 10. Other Equipment Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) Thissectionestablishes mandatoryefficiencystandardsforelectricmotors. There are no prescriptive provisions for this section. Section 11. Energy Cost Budget Method (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) The standard provides an alternative to the prescriptive approach, in which each section must be satisfied individually. The energy cost budget method requires the simulation of the proposed design and abaseline case that follows the prescriptive requirements of each section. The calculation usually requires computer modeling. The modeling must cover at least the segment of the building serviced by the same HVAC system supplying the project space. If the energy cost budget is used to demonstrate compliance with EA Prerequisite 2, note that the only permitted trade-offs are between regulated systems within the project space. Additional information about this method, as well as the performance rating method (Appendix G), is included in EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should start the energy simulation modeling early in the project design to gain insights for design decisions and an indication of how to achieve different levels of energy cost reductions. The mechanical or electrical engineer must coordinate with the facility manager to ensure maximum energy efficiency in the tenant space. Facilitate energy-efficient operations by working with the facility manager when projecting energy loads, as well as implementing tools for tacking and analysis. 6. Calculations For lighting power density, seethe Calculations section in EA Credit 1.1. For ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment, see the Calculations section in EA Credit 14 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ For ASHRAE compliance, list any addenda used, and retain copies of ASHRAE compliance forms. ■ If the project is using the prescriptive compliance path, assemble documentation demonstrating that the project meets all applicable requirements. ■ For lighting power density reduction, refer to the Documentation Guidance section in EA Credit 1.1. ■ For ENERGY STAR equipment, refer to the Documentation Guidance section in EA Credit 1.4. 142 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDiTU EFTA00281681 8. Examples Energy simulation software packages, such as DOE-2 or EnergyPlus, enable the creation of a representative model. Energy simulation software can be used to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements ofASHRAE 90.1-2007, as an alternative to the prescriptive requirements. Figure t shows an example of a 3-D building model. Figure 1. Screenshot from Building Simulation Software Ow DSO tar • •11 >SS w 410 eta co tam •sx 1.6.2 riefionoK nel•alt 01401•••••• 4..m.imant ••••• 0.1•••••MO ains.a. %nag 0....•••••1/ w _ winnow. ........1 w..., I "' spoil 9. Exemplary Performance This prerequisite is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Savings achieved through energy efficiency improvements may qualify for state and local utility incentive programs. For instance, Washington State's Puget Sound Energy offers grants to customers that install efficiency upgrades to existing equipment or facilities. Grants range from several hundred dollars to more than $100,000 and typically pay for about so% of a project's cost, Ask local utility providers about the availability of incentives and rebate programs. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Provide the building operator with a breakdown of anticipated energy end uses based on any modeling results. The breakdown will provide a baseline to help operators evaluate ongoing energy consumption patterns for the project space and building. The facility manager should have an ongoing commissioning plan in place to catch any system inefficiencies. Enable linkages with EPA's ENERGY STAR software tools. Register the building with the ENERGY STAR Portfolio Manager tool and input basic building data (e.g., location, square footage). Analyze anticipated building energy performance using the ENERGY STAR Target Finder tool and make sure the facility owner or manager has access to this analysis. EA CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 143 EFTA00281682 EA CI Prerequisite 2 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project (bm3Wwww.usgbc.orgiprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Advanced Buildings Technologies and Practices httN/www.advancedbuildings.org This online resource, supported by Natural Resources Canada, presents energy-efficient technologies, strategies for commercial buildings, and pertinent case studies. American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy http://www.aceee.org ACEEE is a nonprofit organization dedicated to advancing energy efficiency through technical and policy assessments; advising policymakers and program managers; collaborating with businesses, public interest groups, and other organizations; and providing education and outreach through conferences, workshops, and publications. ENERGY STAR.; Buildings Upgrade Manual http://www.energystangovfindex.cfrn? business.bus upgrade manual This manual is a strategic guide for planning and implementing energy-saving building upgrades. It provides general methods for reviewing and adjusting system control settings, plus procedures for testing and correcting calibration and operation of system components such as sensors, actuators, and control devices. New Buildings Institute, Inc. http:(Jwww.newbuildings.org The New Buildings Institute is a nonprofit, public-benefits corporation dedicated to making buildings better for people and the environment. Its mission is to promote energy efficiency in buildings through technology research, guidelines, and codes. U.S. Department of Energy, Building Energy Codes Program httpWwww.energycodes.gov The Building Energy Codes program provides comprehensive resources for states and code users, including news, compliance software, code comparisons, and the Status of State Energy Codes database. The database includes state energy contacts, code status, code history, DOE grants awarded, and construction data. The program is also updating the COMcheck-EZ compliance tool to include ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007. This compliance tool includes the prescriptive path and trade-off compliance methods. The software generates appropriate compliance forms as well. U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency arid Renewable Energy http://wwweere.energy.gov This website is a comprehensive resource for U.S. Department of Energy information on energy efficiency and renewable energy and provides access to energy links and downloadable documents. Print Media ANSIJASHRAEIIESNA Standard 90.1-2007 User's Manual (ASHRAE, 2008). The ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 User's Manual was developed as a companion document to the ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. The manual explains the new standard and includes sample calculations, useful reference material, and information on the intent and application of the standard. It is abundantly illustrated and contains numerous examples and tables of reference data. It also includes a complete set of compliance forms and worksheets that can be used to document compliance with the standard. The manual is helpful to architects and engineers applying the standard to the design of buildings, plan 144 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281683 examiners and field inspectors who must enforce the standard in areas where it is adopted as code, and contractors who must construct buildings in compliance with the standard. A compact disk is included that contains electronic versions of the compliance forms found in the manual. 13. Definitions Baseline building performance is the annual energy cost for a building design intended for use as a baseline for rating above standard design, as defined in ANSIJASHRAPIESNA 90.1-2007, Appendix G. An economizer is a device used to make building systems more energy efficient. Examples include HVAC enthalpy controls, which are based on humidity and temperature. An energy simulation model, or energy model, is a computer-generated representation of the anticipated energy consumption of a building. It permits a comparison of energy performance, given proposed energy efficiency measures, with the baseline. Interior lighting power allowance is the maximum lighting power (in watts) allowed for the interior of a building. Lighting power density is the installed lighting power, per unit area. Proposed building performance is the annual energy cost calculated for a proposed design, as defined in ANSI/ASH RAE/I ESNA 90.1-2007, Appendix G. EA CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 145 EFTA00281684 146 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281685 FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT a Prerequisite EA Prerequisite 3 Points Required Intent To reduce stratospheric ozone depletion. Requirements Zero use of chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants in tenant heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration (HVAC&R) systems used within the LEED project scope of work. EA PREREQUISITE 3 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 147 EFTA00281686 EA CI Prerequisite 3 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), used in refrigeration equipment, cause significant damage to Earth's protective ozone layer when they are released into the atmosphere. The reaction between CFC and ozone molecules in the stratosphere destroys the ozone and reduces the stratosphere's ability to absorb a portion of the sun's ultraviolet radiation. As part of the U.S. commitment to implement the Montreal Protocol, EPA has established regulations for responsible management of ozone-depleting substances. In compliance with the Montreal Protocol, CFC production in the United States ended in 1995. Not using CFC refrigerants in new equipment and implementing a phase-out of CFC-based refrigerants in existing equipment have helped slow depletion of the ozone layer. Economic Issues The standard practice in new buildings is to install equipment that does not use CFCs. However, existingbuildings may have CFC-based refrigeration equipment. Energy, demand, and maintenance savings realized from upgrading equipment may offset the cost of converting or replacing existing systems. If savings offset costs, a CFC phase-out plan must be implemented to earn this prerequisite. If savings do not offset costs, detailed calculations and the results of a qualified third-party audit must confirm that CFC conversion or replacement is economically infeasible. 2. Related Credits There are no related credits for this prerequisite. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this prerequisite. 4. Implementation Use only non-CFC-based refrigerants in all base building HVAC&R equipment built for the project; only HVAC systems built for the project are within the scope ofwork. Consider the characteristics of various CFC substitutes. Refrigerants have varying applications, lifetimes, ozone-depleting potentials (ODPs), and global- warming potentials (GWPs). Table 1 provides examples of environmental lifetimes, ODP values, and GWP values for a variety of refrigerants. Choose refrigerants that have short environmental lifetimes, small ODP values, and small GWP values. No ideal altemative for CFCs has been developed, and some alternatives are not suitable for retrofits. See EPA's list of substitutes for ozone-depleting substances (http://www.epagoviozoneisnap). 148 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281687 Table 1. Ozone Depletion and Global Warming Potentials of Refrigerants (100-Year Values) ChIceofluorocarbons GDP GWP Common Building Applications CFC-11 1.0 4.680 Centrifugal chillers CFC-12 1.0 10,720 Refrigerators, chillers CFC-114 0.94 9,800 Centrifugal chillers CFC-500 0.605 7,900 Centrifugal chillers, humidifiers CFC-502 0.221 4,600 Low-temperature refrigeration Hydrochlomfluorocarbons HCFC-22 0.04 1,780 Air-conditioning, chillers HCFC-123 0.02 76 CFC-11 replacement Hydrofluccocarbons M HFC.23 -0 12,240 Ultra-low-temperature refrigeration HFC-134a - 0 1,320 CFC-12 or HCFC-22 replacement HFC-245fa - 0 1,020 Insulation agent, centrifugal chillers HFC-404A -0 3,900 Low-temperature refrigeration HFC-407C - 0 1,700 HCFC-22 replacement HFC-410A -0 1,890 Air conditioning HFC-507A -0 3,900 Low-temperature refrigeration Natural Refrigerants I Carbon dioxide (CO2) 0 1.0 Ammonia (NH3) 0 0 Propane 0 3 District Energy Systems For projects with district energy systems, specific technical guidance can be found on USGBC's Registered Project Tools (http://v/ww.usgbc.org/projecttools). Follow the guidance in effect at the time of registration. 5. Timeline and Team Consult with a mechanical engineer or HVAC&R specialist to confirm the presence of CFC-based refrigerants in the base building HVAC&R systems. If CFC-based refrigerants are located, the building owner should develop a phase-out plan and convert to less environmentally harmful refrigerants. Do not install any systems with CFC-based refrigerants. 6. Calculations There are no calculations associated with this prerequisite unless a third-party economic audit is conducted to determine feasibility of retrofitting existing equipment. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Assemble manufacturers' documentation demonstrating the type of refrigerant used by the HVAC&R systems installed within the scope of the LEED project. 8. Examples There are no examples for this prerequisite. CI Prerequisite 3 2C39 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 149 EFTA00281688 EA CI Prerequisite 3 9. Exemplary Performance There is no exemplary performance available for this prerequisite. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this prerequisite. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Provide facility operators with complete records (such as LEED application materials) for all refrigerant-containing systems, including fire suppression. Ensure that equipment labels are in place and accessible to building operators, and provide them with a copy of any CFC phase-out plan. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httplAvww.usgbc.org/prtojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites ASHRAE Service Life and Maintenance Cost Database http://wvashrae.orgidatabase This database provides current information on the service life and maintenance costs of typical HVAC equipment. Facility Management, Coping with the CFC Phase-Out This magazine's website provides various articles on the issues of CFC phase-out. U.S. EPA, Benefits of CFC Phase-Out http:/ . .._2gp_agoi f v e ozongeninfiMbenefits.html This document details the benefits of phasing out CFCs and includes brief case studies. U.S. EPA, Building Owners Save Money, Save the Earth: Replace Your CFC Mr Conditioning Chiller http://www.emgovfozoneititle6/60$/chillen 07.pdf This brochure documents the environmental and financial reasons to replace CFC chillers with new, energy-efficient equipment U.S. EPA, Ozone Layer Depletion http://wwwepa.gov/ozoneistrathome.html This website includes information about the science of ozone depletion, EPA's regulatory approach to protecting the ozone layer, and alternatives to ozone-depleting substances. U.S. EPA, Significant NewAlternatives Policy http:fiwww.emgoviozoneisnaptindex.html SNAP is an EPA program to identify alternatives to ozone-depleting substances. The program maintains up-to-date lists of environmentally-friendly substitutes for refrigeration and air- conditioning equipment, solvents, fire-suppression systems, adhesives, coatings, and other substances. Print Media BuildingSystenzs Analysis & Retrofit Manual (SMACNA0.995). CFCs, HCPC and Haloes: Professional and Practical Guidance an Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer (CIBSE, 2000). The Refrigerant Manual: Managing the PhaseOut of CFCs (BOMA International, r993). 150 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281689 13. Definitions Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) are hydrocarbons that are used as refrigerants and cause depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer. Hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCPCs) are refrigerants that cause significantly less depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer than chlorofluorocarbons. Refrigerants are the working fluids of refrigeration cycles that absorb heat from a reservoir at low temperatures and reject heat at higher temperatures EA CI Prerequisite 3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 151 EFTA00281690 152 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281691 OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE-LIGHTING POWER a Credit EA Credit 1.1 Points 1.5 points Intent To achieve increasing levels of energy conservation beyond the referenced standard to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirements Reduce connected lighting power density below that allowed by ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda') usingeither the space-by-space method or by applying the whole building lighting power allowance to the entire tenant space. The points earned for reducing lighting power density below the standard are as follows: Lighting Power Density Reduction below the Standard Points 15% 1 20% 2 25% 3 30% d 35% 5 Project teams in California may use Title 24 zoos, Part 6 in place of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007. Potential Technologies & Strategies Design the connected lighting power to maximize energy performance. If the project warrants, consider a computer simulation model to assess the performance and identify the most cost- effective energy efficiency measures. z Projck: wi.liittK :0 um: ASI IRAE upproved addenda the put posts of this p:e:cq eisitc nave do so ti :Lair d:ma,:ion.Addcntla mt,t Ix• znplicd consi.tyntty ai.ros, 411 1.1.: ill... etch EA CREDIT 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 153 EFTA00281692 CI Credit 1.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Energy efficiency reduces the environmental burdens associated with producing and using energy. Fossil fuels, such as coal and oil, are the most common source of energy used in buildings. However, these fuels are also finite resources. The process of extracting and consuming energy from fossil fuels causes many environmental impacts, including air and water pollution, land degradation, solid waste generation, and greenhouse gas emissions. Mounting evidence connects fossil fuel-based energy use with climate change as well as serious risks to environmental and human health and safety. Data from the U.S. Energy Information Administration show that buildings are responsible for almost half(48%) ofall energy consumed and greenhouse gases emitted annually.1OEPAestimates that if the energy efficiency of commercial and industrial buildings improved by 2096, the resulting greenhouse gas reductions would be equivalent to taking about 30 million vehicles off the road." In addition to fossil fuels, other sources of energy also carry environmental costs. Hydropower activities, for example, can alter aquatic ecosystems and have significant impacts on endangered species. Nuclear power plants pose an environmental threat when they are decommissioned without appropriate storage sites for spent fuel. Given both the environmental impacts inherent in most energy-production processes and our limited energy supplies, efficiency measures are an important strategy for managing the impacts of energy consumption. Economic Issues Some energy-efficiency measures may not require additional first costs. Many measures that do result in higher capital costs may generate savings from lower energy use, smaller equipment, reduced space needs for mechanical and electrical equipment, and utility rebates. These savings may vastly exceed the incremental capital costs associated with the energy-efficiency measures over the life of the project. Even seemingly small conservation measures can be significant; for instance, replacing t incandescent lamp with a fluorescent lamp will save over $30 in energy costs over the operating lifetime of the lamp." 2. Related Credits Optimal lighting systems will reduce lighting power through use of efficient systems, deliver appropriate target light levels, and incorporate daylighting to take advantage of natural light. Occupants' ability to control lighting systems can save even more energy while increasing occupants' satisfaction. Architectural strategies to increase daylighting can achieve greater energy savings through the use of daylight-responsive controls. Review the requirements in these credits: ■ EA Prerequisite z: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Credit 1.2: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls ■ IEQ Credit 6.2: Controllability of Systems—Lighting ■ IEQ Credit 8.2: Daylight and Views—Daylight Commissioning is required to ensure that lighting controls meet the design intent and are operating properly, as detailed in the following: ■ EA Prerequisite t: Fundamental Commissioning of the Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning 154 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281693 3. Summary of Referenced Standards ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2,007: Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential American National Standards Institute American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society of North America http:fiwwwashrae.org ANSIJASHRAWIESNA 90.1-2007 was formulated by ASHRAE under an ANSI consensus process. I ESNA is a joint sponsor of the standard. ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2.007 establishes minimum requirements for the energy-efficient design of buildings with these exceptions: single-family houses; multifamily structures of 3 habitable stories or fewer above grade; manufactured houses (mobile and modular homes); buildings that do not use either electricity or fossil fuel; and equipment and portions of buildings systems that use energy primarily for industrial, manufacturing, or commercial processes. Building envelope requirements are provided for semiheated spaces such as warehouses. 4. Implementation The connected lighting power should be designed to maximize energy performance. Consider using an energy simulation model to assess the performance of the tenant space or building. General Guidance • Although task lighting may be used to supplement general lighting, take care to balance the various illuminance requirements of the space. • Lighting controls are not limited to on-off modes; continuous dimming can be implemented based on actual daylight levels. • Use high-efficacy sources and high internal reflectances to reduce the lighting power density. This credit compares the installed interior lighting power with the interior lighting power allowance. Use either the building area method or the space-by-space method in ASHRAE 90.1-2,007. See the Calculations section for details. 5. Timeline and Team Lighting requirements should be part of the owner's project requirements and may include the lighting technologies (LED, ceramic metal halide, Ts-HO, etc.) to be considered for the intended uses of the space. The lighting designer should include in the basis of design specific footcandle target levels for each major space type. Once the lighting system has been designed, it can be helpful to complete a photometric floor plan to identify areas that will be over- or underlit and refine the lighting design. 6. Calculations Installed Interior Lighting Power The installed interior lighting power, calculated as shown by Equation 1, is the power in watts of all permanently installed general,task,and furniture lighting systems and luminaires. ASHRAE90.1- 2.007,Section 9.253, lists lighting equipment that is exempted from consideration in determining the lighting power density and therefore does not need to be included in the calculation. Note that luminaire wattages must be determined in accordance with ASH RAE 90.1-2007, Section 9.1.4. CI Credit 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 155 EFTA00281694 EA CI Credit 1.1 Equation 1. Installed Interior Lighting Power Installed Interior Lighting Power Luminaire Wattage by Luminaire Type = Quantity by Type of Luminaires X (watts) (watts) Building Area Method Use Equation a to determine the interior lighting power allowance according to the building area method described by ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Section 9.5. Begin by determining the appropriate building area types from the list in ASHRAE 90a-2007, Table 9.5.1. For each building area type, there is a corresponding allowed lighting power density (watts per square foot). Determine the interior lighting power allowance (in watts) by multiplying the allowed lighting power density of each building area type by the gross lighted floor area of that building type. Sum the interior lighting power allowances to determine the total interior lighting power allowance. Equation 2. Interior Lighting Power Allowance Using the Building Area Method Installed Interior Lighting Power Building Area Type Lighting Power = 2 Gross Lighting Floor Area (se X Allowance (watts) Density (watts/50 Space-by-Space Method In this alternative approach, defined by ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Section 9.6,the allowed lighting power density is determined for each space individually. Begin by determining the appropriate space area types from the list in ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Table 9.6.1. For each space type, there is a corresponding allowed lighting power density (watts per square foot). Determine the interior lighting power allowance (in watts) by multiplying the allowed lighting power density of each space area type by the gross lighted floor area of that space type. Space areas must be determined in accordance with ASH RAE 9O.1-2007, Section 9.6.1.b. Finally, sum the individual space allowances per Equation 3 to determine the total interior lighting power allowance. See Table t for an example of a completed space-by-space method calculation. Equation 3. Interior Lighting Power Allowance Using the Space-by-Space Method Interior Lighting Power Allowance Space Area Type Lighting Power = 5 Gross Lighting Floor Area (sO X (watts) Density fwattsfsf) For project teams using the space-by-space method, increases to the interior power allowance are permitted in 2 situations: for decorative appearance and for highlighting merchandise. See Section 9.6.2. Note that any additional allowances are provided onlyto the extent that they are actually used. For example, if an apparel retailer dedicates 1,000 square feet of floor area for the sale of clothing, the maximum additional allowance for the purposes of highlighting merchandise would be 3,600 watts (1,000 watts + 2.6 watts per square foot). However, if only 2400 watts of merchandise display lighting is installed (and controlled separately from the general lighting), only 2,400 watts can be claimed as additional lighting power allowance for the purposes of highlighting merchandise. All additional lighting power allowances should be added to the interior lighting power allowance calculated per Equation 3 for the final determination of lighting power reduction. No increase to the lighting power allowance is permissible with the building area method. Lighting Power Reduction To determine the lighting power reduction, subtract the installed interior lighting power from the interior lighting power allowance, being sure to include any additional lighting power allowances if the space-by-space method was used. See Equation 4. Finally, determine the percentage reduction by dividing the lighting power reduction by the interior lighting power allowance (Equation 5). 156 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281695 Projects in California may use Title 24-2005, Part 6, in lieu of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 for calculating interior lighting power reduction. Equation 4. Lighting Power Reduction Lighting Power Reduction (watts) = Interior Lighting Power Allowance Installed Interior Lighting Power (watts) (watts) Equation 5. Lighting Power Density Percentage Reduction Percentage Reduction (%) — Lighting Power Reduction (watts) Interior Lighting Power Allowance (watts) 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • For ASHRAE compliance, list any addenda used. • Assemble lighting compliance documents from the ASHRAE 90.1-2007 user's manual. • List the rated power of installed lighting systems. • List building area types or space area types with their corresponding gross floor areas. • Assemble information about additional lighting power allowances and document that the allowances apply only to lighting systems that are separate from general lighting. 8. Examples The project team for a 20,000-square-foot office building uses the space-by-space method, in which the lighting power allowance varies for individual areas. Tablet presents the calculation and indicates an overall lighting power allowance of16,440watts.Table 2. illustrates the same calculation using the building area method, in which the lighting power allowance is based on a single lighting power density applied across the entire lighted square footage. Table 1. Interior Lighting Power Allowance, Space-by-Space Method Space bpe Lighting Power Density (watts/g) Gross Area DO Lighting Power Allowance (watts) Office, enclosed 1.1 X 720 792 Office, open plan 1.1 X 16180 17798 Conference 1.3 X 850 1105 Training 1.4 X 1200 1680 Lobby 1.3 X 330 429 Corridor 0.5 X 720 360 Total floor area (s0 20000 Interior lighting power allowance (walls) 22164 Installed interior lighting power (watts) 16440 Lighting power reduction (watts) 5724 Lighting power reduction achieved (5,724/22,164) 25.8% 25.8%> 25%, 3 points earned EA CI Credit 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 157 EFTA00281696 CI Credit 1.1 Table 2. Interior Lighting Power Allowance. Building Area Method Building Area Type Lighting Power Density (watts/s0 Gross Area 40 Lighting Power Allowance (watts) Office 1.0 x 20000 20000 Total floor area (sf) 20000 Interior lighting power allowance (watts) 20000 Installed interior lighting power (watts) 16440 Lighting power reduction achieved (watts) 3560 Lighting power reduction achieved (8560/20.000) 17.8% 17.8% a 15%. 1 point earned 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an exemplary performance point by reducing the lighting power density 40% or more below the standard. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Building operators should consider a group relamping policy. This can significantly reduce labor costs associated with conventional spot-relamping practices. It can also permit the use of lower- energy lighting equipment, since the system light output will be maintained at or close to the design condition. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpifiwww.usgbc.orgfprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites U.S. Department of Energy, Building Energy Codes Program http://www.energycodes.gov The Building Energy Codes program provides comprehensive resources for states and code users, including news, compliance software, code comparisons, and the Status of State Energy Codes database. The database includes state energy contacts, code status, code history, DOE grants awarded, and construction data. The program is also updating the COMcheck-EZ compliance tool to include ASHRAE 90.1-2007. This compliance tool includes the prescriptive path and trade-off compliance methods. The software generates appropriate compliance forms as well. Print Media ANSIIASHRAWIESNAStandanio0.1-2007 User's Manual (ASHRAE, 2007). The ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 User's Manual was developed as a companion document to the ANSIJASHRAWIESNA 90.1-2007, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. The manual explains the new standard and includes sample calculations, useful reference material, and information on the intent and application of the standard. It is abundantly illustrated and contains numerous examples and tables of reference data. It also includes a complete set of compliance forms and worksheets that can be used to document compliance with the standard. The manual is helpful to architects and engineers applying the standard to the designofbuildings, plan examiners and field inspectors who must enforce the standard in areas where it is adopted as code, and contractors who must constructbuildings in compliancewith the standard.Acompactdisk is includedthat contains electronic versions of the compliance fors found in the manual. 158 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281697 IESNA Lighting Handbook, ninth edition (IESNA, 2000). ANSIJIESNA RP.1.04, American National Standard Practice for Office Lighting (IESNA). 13. Definitions Interior lighting power allowance is the maximum lighting power (in watts) allowed for the interior of a building. Lighting power density is the installed lighting power, per unit area. A luminaire is a complete lighting unit consisting of a lamp (or lamps) with the housing designed to distribute the light, position, and protect the lamp and connect it to the power supply. Regularly occupied spaces in commercial buildings are areas where people sit or stand as theywork EA CI Credit 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 199 EFTA00281698 160 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281699 OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE-LIGHTING CONTROLS Credit EA Credit 1.2 Points 1..3 points Intent To achieve increasing levels of energy conservation beyond the prerequisite standard to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirements Design the project to include t or more of the following independent strategies: • Daylight controls for daylit areas: (I point) Install daylight responsive controls in all regularly occupied daylit spaces within t5 feet of windows and under skylights. Daylight controls must switch or dim electric lights in response to the presence or absence of daylight illumination in the space.' • Daylight controls for so% of the lighting load: (I point) Install daylight responsive controls for so% or more of the connected lighting load and demonstrate that so% of the connected lighting load is daylight responsive. Daylight controls must switch or dim electric lights in response to the presence or absence of daylight illumination in the space.' • Occupancy sensors: (t point) Install occupancy sensors for 7594, of the connected lighting load. AmcricanSociely of Ileatin, Rcirigauting.and Air-Conditioning Engineer>. ANSIASIIRAIOESNA Standwd twee Manual. (Atlanta. zcoS). P.9-3 EA CREDIT 1.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 161 EFTA00281700 EA CI Credit 1.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Daylighting improves the indoor environment. Using daylight to supplement or even eliminate the need for electric lighting is generally welcomed by occupants and reduces lighting energy consumption. Utilizing controls sensitive to daylight maximizes the efficiency and savings from daylighting. When planned in conjunction with heating and air conditioning requirements, the net cost of utilities can be reduced as well. Refer to the Benefits and Issues section in EA Credit 1.1, Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power. 2. Related Credits Refer to the Related Credits section in EA Credit 1.1. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Ideally, the use of daylight-responsive controls should be part of a larger lighting strategy. The overall strategy should optimize natural daylighting, minimize electric lighting, provide appropriate task and ambientworkingconditions,andallowoccupants to controlthe lightingof individual spaces. Consider usingbothdaylight-responsivelightingcontrols andoccupancysensors. Daylightingcontrols typically include a photosensor that initiates a control response to increase or reduce the lighting power to the luminaires. A successful design should anticipate occupants' activities, avoid drastic changes in lighting levels, and minimize glare. Ideally, the system will employ continuous dimming, although on-off, bi-level, or step-dimming devices are acceptable for the purposes of this credit. All major commercial lamp types can now be dimmed, including incandescent, fluorescent, and HID. When designing the lighting controls, consider how individual areas will be used, the relationship between luminaires and individual controls, and how the system works as a whole. Establish control zones for the areas with daylight-responsive lighting. These areas should include all perimeter areas within a radius of at least is feet from windows and areas beneath skylights. Anticipate shading from neighboring buildings and trees, and indicate their effect on the control zones. 5. Timeline and Team Consider developing a comprehensive lighting design intent during schematic design. This design intent should indicate the illuminance targets of each major space type, the overall level of daylight and occupancy responsiveness desired, and information on the type of luminaires being considered for the space. This will require coordination between the architect, electrical engineer, and lighting designer. 6. Calculations See the Calculations section in EA Credit 1.1. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Highlight daylit zones on interior lighting plans; indicate which luminaries correspond to each controller. 162 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281701 • For more complex lighting designs, where the control logic cannot easily be discerned from the interior lighting plans, create a lighting control summary indicating the combined control logic for the project lighting. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an exemplary performance point by implementing daylight-responsive controls for 75% of the connected lighting load or by installing occupancy-responsive controls for 95% of the connected lighting load. 10. Regional Variations Refer to the Regional Variations section in EA Credit 1.1. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Refer to the Operations and Maintenance section in EA Credit t.t. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. International Energy Agency Solar Heating and Cooling Programme http://www.iea-shc.org Print Media Design Brief—Lighting Controls, Southern California Edison (Energy Design Resources). http://www. Daylight in Buildings: A Source Book on Daylighting Systems and Components, Chapter 5, Daylight- Responsive Controls. Advanced Lighting Guidelines, Chapter 8, Lighting Controls (New Buildings Institute, Inc., zoo* http://minv.newbuildings.orgilighting.htm. 13. Definitions Daylighting is the controlled admission of natural light into a space, used to reduce or eliminate electric lighting. Daylight-responsive lighting controls are photosensors used in conjunction with other switching and dimming devices to control the amount of artificial lighting in relationship to the amount and quality of natural daylight EA CI Credit 1.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 183 EFTA00281702 164 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281703 OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE-HVAC Credit EA Credit 1.3 Points 5-10 points Intent To achieve increasing levels of energy conservation beyond the prerequisite standard to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirement OPTION 1 Implement t or both of the following strategies: • Equipment Efficiency—(5 points) Install heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems that comply with the efficiency requirements outlined in the New Building Institute's Advanced Buildings" Core Performance" Guide Sections 1.4:Mechanical System Design, is: Mechanical Equipment Efficiency and 3.10: Variable Speed Control. • Appropriate Zoning and Controls: (5 points) Zone tenant fit out of spaces to meet the following requirements: • Every solar exposure must have a separate control zone. • Interior spaces must be separately zoned. • Private offices and special occupancies (conference rooms, kitchens, etc.) must have active controls capable of sensing space use and modulating the HVAC system in response to space demand. OR OPTION 2 Reduce design energy cost compared with the energy cost budget for regulated energy components described in the requirements of ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard go.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda') AND PATH 1 (5 points) Demonstrate that HVAC system component performance criteria used for tenant space are 15% better than a system in minimum compliance with ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard 9o.1-zoo7 (with errata but without addenda.). OR PATH 2 (10 points) Demonstrate that HVAC system component performance criteria used for tenant space are 3o% better than a system that is in minimum compliance with ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'). EA CREDIT 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 165 EFTA00281704 CI Credit 1.3 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Conventional forms of energy production often have detrimental environmental effects. Producing electricity from fossil fuels pollutes air and water, hydroelectric plants can make waterways uninhabitable for indigenous fish, and nuclear power has safety concerns, as well as problems with disposal of spent fuel. Using less energy reduces greenhousegas emissions, limits the impact of natural resource extraction activities, and prevents water pollution, benefitting environmental and human health. Economic Issues Many energyefficiency measures do not require additional first costs. Those measures that do result in higher initial costs often create savings from lower energy use over the building's lifetime, downsized equipment, reduced mechanical space needs, and utilityrebates. These savings can dwarf the increased first costs. Payback periods for off-the-shelf energy efficiency measures are generally short. Even seemingly small conservation measures can be significant. Replacing t incandescent lampwith an ENERGY STAR-qualified light avoids 490 pounds of greenhouse gas emissions over its lifetime or the combustion of more than 200 pounds of coal.'3This substitution also saves more than $30 in energy costs over the operating lifetime of the lamp". 2. Related Credits EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC, is related to several ventilation and thermal comfort credits because of the energy required to operate mechanically driven comfort systems. Additionally, system controllability should be incorporated with the HVAC system design to achieve a careful balance between comfort and energy performance. These topics are covered in the following credits: ■ IEQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance ■ IEQ Credit t: Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring ■ IEQ Credit 2: Increased Ventilation ■ IEQ Credit 6.z Controllability of Systems—Thermal Comfort ■ IEQ Credit 7.1: Thermal Comfort—Design ■ IEQ Credit 7.2: Thermal Comfort—Verification 3. Summary of Referenced Standards New Buildings Institute, Advanced Buildings' Core Performance" Guide The Advanced Buildings program is a prescriptive plan for exceeding the energy performance requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2004. It offers a predictable alternative to energy performance modeling and a simple set of criteria for significantly increasing building energy performance. The program updates and replaces the Advanced Buildings Benchmarked program. Core Performance is calibrated to exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2004 in all climate zones. Information about the Core Performance program requirements and a range of additional reference material are available at http://www.advancedbuildints.net Several aspects ofthe Core Performance program overlapwithotherLEED credits and prerequisites. Following the Core Performance program is not an alternative path to achieving any LEED credits except EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC, but Core Performance may facilitate earning other LEED credits and prerequisites. 166 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281705 American National Standards Institute/ASHRAEfilluminating Engineering Society of North America Standard 90.1-2007: Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential American National Standards Institute American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society of North America http:J/www.ashrae.org ANSIJASHRAWIESNA Standard 90.1-2007 was formulated by ASHRAE under an ANSI consensus process. IESNA is a joint sponsor of the standard. ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 establishes minimum requirements for the energy- efficient design of buildings, with these exceptions: single-family houses; multifamily structures of 3 habitable stories or fewer above grade; manufactured houses (mobile and modular homes); buildings that do not use either electricity or fossil fuel; and equipment and portions of buildings systems that use energy primarily for industrial, manufacturing, or commercial processes. Building envelope requirements are provided for semiheated spaces such as warehouses. The energy cost budget method (Section 11) allows the project team to exceed some of the prescriptive requirements provided energy cost savings are made in other areas. However, in all cases, the mandatory provisions must still be met. 4. Implementation OPTION 1. Equipment Efficiency and Zoning Controls The equipment efficiency approach draws from Sections 1.4, 2.9, and 3.10 of the Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide. Section 1.4 covers mechanical system design intended to closely match actual building loads and to meet ASH RAE 55; Section z.8 covers lighting power density (LPD) by interior space types with specifications not exceeding the Advanced Buildings minimum LPD table; Section 3.10 covers the installation of ENERGY STAR-labeled cool roofs. Follow the requirements laid out in the Core Performance Guide to reduce operating costs, urban heat island effect, and energy use and to maximize occupants' comfort. Small private spaces intended for single, temporary occupancy (e.g., for making confidential telephone calls) may be included as part of a larger thermal zone, since changes in occupancy will not cause large swings in the heating and cooling loads. OPTION 2. Comparison with ASHRAE 90.1-2007 In this option, compare the design annual energy cost with the annual energy cost based on meeting the minimum ASHRAE 90.1-2007 requirements. Only energy costs for space heating, space cooling,and associated fans and pumps are considered; however, the performance ofthese systems is influenced by the performance of other building systems. To determine the reduction in annual costs for the project area, consider the entire building area that is served by the HVAC plant for the project in the evaluation, since the building design and operations beyond the project space influence the design and operation of the HVAC plant. Energy-Efficient Buildings Landscaping protects a building from wind and provides shade, which helps reduce the heat island effect. Characteristically, buildings oriented along an east-west axis obtain the most effective exterior shading. Confirm that the selected building is weather tight and meets code-minimum insulation levels. Lighting accounts for a major portion of a commercial building's energy budget. Efficient lighting in common areas, inside and out, reduces costs. Confirm that the owner has established lighting density standards for all tenant spaces. EA CI Credit 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 187 EFTA00281706 EA CI Credit 1.3 Consider the availability of natural light for daylighting and opportunities for natural ventilation. Windows high on walls, clerestories, and light shelves will maximize daylight penetration into a space. Light pipes or fiber optic devices can be used to introduce daylight in less accessible spaces. Inspect the existing HVAC system. Discuss opportunities for specifying high efficiency HVAC equipment with the building owner. When included in the project scope, specify high-performance chillers and boilers with optimal part-load operation (e.g., variable-speed chillers and boilers with modulating burners). Specify high-efficiency motors for all applications and variable-speed drives for fans, chillers, and pumps. Confirm that a building energy management system exists and is functional. If the project space is part of a larger building, determine whether the building controls interface with the functions within the project area. A good energy management system will facilitate smooth building startups and shutdowns and optimize efficiency and occupant comfort. 5. Timeline and Team The owner and project team should thoroughly research the energy efficiency of potential tenant spaces. Review energy and water utility bills and develop, ideally, a 3-year history of use. Seek clarification on how utilitieswill be prorated in a multitenant building. 6. Calculations OPTION 1. Equipment Efficiency and Zoning Controls If the building has no separate method for modulating the HVAC system in response to space demand, such as demand-controlled ventilation or modulation of the HVAC system tied to occupant sensor controls, Meet the following criteria ■ The system must be capable of modulating air-handling units (AHUs) and zone minimum supply volume below 0.30 cubic feet per minute per square foot of supply volume for standard variable air volume (VAV) terminals, or below as% of the peak design flow rate for fan-powered VAV boxes. For spaces where the minimum outdoor air flow exceeds the minimum supply volumes specified here, use occupant sensors or demand-controlled ventilation to achieve these minimum supply volumes. ■ The building control system must include controls for fan static pressure reset. ■ The mandatory requirements ofASHRAE90.1-2007 and ASHRAE 62.1-2007 must be met. OPTION 2. Comparison with ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Option 2 rewards reductions in the annual cost for electricityand fuel to drive the HVAC system. The project team compares the results from 2. simulation models, tbased on the actual design and a second, similar model based on meting all applicable mandatory and prescriptive provisions of ASHRAE90.1-2007. The standardhas zenergycomparison methods,both ofwhich are appropriatefordemonstrating energy cost savings to eam this credit. The energy cost budget method, found in Section ti of the standard, allows projects to trade off energy performance between building systems as long as the calculated annual energy cost is no greater than that for the budget case. The performance rating method, found in Appendix G, was developed to rate the energy efficiency of buildings relative to a baseline that represents "typical" construction practices. The methods differ in the way they identify the budget or baseline HVAC system. Mother important difference is that the energy cost budget does not recognize energy-efficient design of air distribution systems, and the performance rating method does. 168 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281707 Both methods include all end-use load components, including exhaust fans, parking garage ventilation, snow-melt and freeze-protection equipment, façade lighting, swimming pool heaters and pumps, elevators and escalators, refrigeration, and cooking. An end use that does not affect trade-offs between systems can be excluded from the energy cost budget. Fora typical Commercial Interiors project, where the project space is only 1 of several tenants being served by a common HVAC system, the energy cost budget method is adequate and more direct. The performance rating method is considered more rigorous and comprehensive and is more appropriate for projects using unconventional HVAC systems. Option z involves modifying the ASHRAE 90.1-2007 modeling requirements. The relationship of the energy end use to the calculations is shown in Tablet, and the modifications to the modeling requirements are listed in Table a. The referenced sections and terminology in the tables and the following narrative are for the energy cost budget method. Table 1. Energy End Uses for Option 2, Modeling Calculation Using ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Section 11 Energy End Uses Design Case Design Energy Cost DEC Baseline Case Energy Cost Budget ECB Heating Needed to model DEC Used in Option 2 calculation Needed to model ECB Used in Option 2 calculation Fans/Pumps Needed to model DEC Used in Option 2 calculation Needed to model ECB Used in Option 2 calculation Lighting Needed to model DEC But Costs are Not Included Needed to model ECB But Costs are Not Included Plug and Process loads Needed to model DEC But Costs are Not Included Needed to model ECB But Costs are Not Included Service Water Heating May be used to model DEC But Costs are Not Included May be used to model ECB But Costs are Not Included Miscellaneous Loads Not required Not required STEP 1. Select a Modeler The calculation will likely require energy simulation modeling. Sections 11.2 and G2.2 detail the requirements and software. Project teams may find that their logical first step is to identify an individual or firm with experience in energy modeling. STEP 2. Determine the Building Segment The simulation should generally involve more than just the project space and model the building segment that is served by the common HVAC system. For example, if the project area takes up the third floor of a s-story building and the building has a single central plant, the entire building should be modeled. STEP 3. Select a Modeling Method Decidewhich modeling method to use. The energy cost budget (Section ii) is less demanding and may entail less cost. However, some host buildings (particularly those that are LEED certified) may already have been modeled using the performance rating method (Appendix G), and much of the work may be completed. STEP 4. Obtain Building Information Unless an earlier energy simulation modeling run and report are available, the modeler and the project mechanical engineer or architect should review the as-built drawings of the building and scout the premises to determine the existing conditions for at least the segment of the building with which the project area shares a common central HVAC system. The existing building envelope is used for the entire building segment being modeled, EA CI Credit 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 189 EFTA00281708 EA CI Credit 13 including the project area. Determine the edsting conditions for operational schedules, lighting, HVAC systems and zones, and possibly service hot water systems for the rest of the building segment. Information should include the quantity of fenestration and its exposure, the thermal conductivity of all exterior walls, windows and doors, the type of HVAC system, and the size and efficiency of the HVAC components. For the occupied areas other than the project space,document the type of occupancyand operation schedule. Estimate the existing lighting and plug loads for these areas. Obtain other relevant information as necessary. STEP 5. Model the Design Case For the project area, use the edsting building envelope, but for heating, cooling, fans and pump, lighting and plug loads, and (if needed) service water heating, use the project design. Any modifications to the HVAC central plant being made in conjunction with the project should be included in the design case. These changes do not have to be within the project area or part of the project's contractual scope of work if they are being done for the project occupants' benefit. Including these changes should improve the performance being measured under this credit If the project has attained SS Credit 1, Site Selection, Option 2, Path 10, Water Use Reduction-30%, or WE Credit 1, Water Use Reduction, the design case may reflect the reduced volumes of water for service hot water systems. The HVAC energy costs should not include the energy costs associated with service hot water systems. For the rest of the building segment, use the existing conditions. Together, the results will generate the design energy cost (DEC). Follow Section 11 or Appendix G and the additional information in Table 2. Table 2. Option 2 Procedure ASHRAMENSA 90.1 Section Design Energy Cost Model DEC Energy Cost Budget Model ECB 1. Design Model Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the existing conditions for the balance of the modeled building segment, as field verified (step 0 in the procedure) for the design case. Baseline Case: Follow Table 11.3.1, using the mandatory and prescriptive requirements for the project space, but use the existing conditions for the balance of the modeled building segment. Alternative Baseline Case: Follow Table 11.3.1, using the mandatory and prescriptive requirements for both the project space and the balance of the modeled building segment. 2. Additions and Alterations Follow Table 11.3.1. See (b) concerning the exclusion of HVAC systems not part of the modeled building segment. Follow Table 11.3.1 3. Space Use Classification Follow Table 11.3.1 Follow Table 11.3.1 4. Schedules Follow Table 11.3.1 when field verification can not be attained. Use the same schedule for DEC. ECB and A-ECB. 5. Building Envelope Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the existing envelope conditions for the balance of the modeled building segment, as field verified (step 4 in the procedure) for the design case. Baseline Case Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the existing envelope conditions for the balance of the modeled building segment. Alternative Baseline Case: Follow Table 11.3.1, using the mandatory and prescriptive requirements, as described. for the baseline case. 170 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281709 6. Lighting Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the field verified lighting for the balance of the modeled building segment. Baseline Case- For the project space, use either 9.5 or 9.6; for the balance of the modeled building segment, use the same values used in the DEC model. Alternative Baseline Case: For both the project space and the balance of the modeled building segment, use either 9.5 or 9.6. 7. 8. 9. Thermal Blocks Follow Table 11.3.1 Same as DEC model. 10. HVAC Systems Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the field verified HVAC system information of the central plant when existing. Follow Table 11.3.1, which references Figure 11.3.2, Table 11.3.2A 11. Service Hot Water Systems Follow Table 11.3.1. If the project space has attained WE Credit 1. the model may reflect the reduced volumes. If the building has attained SS Credit 1 Option J. the model may reflect the reduced volumes. Follow Table 11.3.1 12 Miscellaneous Loads Follow Table 11.3.1. If the project space anticipates attaining EA Credit 1.4, the DEC may use a latter value reflecting the actual plug load planned for the project area. In the balance of the modeled building segment, use the field verified plug load (step 4 in the procedure). End-uses excluded in Section 13 and 14 of Table 11.3.1 may be excluded: these include exhaust fans, parking garage ventilation fans, exterior building lighting, swimming pool heaters and pumps, elevators and escalators, refrigeration equipment and cooking equipment. Project Space: Follow Table 11.3.1. If the project space anticipates attaining EA Credit 1.4. the ECB shall use a higher plug load value reflecting the occupancy type. If EA Credit 1.4 is not being pursued, use the same plug value in both the DEC and ECB. Balance of the modeled building segment: ECB: Use existing plug load values; A-ECB: Use a higher plug load value reflecting the occupancy type. Both ECB and A-ECB: End-uses excluded in Section 13 and 14 of Table 11.3.1 may be excluded. STEP 6. Model the Baseline Case The baseline case is calculated by replacing the design conditions of the project area with the standard's mandatory and prescriptive requirements. For lighting, use either the building area method (Table 9.5.1) in or the space-by-space method (Section 9.6) in ASH RAE 90.1-2007. For the baseline HVAC model (no modifications to the central plant), change only those items within the project areato the mandatory and prescriptive requirements of the standard. Follow the requirements outlined in Table 11.3.1 of Section nor Table G.3.1 in Appendix G of the standard, and the additional notes in Table 2. Model the rest of the building segment using the same existing building conditions used in the design case. If modifications to the central plant are included in the design case modeling, replace them in thebaseline case with the mandatoryand prescriptive equivalent For example, ifpumpswere replaced with efficiencies higher than required, use the required equivalent in the baseline model. If extensive HVAC revisions have been made, followthe procedure outlined in Section It or Appendix G, using Figure 11.3.2 or Table G3.1.1 to determine the budget building design criteria. If using Section 11, the baseline budget building condenser cooling source may be defined as air, regardless of the proposed design, if the changed cooling equipment has less than 150 tons of cooling capacity. This exception is made to encourage the specification of more efficient water-based cooling systems over air-based cooling systems in smaller equipment sizes. Document the choices made in the narrative included with the submittal. EA CI Credit 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 171 EFTA00281710 EA CI Credit 13 STEP 6A. Model an Alternative Baseline Case In the above method, the differential between the DEC and energy cost budget increases as the energy efficiency of the building decreases. This could make it easier to reach the credit thresholds in a less efficient building. So as not to penalize project teams that have wisely located in a highly energy-efficient building—perhaps a building already LEED certified—an alternative baseline method is provided. If the existing conditions are more energy efficient than the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007, replace the existing conditions in the baseline model with the ASH RAE 90.1-2007 requirements. Basethe credit calculations oneither baseline. Document the choice in the narrative included with the submittal; if results for both baselines were generated, consider submitting both. STEP 7. Calculate the Energy Reduction Because of the 2 possible baseline cases, there are 2 energy reduction calculations. The reduction for the model baseline case uses ASHRAE 90.1-2007 mandatory and prescriptive requirements in the project area and edstingconditions in the balance of the modeled building segment, as shown in Equation 1. It corrects for the area relationship between the project space and the modeled building segment. The reduction for the alternative baseline, potentially more generous if the building is highly efficient, is shown in Equation 2. No adjustment is made for the project-to-building segment area because the calculation evaluates the overall performance of the HVAC system. Equation 1. Percent Annual HVAC Energy Cost Reduction Baseline: Project Area - ANSI/ AHRAE/IESNA 90.t mandatory and prescriptive requirements Balance of modeled Building Segment - Existing Conditions ECBmt — DECK& Reduction = EC8 NyAC X Project Area Total Segment Area Equation 2. Percent Annual HVAC Energy Cost Reduction Alternate Baseline: Both Project Area and Balance of Modeled Building Segment - ANSI/ AHRAE/IESNA 90.1 mandatory and prescriptive requirements Reduction — A-ECB„wc — DEC„µ.,c A-ECB,„„c 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ List locations and functions of HVAC system automatic controls or sensors. ■ Document potential energy savings per control and reasons for zone distribution. ■ For cost-budget compliance, list the proposed design energy by end use, associated peak demand, and cost. Additionally, list baseline costs by energy type. 172 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281711 8. Examples Table 3 illustrates a calculation using Option 2 and the energy cost budget method. The baseline case and alternative baseline are both shown. Using the baseline case, the design case results in a 36.3% reduction. Using the alternative baseline, the design case has a 15.8% reduction. Table 3. HVAC Energy Cost Reduction, Energy Cost Budget HVAC Energy Uses Design Case Energy Type Electric (kWh) Gas run Energy Use (10 Btu) Annual Cost ($) Space Heating Natural Gas 4,500 455,000 $3.223 Space Cooling Electric 240.300 819,904 $16.800 Fans/Pumps Electric 120.150 409,952 Wimp Design Energy Cost HVAC (DEC, ) ,,,c $28.421 Baseline Case Project Area - Code Balance - Existing Conditions Space Heating Natural Gas 4,575 457,500 $3.239 Space Cooling Electric 270,000 921,240 $18,876 Fans/Pumps Electric 122,000 416,264 $8,529 Baseline Energy Cost Budget HVAC (ECBFroc) $30,645 Reduction = (ECBwaz - DECwoz)/ ECB.rmc x (Project Are / Total Segmen Area) Reduction = ($30.645 - $28,421)1($30,645 x 120.000 ft / 100.000 ftil Reduction = 36.3% 36.3% > 30% 2 Points Earned Alternate Baseline Project Area - Code Balance - Cade Space Heating Natural Gas 5,200 520,000 $3,682 Space Cooling Electric 295.000 1,006,540 $20,624 Fans/Pumps Electric 460,620 $9,438 Alternate Baseline Energy Cost Budget HVAC (A-ECBMV1c) $33.744 Reduction = (A.ECI3Hue- DECHnt )/ A-Ea:tom) Reduction = ($33.744 - $28,421)/533,744 Reduction = 15.8% 15.8%> 15% 1 Point Earned 9. Exemplary Performance Projects that use Option a and demonstrate that HVAC system component performance for the tenant space is 33% more efficient than a system that is in minimum compliance with ASHRAE 90.1- 2007 are eligible to earn 1 point under Innovation in Design. 10. Regional Variations Regional variance is already incorporated in ASH RAE 90.1-2007, which accounts for 8 climate zones and 3 climate subzones and their minimum envelope and glazing property requirements. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Sic the ( terations and Maintenance section in EA Credit LI. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. EA CI Credit 1.3 2C39 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 173 EFTA00281712 EA CI Credit 13 Websites DOE-a This comprehensive energyanalysis program predicts the hourly performance of a building's energy use and utility costs. ENERGY START httpq .erieaarov ENERGYSTARisagovemment-industrypartnershipmanagedbytheU.S.EnvironmentalProtection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy. The program's website offers energy management strategies, benchmarking software tools for buildings, product procurement guidelines, and lists of ENERGY STAR-qualified products and buildings. National Renewable Energy Program, Energy-to http:fiwww.nrel.Sbuildinpfenergyto.html ENERGY-to is an award-winning software tool for designing low-energy buildings. ENERGY-to integrates daylighting, passive solarheating, and low-energy cooling strategies with energy-efficient shell design and mechanical equipment. The program is applicable to commercial and residential buildings of 10,000 square feet or less. U.S. Department of Energy Building Energy Codes Program http:/ mcksar The Building Energy Codes program provides comprehensive resources for states and code users, including code comparisons, compliance software, news, and the Status of State Energy Codes database. The database includes state energy contacts, code status, code history, Department of Energygrants awarded, and construction data. U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy http://wvLeere.energy.govibuildingsi This extensive website for energy efficiency is linked to a number of DOE-funded sites that address buildings and energy. Of particular interest is the tools directory that includes the Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Tool for estimating end-use consumption in commercial buildings. The tool allows the user to define a set of buildings by principal activity, size, vintage, region, climate zone, and fuels (main heat, secondary heat, cooling, and water heating), and to view the resulting energy consumption and expenditure estimates in tabular format. Print Media ANSIIASHRAE/IESNAStandani90.1-2007 User's Manual (ASHRAE, zoo7). The ANSIJASHRAWIESNA 90.1-2007 User's Manual was developed as a companion document to ANSI/ASHRAWIESNA90.1-2007 (Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings). The User's Manual explains the new standard and includes sample calculations, useful reference material, and information on the intent and application of the standard. It is abundantly illustrated and contains numerous examples and tables of reference data. It also includes a complete set ofcompliance forms andworksheets that can be used to document compliance with the standard. The manual is helpful to architects and engineers who must apply the standard to the design of the buildings, plan examiners and field inspectors who must enforce the standard in areas where it is adopted as code, and contractors who must construct buildings in compliance with the standard. A compact disk is included that contains the EnvStd .4.0 Computer Program for performing building envelope trade-offs plus electronic versions of the compliance forms found in the manual. IESNA Lighting Handbook, ninth edition (IESNA, 2000). Mechanical and Electrical Systemsfor Buildings,fourthedition,byBenjaminStein andJohn S. Reynolds (John Wiley & Sons0992.). 174 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281713 Sustainable Building Technical Manual (Public Technology, Inc.,996). httpWwww.pti.org. Advanced Buildings: Eneigy Benchmarkfor Hth Performance Buildings (E-Benchmark) (New Buildings C Institute'.. EA 13. Definitions An economizer is a device used to make building systems more energy efficient. Examples include HVAC enthalpy controls, which are based on humidity and temperature. An energy simulation model, or energy model, is a computer-generated representation of the anticipated energy consumption of a building. It permits a comparison of energy performance, given proposed energy efficiency measures, vith the baseline. Credit 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 175 EFTA00281714 176 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281715 OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE-EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES ou Credit Points EA Credit 1.4 1-4 points Intent To achieve increasing levels of energy conservation beyond the prerequisite standard to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirements For all ENERGY STAR' qualified equipment and appliances installed as part of the tenant's scope of work, achieve one of the following percentages (by rated power): Percent Installed ENERGY STAR Qualified Equipment of ENERGY STAR Eligible Equipment Points 70% 1 77% 2 84% 3 90% 4 This requirement applies to appliances, office equipment, electronics, and commercial food service equipment. Excluded are HVAC, lighting, and building envelope products. EA CREDIT 1.4 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 177 EFTA00281716 CI Credit 1.4 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues According to the 2003 Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey, conducted by the Energy Information Agency, plug loads, such as energy use for office equipment and computers, account for 9% of total office building energy consumption and is% of total electricity consumption25 Because of the magnitude of plug loads in certain building types, encouraging their reduction is very important. Plug loads, however, are hard to quantify and regulate. The few data that are available generally show that end-use consumption is quite variable—both across building types and within building types. ASH RAE 90.1-2007, addresses plug loads in a limited degree through the performance rating method in Appendix G. Economic Issues Using ENERGY STAR-qualified products will reduce the energy used in the project space. ENERGY STAR reports that qualified products use 30-75% less electricity than other products!' Although the initial purchase cost may be higher, the energy savings realized will translate directly into long- term cost savings. If every computer purchased by businesses this year met the new ENERGY STAR requirements, firms would save more than $z60 million over the lifetime of those models— equivalent to lighting 130 million square feet of U.S. commercial building space each year." 2. Related Credits Because thermal comfort can be affected by energy-using equipment, the equipment specifier and the HVAC designer need to coordinate their plans. Additionally, although not typically required by LEED,equipment and appliances can be included within the scope ofcommissioning. The following prerequisites and credits address these issues: ■ EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Prerequisite a: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Credit 1.3: Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC ■ EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning ■ IEQ Credit 7.1: Thermal Comfort—Design 3. Summary of Referenced Standard ENERGY STAR'-Qualified Products httplfwv.energystar.gov Products in more than 50 categories are eligible for ENERGY STAR certification. They use less energy, save money, and help protect the environment. 4. Implementation Differing occupant densities and work schedules cause wide variations in plug loads and make it difficult to establish a constant metric.A few people in a big space with inefficient computers will use fewer watts per square foot than an office full of high-efficiency monitors, networked computers, laptops, and LCD displays. Similarly, fast food restaurants, where there is little or no sit-down dining, rate poorly when area is included in the plug load calculation. Using Btu per meal may be a more reliable metric for a fast food space. In retail stores, sales volume or the number of clients served potentially has abetter correlation to process load. Using ENERGY STAR-qualified products is the most straightforward way to optimize energy performance. Appliances and equipment can have a large impact on the energy usewithin a space. Tableicompares 178 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281717 the regulated loadswithinofficeswith unregulated processloads.Table 2. shows that the rated power of equipment is considerably higher than the actual average demand of the system. Table 1. Regulated vs. Non regulated Energy Consumption, by End Use Load k8tu (sf-yr) watts (s0 Heating 11.40 0.38 Cooling 7.46 0.25 Ventilation 3.63 0.12 Water heating 1.87 0.06 Lighting 22.15 0.74 Regulated Subtotal 46.51 1.56 Cooking 1.01 0.03 Refrigeration 0.37 0.01 Office Equipment 12.65 0.42 Misc. 3.45 0.12 Process Subtotal 17.48 0.59 Source: EIA. C8ECS 1995 Table 2. Energy Consumption and Rated Power, by Equipment Type Energy Star Equipment Rated Power (watts) Total Number in Project Number of Energy Star Total Powre in Project (watts) Power that is Energy Star (watts) Desktop Computer 120 10 8 1200 960 Notebook Computer 45 20 16 900 720 Display (CRT) 15" 100 0 0 Display (CRT) 17" 200 2 1 400 200 Display (CRT) 21" 300 0 0 Display (LCD) 15' 45 2 2 90 90 Display (LCD) 17' 75 6 4 450 300 Display (LCD) 21' 120 0 0 Desktop laser printer 120 1 0 120 0 Office laser printer 250 2 1 500 250 Desktop copier 225 0 0 Office copier 750 1 I 750 750 Fax machine 45 1 I 45 45 Scanner 45 0 0 Refrigerator 750 1 1 750 750 Dishwasher 1200 1 1 1200 1200 0 Televisions 100 0 Commercial refrigeratodfreezer 1000 0 Commercial fryer 10000 0 Commercial hot food holding cabinet 1500 0 Commercial steam cooker 8000 0 Clothes washer 350 0 0 Clothes dryer 2000 0 0 Totals 6405 5265 Percent Energy Star 82.2% Sources: Energy Star Websile (attafriSpO DOE Energy Information Portal (htlp://mweeere.enercy.gov) Lawrence Berkeley nation& Laboratory Websile for equipment based on a variety of real* paw dross of different equipment and Reports (htlpflencluseiblgod ESTAR Moog Note: The values in this table represent average are applicable only for v.ekghting the LEED calculation estimates of actual paw, in use. f government infarnalen 'arm. The values and see not meant to be accurate rated parer sures based on EA CI Credit 1.4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 179 EFTA00281718 EA CI Credit L4 Select energy-efficient equipment and appliances in the following categories: ■ Appliances, such as dishwashers, refrigerators, and water coolers. ■ Office equipment, such as computers, copiers, fax machines, digital duplicators, notebook computers, tablet PCs, mailing machines, external power adapters, monitors, printers, scanners, and all-in-ones. ■ Electronics, such as battery charging systems, cordless phones, combination units, digital- to-analog converter boxes (DTAs), DVD players, external power adapters, home audio, televisions,and VCRs. ■ Commercial food service equipment, such as dishwashers, fryers, hot food holding cabinets, ice machines, solid door refrigerators and freezers, and steam cookers. HVAC, lighting systems, and building envelope products are outside the scope of EA Credit 1.4. The credit applies to all installed equipment and appliances listed by the ENERGY STAR program. Any categories added to the ENERGY STAR list in the future may be used in the project team's calculation. Periodically review the ENERGY STAR website for updates to product categories and models. Consult the interpretation rulings for this credit to find the rated power that must be used in the calculation. MI appliances and equipment installed at the time of occupancy must be included in this credit. Equipment and appliances must meet the ENERGY STAR criteria current at the time of purchase. Any items covered by the ENERGY STAR program that are purchased after new criteria have been issued must meet the new criteria. Upgraded Replacements When appliances are replaced with ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment from a different category and at a lower rated power, the higher rated power value corresponding to the new product category can be used for this credit. For example, if a desktop computer is replaced with a new, ENERGY STAR-qualified notebook computer, the team may use 120 watts as the rated power for the desktop computer in place of 45 watts for the notebook computer. Similarly, when a CRT display unit is replaced with a new, more efficient ENERGY STAR-qualified LCD display unit, the higher rated power value of the CRT display may be used in the credit calculation. The replacement must occur between the time of project registration and certification application. The rated power of a piece of equipment is the maximum power it can draw under any conditions. The actual power used by office equipment and appliances is often less than half the rated power (Table;). The actual power varies significantly based on factors such as frequency of use, number of simultaneous functions, resolution, and mode. The default power values used in this credit are not intended to be accurate estimates of the actual power draw of the equipment. Rather, the values weight the calculation based on the contribution of each piece of equipment or appliance to the overall plug load of the building. 180 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281719 Table 3. Comparison of Actual Power and Rated Powe , by Equipment Type Equipment lype Actual power draw (as a % of rated power draw) Sauce PCs 25 - 50% Norford et al., 1989 Impact and inkjet Printers 20- 25% Computer network equipment 30% Kunz, 1997 Computers 14 - 33% Komor, 1997 Monitors -28 - 85% Printers -9 - 32% PCs 5 - 35% Hosni, Jones, and X, 1999 Facsimile Machine 20 — 45% Network Server 50% Monitor 15 — 36% 5. Timeline and Team The office manager and project owner should institute a purchasing policy that specifies ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment and appliances. 6. Calculations At least 7o% of the total power demand of all eligible equipment must be attributable to ENERGY STAR-qualified products. The calculation is based on power demand rather than the number of appliances to normalize the anticipated energy savings to the consumption of each item. Use the following calculation to determine percentage achievement: STEP 1 Count the eligible appliances and pieces of equipment in the project and enter the number in column 3 of Table a. Indicate how many of each equipment type are ENERGY STAR-qualified products, and enter that number in column 4. An upgrade should be shown in the same row as the item it replaced so that the team can count the higher wattage of the replaced equipment. STEP 2 Multiply the total numbers and the ENERGY STAR numbers bythe rated power values in column 2 to calculate the